iPECS eMG80
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description & Operation
Manual
Please read this manual carefully before operating System.
Retain it for future reference.
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Revision History
Issue
1.0
Date
Sep., 2013
SW
1.0A
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES
Initial Release
Copyright© 2013 Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved
This material is copyrighted by Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd. (Ericsson-LG). Any unauthorized
reproductions, use or disclosure of this material, or any part thereof, is strictly prohibited and is
a violation of Copyright Laws. Ericsson-LG reserves the right to make changes in
specifications at any time without notice. The information furnished by Ericsson-LG in this
material is believed to be accurate and reliable, but is not warranted to be true in all cases. If
you are not the intended recipient, you should destroy or retrieve this material to Ericsson-LG.
iPECS is trademark of Ericsson-LG Co., Ltd.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Table of Contents
1. Introduction.............................................................................. 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Manual Application ...................................................................... 1
Manual Organization.................................................................... 1
Feature Information ..................................................................... 1
Buttons & Term Variations.......................................................... 2
2. System ...................................................................................... 3
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
8-Digit Station Numbering Plan .................................................. 3
Account Code............................................................................... 4
Alarm Signal/Door Bell ................................................................ 6
Authorization Codes (Password) ............................................... 8
Auto Call Recording .................................................................. 11
Auto Call Release....................................................................... 12
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) ........................................... 13
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing ..................................................13
ACD Statistics Report ..........................................................................14
Agents ..................................................................................................16
2.7.3.1
2.7.3.2
2.7.3.3
2.7.3.4
2.7.3.5
2.7.3.6
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.7.6
2.7.7
2.7.8
2.7.9
2.7.10
2.7.11
2.7.12
Agent Auto Connect/Zap Tone .............................................................. 16
Agent Automatic Wrap-Up ..................................................................... 17
Agent Help Request ............................................................................... 18
Agent Id Login/Logout ............................................................................ 19
Agent On/Off Duty w/Reason Code ....................................................... 21
Agent Queued Calls Display .................................................................. 23
Announcements ...................................................................................25
Auto ACD DND Unavailable Service ...................................................27
Calls-In-Queue routing .........................................................................28
Calls-In-Queue Page Alert ...................................................................29
Event Messages ...................................................................................31
Group Mail Box ....................................................................................32
Group Name .........................................................................................33
Incoming Call Routing ..........................................................................34
Supervisors ..........................................................................................35
2.7.12.1
2.7.12.2
2.7.12.3
Agent Call Monitor.................................................................................. 35
Agent Status Control .............................................................................. 36
Group Status Display ............................................................................. 37
i
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.7.12.4
2.7.12.5
2.7.12.6
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
Issue 1.0
Group Parameter Control ....................................................................... 39
Supervisor Help Response .................................................................... 40
Supervisor Login/Logout ........................................................................ 41
Automatic Pause Insertion........................................................ 43
Automatic Privacy...................................................................... 44
Auto Service Mode Control ....................................................... 45
Automatic System Daylight Saving Time ................................ 46
Automatic Time Synchronization ............................................. 47
Call Duration Warning Tone...................................................... 48
Call Forward ............................................................................... 49
Call Forward, Preset .................................................................. 53
Call Park...................................................................................... 55
Call Pick-Up ................................................................................ 56
2.17.1 Directed Call Pick-Up ...........................................................................56
2.17.2 Group Call Pick-Up ..............................................................................57
2.17.3 Pick Up Group Call Pick-Up .................................................................58
2.18 Call Re-Routing (CRR) ............................................................... 60
2.19 Call Transfer ............................................................................... 61
2.19.1
2.19.2
2.19.3
2.19.4
Call Transfer, Outside Line ..................................................................61
Call Transfer, Station ...........................................................................62
Call Transfer, System Announcement .................................................64
Call Transfer, Voice Mail ......................................................................65
2.20 Call Waiting/Camp-On ............................................................... 66
2.21 Conference ................................................................................. 67
2.21.1
2.21.2
2.21.3
2.21.4
2.21.5
2.22
2.23
2.24
2.25
Conference Group................................................................................67
Conference Member View & Delete ....................................................70
Conference Room ................................................................................71
Multi-Party Conference ........................................................................73
Unsupervised Conference ...................................................................74
Customer Site Name .................................................................. 76
Data Line Security...................................................................... 77
Delayed Line Ring ...................................................................... 78
Delayed Auto Attendant ............................................................ 79
2.25.1 DISA Incoming Line-Russia- ................................................................79
2.25.2 Normal Line Ring Assignment .............................................................80
2.26 Diagnostics & Maintenance ...................................................... 81
ii
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.27 Dial-by-Name .............................................................................. 82
2.28 Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover .................................................. 84
2.29 Dialing Restrictions ................................................................... 85
2.29.1
2.29.2
2.29.3
2.29.4
2.30
2.31
2.32
2.33
2.34
2.35
2.36
Differential Ring ......................................................................... 93
DND (Do Not Disturb) ................................................................ 95
Door Open .................................................................................. 96
Emergency Call Caller-Location Support ................................ 97
Emergency Call .......................................................................... 99
Executive/Secretary Forward.................................................. 100
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail ....................................... 102
2.36.1
2.36.2
2.36.3
2.36.4
2.37
2.38
2.39
2.40
2.41
AA/VM Group .....................................................................................102
In-band (DTMF) AA/VM Signaling .....................................................103
SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface) AA/VM Signaling ...........104
Voice Mailbox Translation ..................................................................106
Flexible Numbering Plan ......................................................... 107
Forced Disconnect Intrusion .................................................. 108
Green Power Save ................................................................... 109
Headset Compatibility ............................................................. 110
Hold ........................................................................................... 112
2.41.1
2.41.2
2.41.3
2.41.4
2.41.5
2.42
2.43
2.44
2.45
Class of Service ...................................................................................85
Day/Timed & Night Station COS (Class of Service) ............................88
Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock ................................89
Walking COS (Class of Service) ..........................................................91
Automatic Hold ...................................................................................112
Hold Preference .................................................................................113
Hold Recall .........................................................................................114
Exclusive Hold ....................................................................................115
System Hold .......................................................................................116
Hot Desk ................................................................................... 118
ICLID Call Routing ................................................................... 120
In-Room Indication .................................................................. 121
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail .................................... 122
2.45.1 Integrated AA/VM Overview...............................................................122
2.45.2 Integrated Auto Attendant ..................................................................123
2.45.2.1
2.45.2.2
Company Directory .............................................................................. 125
Remote Announcement Recording ...................................................... 127
iii
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3 Integrated Voice Mail .........................................................................128
2.45.3.1
2.45.3.2
2.45.3.3
2.45.3.4
2.45.3.5
2.45.3.6
2.45.3.7
2.45.3.8
2.45.3.9
2.45.3.10
2.45.3.11
2.45.3.12
2.45.3.13
2.45.3.14
2.45.3.15
2.45.3.16
2.45.3.17
2.45.3.18
Administrator Mailbox........................................................................... 128
Announce Only Mailbox ....................................................................... 129
Call Forward from VM .......................................................................... 130
Distribution Lists ................................................................................... 131
E-Mail Notification ................................................................................ 132
Mark a Message as Private ................................................................. 133
Mark a Message for Delivery Confirmation .......................................... 134
Message Cascade ............................................................................... 135
Message Retrieval ............................................................................... 136
Message Retrieval Options .................................................................. 138
Message Storage ................................................................................. 140
Outbound Message Notification ........................................................... 141
Personal CCR/User Greeting DISA ..................................................... 143
Remote Message Retrieval .................................................................. 145
Send a Message .................................................................................. 146
Voice Mail Back-up Station .................................................................. 147
Voice Mail Class of Service.................................................................. 148
Voice Mailbox Settings ......................................................................... 149
2.45.4 System Voice Memo ..........................................................................150
2.46
2.47
2.48
2.49
2.50
2.51
2.52
2.53
2.54
2.55
2.56
2.57
2.58
2.59
2.60
2.61
2.62
2.63
2.64
IP Bridge Mode ......................................................................... 152
IP System DECT ....................................................................... 153
IP FAX Relay, T.38 Support ..................................................... 154
LBC (Loud Bell Control) .......................................................... 155
LCR (Least Cost Routing) ....................................................... 156
Linked Station Pairs ................................................................ 158
LNR (Last Number Redial) ...................................................... 160
Mobile Extension ..................................................................... 162
MOH (Music-On-Hold).............................................................. 164
Multiple Language Support..................................................... 166
Multiple Voice Mailbox Support .............................................. 168
Network Security & Priority .................................................... 169
Outside Call Redirect............................................................... 170
Outside Call Time Restriction ................................................. 171
Outside Line Access................................................................ 172
Outside Line Queuing.............................................................. 174
Personal Groups ...................................................................... 176
Pre-Defined & Custom Text Display Messages .................... 177
Prefix Dialing Table.................................................................. 181
iv
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.65 Remote Control from Mobile Phone....................................... 182
2.66 Ringing Line Preference.......................................................... 183
2.67 Speed Dial................................................................................. 184
2.67.1
2.67.2
2.67.3
2.67.4
2.67.5
Display Security..................................................................................184
Speed Dial Pause Insertion................................................................185
Station Speed Dial .............................................................................186
System Speed Dial.............................................................................189
System Speed Zone (Groups) ...........................................................192
2.68 Station Call Coverage .............................................................. 193
2.69 Station Groups ......................................................................... 195
2.70 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) ........................... 199
2.70.1 Call Cost Display ................................................................................199
2.70.2 Lost Call Recording ............................................................................201
2.70.3 SMDR Call Records ...........................................................................204
2.71 System Administration ............................................................ 207
2.71.1
2.71.2
2.71.3
2.71.4
Keyset Administration ........................................................................207
Multi-Level Admin Access ..................................................................208
Web Administration ............................................................................209
Web User Manual ..............................................................................210
2.72 System Alarm Notification Control ........................................ 211
2.73 System Networking.................................................................. 213
2.73.1 Distributed Control Network ...............................................................213
2.73.1.1
2.73.1.2
2.73.1.3
2.73.1.4
2.73.1.5
BLF Presentation ................................................................................. 216
(CAS) Attendant Call ............................................................................ 217
Centralized Voice Mail ......................................................................... 218
CO Transit-In........................................................................................ 219
CO Transit-Out..................................................................................... 220
2.74 Traffic Analysis ........................................................................ 221
2.74.1
2.74.2
2.74.3
2.74.4
2.75
2.76
2.77
2.78
2.79
Traffic Analysis, Attendant .................................................................223
Traffic Analysis, Call Reports .............................................................225
Traffic Analysis, H/W Usage ..............................................................226
Traffic Analysis, Line Reports ............................................................227
System Scenario Call Routing ................................................ 229
Universal Night Answer (UNA) ............................................... 230
Wake-Up Alarm, Enhanced ..................................................... 231
Wake-up Alarm, Standard ....................................................... 234
Web Call Back .......................................................................... 236
v
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.80 Zone Management ................................................................... 237
2.80.1
2.80.2
2.80.3
2.80.4
Holiday Assignment ...........................................................................237
Inter Zone Connection Limit ...............................................................238
Remote Devices .................................................................................239
Zone Outgoing Call Connection Limit ................................................240
3. Intercom................................................................................ 241
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
Barge In..................................................................................... 241
Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) .......... 243
Intercom (ICM) Call .................................................................. 244
Intercom Call Hold ................................................................... 245
Intercom Caller Controlled Signaling ..................................... 246
Intercom Lock-Out ................................................................... 247
Intercom Step Call ................................................................... 248
Intercom Tenancy Group ........................................................ 249
Intercom Transfer .................................................................... 251
Message Wait/Call Back .......................................................... 253
3.10.1
3.10.2
3.10.3
3.10.4
CLI Message Wait ..............................................................................253
Message Wait Reminder Tone ..........................................................256
Short Message Service (SMS)...........................................................257
Station Message Wait/Call Back ........................................................260
3.11 Paging ....................................................................................... 263
3.11.1 Internal/External & All Call Page ........................................................263
3.11.2 Meet Me Page ....................................................................................266
3.11.3 SOS Paging........................................................................................267
3.12 Push to Talk Paging................................................................. 268
4. Outside (co/ip) lines ............................................................ 270
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
Auto Fault Detection and Recovery ....................................... 270
Caller ID Mode .......................................................................... 271
CO Line Flash ........................................................................... 272
CO Line Release Guard Time.................................................. 273
CO Line Ring Detect ................................................................ 274
Dial Pulse Signaling................................................................. 275
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) ...................................................... 276
DID Line Digit Conversion....................................................... 278
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ..................................... 279
vi
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4.10 DTMF Signaling ........................................................................ 281
4.11 IP Address Dialing ................................................................... 282
4.12 IP Trunking ............................................................................... 283
4.12.1 H.323 v4 Service ................................................................................283
4.12.2 SIP Trunk Service ..............................................................................284
4.13 IP WAN Dialing after Answer .................................................. 285
4.14 ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network) ............................. 286
4.14.1
4.14.2
4.14.3
4.14.4
Calling/Called Party Identification ......................................................286
ISDN AOC (Advice of Charge)...........................................................288
Keypad Facility ...................................................................................289
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) ...................................................290
4.15 ISDN Supplementary Services................................................ 292
4.15.1 ISDN Call Deflection ..........................................................................292
4.15.2 ISDN Malicious Call ID Request ........................................................293
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
Line Monitor ............................................................................. 294
Multiple Calling Line Ids .......................................................... 295
Outside Line Groups ............................................................... 296
Outside Line Preset Forward .................................................. 297
Outside Line Ring Assignment............................................... 298
Private Line............................................................................... 299
5. iPECS phone ........................................................................ 300
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
Answering Machine Emulation ............................................... 300
Auto Called Number Redial (ACNR) ....................................... 302
Auto Release of [SPEAKER] ................................................... 304
Automatic Speaker Select ....................................................... 305
Background Music (BGM) ....................................................... 306
Call Log Display ....................................................................... 308
Call Profile Routing.................................................................. 309
DID Call Wait............................................................................. 311
DND – One-Time DND .............................................................. 312
Flex Button Direct Speed Dial Assignment ........................... 314
Flexible LED Flash Rates ........................................................ 315
Group Listening ....................................................................... 316
Intercom Signaling Mode ........................................................ 317
vii
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
5.20
5.21
5.22
5.23
5.24
5.25
5.26
5.27
5.28
Issue 1.0
Microphone Mute ..................................................................... 318
Off-Hook Signaling .................................................................. 319
On-Hook Dialing ....................................................................... 320
Outside Line Name Display..................................................... 321
Prime Line Immediate/Delayed ............................................... 322
Ring Tone Selection and Download ....................................... 324
Save Number Redial (SNR) ..................................................... 325
Serial DSS/BLF Console.......................................................... 326
Silent Text Message................................................................. 328
Speakerphone .......................................................................... 329
Station Flexible Buttons .......................................................... 330
Station Individual Call Routing (ICR) ..................................... 332
Station User Programming & Codes ...................................... 334
Two-Way Record ...................................................................... 340
Voice Over ................................................................................ 342
6. Attendants ............................................................................ 344
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
Attendant Call & Call Queuing ................................................ 344
Attendant Positions ................................................................. 345
Attendant Recall....................................................................... 346
Attendant Station User Program Codes ................................ 347
Call Forward, Attendant .......................................................... 351
Call Forward, Off-Net ............................................................... 352
Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode ................................... 354
DSS/BLF Consoles .................................................................. 356
Disable Outgoing Line Access ............................................... 358
DND Override ........................................................................... 359
Emergency Call Attendant Alert ............................................. 360
ez-Attendant ............................................................................. 362
Feature Cancel ......................................................................... 363
IP-Attendant.............................................................................. 364
Intrusion.................................................................................... 365
LCD Display Format Control ................................................... 366
System Clock Set ..................................................................... 367
viii
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
7. SLT (Single Line Telephone) .............................................. 369
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
Broker Call ................................................................................ 369
Howler Tone ............................................................................. 371
SLT Flash Mode ....................................................................... 372
SLT Message Wait Indication ................................................. 373
SLT Name Entry ....................................................................... 374
Transfer CLI to SLT.................................................................. 375
8. SIP extension ....................................................................... 376
8.1 SIP Phone Support .................................................................. 376
8.2 SIP Phone Provisioning, Ericsson-LG Phones ..................... 379
ix
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Manual Application
This document provides detailed information covering description and operation of the
numerous features available in the iPECS eMG80 Release 1 system software. The document is
written assuming the system employs the default-numbering plan for North America.
1.2 Manual Organization
Features are arranged alphabetically in six different major groupings as follows:

Section 2 System Features

Section 3 Intercom Features

Section 4 CO/IP lines

Section 5 iPECS IP & LDP Phones

Section 6 Attendant

Section 7 SLT

Section 8 SIP Extension
1.3 Feature Information
Each section is an alphabetical listing of features with the description and operation of each.
The structure is divided into 6 parts as below:

Description: explains the nature of the feature.

Operation: gives detailed step-by-step operation of the feature for Ericsson LG
phones (LDP digital and LIP IP phones) and SLTs. In some cases a Flexible button
on the Ericsson-LG phones can be assigned to activate the feature. In this case,
the user entries to assign the button are provided.

Conditions: explains known feature interactions and constraints related to the
feature.

Programming: lists database entries that may be required for proper feature
operation. This lists are related to Station Admin programming on eMG80
Administration and Programming manual. Regarding WEB admin, you directly
access to the web admin and check the programming.

Reference: lists related topical information to aid in understanding the feature.

Hardware: lists hardware required for proper feature operation.
1
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
1.4 Buttons & Term Variations
The eMG80 supports proprietary digital and IP phones. The proprietary models include the LDP7000 series, LDP-9000 series, the LIP- 7000 series and the LIP-8000/8000E series. Each
series employs similar but slightly different designations for the buttons. Details of the buttons
on your phone are provided in the User Guide. For the purposes of this manual, several of the
designations may be used. For example, the button to handle messages is called either [MSG],
[CALL BK], or [MESSAGE/CALLBACK]. Note the fixed button names are enclosed in brackets
‘[ ]’ and Flex buttons are enclosed in braces ‘{ }’. In addition, some buttons have dual functions;
the [HOLD/SAVE] button places your active call on hold and stores entries you make when
assigning Flex buttons.
The description, operation and conditions attempt to use common terms such as “Voice Mail” or
“outside Line” so that a novice installer can understand the contents. The Programming and
Hardware sections however employ terms specific to the eMG80 as used in the respective
manual such as “VSF” (used for voice mail) and “CO/IP lines” for outside Lines.
2
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2. SYSTEM
2.1 8-Digit Station Numbering Plan
Description
The system supports Station Numbering Plans from two to eight digits. The Station number
consists of a Prefix and suffix called Add Digits. A Prefix digit string can be any four digits that do
not conflict with the system Flexible Numbering Plan used for feature codes. This fixed digit string
is added to the Add Digits string, which can be 2 to 4 digits in length, to uniquely identify each
Station.
Operation
System
Operation of the 8-digit Station Numbering Plan is automatic when configured
Conditions
1. The system employs the complete Station number, 2 to 8 digits, when sending
messages to an external device such as an adjunct Voice Mail and TAPI device such
as ez-Attendant. It is the responsibility of the 3rd party software to support the defined
Station Numbering Plan.
2. The 8-digit numbering is configured in the 8-Digit Table (PGM 238).
Programming
System ID
Prefix Usage (PGM 100)
8-Digit Table (PGM 238)
Related Features

Station Numbering Plan
Hardware
3
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.2 Account Code
Description
You may allow tracking of specific calls by entering a non-verified variable length (up to 12 digits)
identifier for a call. The identifier or “Account Code” is output as part of the Station Message
Detail Record (SMDR) for the call as discussed in Section 2.70. This is often used to allocate
call costs to a specific account or client.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button for {ACCOUNT CODE} operation:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “84” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To assign a Flex button for {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} operation:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “84” + Account code (up to 12 digits) +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To enter an Account Code using an {ACCOUNT CODE} button prior to placing a call:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Press the {ACCOUNT CODE} button.
3. Dial the Account Code (up to 12 digits).
4. Press “*”, Intercom dial tone is heard.
5. Place the outside call as normal.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} button.
3. Place the outside call as normal.
To enter an Account Code using an {ACCOUNT CODE} button during a call:
1. Press the {ACCOUNT CODE} button.
2. Dial the Account Code (up to 12 digits).
3. Press “*”.
Or,
Press the {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} button.
SLT
To enter an Account Code prior to placing a call:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Flex Numbering Plan code “550”.
3. Dial the Account Code (up to 12 digits).
4
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4. Press “*”.
5. Place the outside call as normal.
To enter an Account Code during a call:
1. Momentarily press the Hook-switch.
2. Dial the Flex Numbering Plan code “550”.
3. Dial the Account Code (up to 12 digits).
4. Press “*”.
Conditions
1. When entering an Account Code during a call, DTMF digits are transmitted to the
connected party.
2. A maximum of 1000 {ONE-TOUCH ACCOUNT CODE} buttons may be assigned in
the system.
3. If an Authorization Code is entered as the Account Code, the SMDR record will show
the station number or the index number for a System Authorization Code rather than
the user entered Authorization Code.
4. If the Forced SMDR Account Code attribute of the station is enabled, you must enter
an Account Code prior to placing an outgoing call.
Programming
NUMBERING
Flexible Numbering Plan (PGM 106-Button 8)
STATION
Forced SMDR Account Code (PGM 113-Button 24-21)
Related Features

Authorization Codes (Password)

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Station Flexible Buttons
Hardware
5
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.3 Alarm Signal/Door Bell
Description
The system can be configured to recognize the status of an external contact (normally open or
closed). The system will signal assigned iPECS IP and LDP Phones when the contact activates.
This capability is commonly employed to provide remote Alarm or Door Bell signals a user.
Assigned stations receive the Alarm Signal, either a single tone burst repeated at 1-minute
intervals or a continuous tone. The Alarm Signal may be terminated at the phone by dialing the
Alarm Stop code or, if assigned, pressing the {ALARM STOP} button. To rearm the Alarm
function, the alarm condition must be cleared and the Alarm signal terminated.
When used as a Door Bell, assigned iPECS IP and LDP Phones receive a single tone burst each
time the external contact is activated and no reset is required.
Operation
System
At detection of contact operation, the Alarm/Door Bell signal is sent to assigned stations.
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as an {ALARM STOP} button to terminate the Alarm Signal:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “565” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To terminate an Alarm Signal, while idle:
1. Dial the Flex Numbering Plan code “565”, confirmation tone is received and the
Alarm Signal is terminated. If the alarm condition is cleared, the system will
automatically rearm the alarm monitoring.
Or,
Press the {ALARM STOP} button.
Conditions
1. The Alarm contacts must be “dry”, no voltage or current source connected.
2. Only iPECS IP and LDP Phones may be assigned to receive Alarm/Door Bell signals.
3. The LCD of phones assigned to receive Alarm/Door Bell signals will show “ALARM” or
“DOOR BELL” as appropriate.
4. The Alarm Stop code is also employed to terminate alarm signals from digital and IP
trunk alarms.
Programming
SYSTEM
Alarm Enable (PGM 163-Button 1)
Alarm Contact Type (PGM 163-Button 2)
6
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Alarm/Doorbell Mode (PGM 163-Button 3)
Alarm Signal Mode (PGM 163-Button 4)
STATION
Alarm/Door Bell Attribute (PGM 113-Button 8)
Related Features

Door Open
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone

Alarm or Doorbell input contact, refer to the eMG80 Hardware Description &
Installation Manual to install.
7
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.4 Authorization Codes (Password)
Description
Authorization Codes provide a means to control access to Voice Mail, Off Premise Call Forward,
Walking COS (Class of Service), or DISA and may be required for outgoing outside Line or LCR
access based on configuration of the eMG80 system database. When you dial an Authorization
Code that matches an Authorization Code stored in the database, the system invokes the Station
COS (Class of Service) or the COS (Class of Service) assigned to Authorization code. Each
Authorization code has separate Day/Night mode COS (Class of Service) assignments.
There are two types of Authorization Codes, Station and System. A Station Authorization Code is
specifically related to a given station and intended for a single user. The System Authorization
Codes are intended for use by any station in the system.
The Station Authorization Codes includes the associated station number and the assigned code.
The structure of the System Authorization code can be set as either “*”, or “*” the Authorization
table index and the code digits. The later allows duplicate codes to be employed using entry of
table index to provide a unique identification of the entry.
The Administrator and Attendants are permitted to assign any Authorization code including codes
for another station. Normal users may only assign the Station Authorization code for the specific
station.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Station Authorization Code:
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “33”, the Authorization Program Code.
3. Dial the Station number.
4. Dial the Authorization Code (1 to 12 digits).
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To enter an Authorization Code when second dial tone is received:
1. Dial the Station number for the Station Authorization code or, for a System
Authorization Code, dial “*” or “*” and the Authorization table index.
2. Dial the corresponding Authorization Code.
3. Place your call as normal.
SLT
To assign a Station Authorization code:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial SLT Program Mode Entry code “561”.
8
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3. Dial Authorization Program Code “33”.
4. Dial Authorization Code (1 to 12 digits).
5. Momentarily press the Hook-switch, receive confirmation tone.
To enter an Authorization Code when second dial tone is received;
1. Dial the station number for the Station Authorization code or, for a System
Authorization Code, dial “*” or “*” and the Authorization table index.
2. Dial the corresponding Authorization Code.
3. Momentarily press the Hook-switch.
4. Place your call as normal.
DISA
To enter an Authorization Code when second dial tone is received:
1. Dial the station number for a Station Authorization code or, for a System code, “*” or
“*” and the Authorization table index.
2. Dial the corresponding Authorization Code.
3. Place call as normal.
System Attendant
To assign an Authorization Code:
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial Attendant Station Program code “031”.
3. Dial the Station number of a Station code or, for system code, “*” or “*” and the
Authorization table index.
4. Dial the corresponding Authorization Code.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. When an outside DISA Line is marked for Authorization Code entry, the caller will hear
fast busy tone and must input a valid Authorization Code to continue. In case of an
entry error, the caller may retry entry of the code.
2. A DISA caller must enter a valid code within the number of attempts assigned as the
FAC (Forced Account Code) Retry Count. The station, if enabled, is placed to COS
(Class of Service) 7 after repeated failure attempts.
3. A user may enter an Authorization Code from any station to place an outside call using
Walking COS (Class of Service).
4. The system provides memory for up to 500 Authorization codes, 140 for station codes
and the remaining 360 are system codes.
5. Outside Line groups may be configured to require entry of a valid Authorization Code.
In this case, a second dial tone is provided when the Line group is accessed. If the
code entered is invalid, error tone is returned and the user must enter a valid code
within the FAC Retry Count.
6. If the Check Password option is enabled in the LCR database, when dialed digits
9
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
match the LDT table digits, the system will send second dial tone to request that you
input a valid Authorization code.
7. An Authorization code may include any dial pad digit except “*” and “#”.
8. Duplicate or conflicting System Authorization codes are not allowed when using the “*”
and code operation. For example, code “*1234” conflicts with code “*123” and cannot
be recognized as a unique code. Since the index operation employs the Table index
and the station number forms part of the Station code, codes cannot be duplicated and
conflicts will not occur.
9. Use of Authorization codes varies based on the system Nation Code. In some regions,
particularly the US and UK, a System Authorization code may be required for DISA
access. Entering a Station code on a DISA line will fail in these areas. In other regions,
a System Authorization code can be used with Walking COS (Class of Service).
10. The system can be configured to require an End of Entry code or simply “End Code”. If
“End Code” is enabled, you must enter “#” after entry of the Authorization code.
Programming
STATION
Station Account (PGM 112-Button 19)
CO/IP Group Authorization (PGM 141-Button 8)
DISA Authorization Code (PGM 142-Button 5)
SYSTEM
DISA Retry Counter (PGM 160-Button 5)
AUTH Retry Count (PGM 160-Button 16)
Old Auth Code Usage (PGM 161-Button 16)
COS (Class of Service) 7 When Auth fails (PGM 161-Button 17)
End code(#) usage in System Auth Code (PGM 160 – Button 24-2)
TABLES
LCR Check Password (PGM 221-Button 6)
Station Authorization Code Table (PGM 227)
Related Features

Account Code

Auto Service Mode Control

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Outside Line Groups

Outside Line Access

Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock

Walking COS (Class of Service)

Call Forward

Station User Programming & Codes
Hardware
10
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.5 Auto Call Recording
Description
Your iPECS IP or LDP Phone can be configured to automatically record calls to a Voice Mailbox
or the hard disk drive of an iPECS Phontage or UCS Client soft phone. The type of calls recorded
can be set as None, All calls or outside Line calls only.
When recorded to a mailbox, you manage the recording through your Voice Mailbox. For
recordings to the Phontage or UCS Client, recordings are managed directly by the Phontage or
UCS Client with the ability to listen to, delete or send the recording to others via e-mail.
Operation
Recording of calls is automatic when assigned.
To manage the recordings, use the procedures outlined in the Phontage or UCS Client User
Guide.
Conditions
1. The Phontage or UCS Client can record one call at a time and must be idle. While
recording, if the Phontage or UCS Client places or receives a call, recording terminates.
2. When call recording begins, you and the connected party will receive a Call Recording
confirmation tone.
3. The Phontage or UCS Client used for recording must be operating in a ‘Local’ mode
not remote.
Programming
STATION
Two-way Record Privilege (PGM 112-Btn11)
Auto Call Recording (PGM 112-Button 20)
Call Recording Destination (PGM 112-Button 21)
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone, or PC with Phontage or UCS Client
11
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.6 Auto Call Release
Description
Outside or intercom calls (except Hands-free Answerback), will be released automatically if you
do not complete dialing or, for intercom calls, the called party does not answer after a predetermined time.
Operation
System
Auto Call Release of Intercom calls:
1. If you place an intercom call and the called station does not answer in the Intercom
Call Release Time, the call is terminated and you will receive error tone.
Auto Call Release of outside calls:
1. If you seize an idle Line and do not dial within the Automatic Release Time, the call
is terminated and you will receive error tone.
Conditions
1. If the Automatic Call Release Timer is set to “0”, Auto Call Release is disabled.
2. When the handset is used to place a call, you will receive error tone for 30 seconds
followed by 30 seconds of Howler tone and the station is placed in a fault mode. If onhook dialing is used, you receive error tone for one (1) second and the phone returns
to idle automatically.
Programming
STATION
Howling Tone to Station (PGM 111-Button 5)
SYSTEM
CO Call Automatic Release Timer (PGM 180-Button 12)
STA Call Automatic Release Timer (PGM 182-Button 4)
Related Features

Howler Tone
Hardware
12
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.7 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Description
iPECS ACD incorporates flexible incoming call routing, real-time agent monitoring and
supervision, and call record statistics as well as ACD Event messages for management reporting.
Calls route to an ACD group directly or otherwise including via call transfer, CCR and ICLID
routing. The caller may receive announcements then route to an available agent. When no agent
is available, calls queue to the group awaiting a free agent. Should the call Overflow based on
number of queued calls or queued duration, the call can be routed to an alternate destination.
2.7.1 ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing
Description
With Caller Controlled ICLID enabled for the ACD Group, at any time during or within 5 seconds
after a Guaranteed Announcement, the system will monitor for digits dialed by the caller.
Received digits are compared to the ICLID Table entries. If a match is found, the call routes to the
destination defined in the ICLID Ring Assignment Table. Available destinations are a System
announcement, system speed dial, a station or a station group. If a match is not found, the call
remains in the queue for normal ACD group routing.
Operation
System
ICLID Routing of ACD group calls is automatic based on the ACD group assignments.
Conditions
1. The conditions of System Announcements and ICLID Call Routing apply.
2. Only the caller-entered digits are employed for ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing,
the Caller Id received from the network for the incoming call is not used for this feature.
3. The ICLID Table routing is only followed if the 1st ACD announcement is Guaranteed,
ICLID Usage is enabled and the digits are entered during the 1st Announcement.
4. The caller may correct an entry by dialing ‘*’ to erase all digits entered then dial the
correct entry.
Programming
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
ICLID Usage (PGM191-Button 21)
TABLES
ICLID Route Table (PGM 203)
13
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
ICLID Ring Assignment (204)
Related Features

Automatic Call Distribution

ICLID Call Routing

Integrated Auto Attendant
Hardware
2.7.2 ACD Statistics Report
Description
ACD reports can be requested by the Supervisor and can be programmed for periodic output
over the SMDR port or selected TCP/IP port. The system will provide reports for the ACD Group
and Agent statistics as follows:
ACD Group Statistics Report

Group Number

Time stamp

Total calls

Number of unanswered calls

Average queue time

Longest queue time

Total number of calls placed in queue

Number of times calls experience all agents busy

Total time all agents were busy
Average ring time before answer

Group Number

Agent Number
− Number of ACD calls served
− Number of unanswered ACD Calls
− Average ring time before answer
− Average ACD call service time after answer.
Operation
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign a {GROUP STATUS} button at the Supervisor
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “576” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
14
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
To output ACD Statistics Report
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button,
2. Press the {GROUP STATUS} button,
[1] ACD STATUS
[2] ACD DATABASE
[3] ACD DUTY
[#] ACD PRINT
3. Dial “#”, the ACD Group Statistics Print code,
4. Press the [MUTE] button to initialize the ACD database after printing; this eliminates
overlap of future reports.
To output the Agent Statistics Report
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button,
2. Press the {GROUP STATUS} button,
[1] ACD STATUS
[2] ACD DATABASE
[3] ACD DUTY
[#] ACD PRINT
3. Dial “3”, the Agent code, the LCD menu will update,
[1] DUTY STATUS
[2] DUTY ON/OFF
[#] DUTY PRINT
4. Dial “#”, the Agent Statistics Print code,
5. Press the [MUTE] button to initialize the ACD database after printing; this eliminates
overlap of future reports.
Conditions
1. The ACD status can be printed periodically. The period is assigned in Admin
Programming. The ACD records contain information for both ACD agents and ACD
group.
2. The Supervisor must be assigned as a Supervisor for the ACD Group and be logged
into the group to access the Group Status display information.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
ACD Group Supervisor Status (PGM 107-Button 7)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
ACD Group Supervisor (PGM 191-Button 18)
Related Features

Station Groups
Hardware
15
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.7.3 Agents
2.7.3.1 Agent Auto Connect/Zap Tone
Description
Calls from an ACD group can automatically connect to agents using a headset. This feature
removes the requirement for the agent to answer ACD calls manually. The Agent receives a brief
tone (Zap Tone), if assigned, and then the call is connected to the agent.
Operation
System
When Zap tone is enabled, operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
1. The station must be in the headset mode for this feature to operate.
Programming
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
Zap Tone (PGM 191-Button 24-1)
Related Features

Station Groups
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
16
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.7.3.2 Agent Automatic Wrap-Up
Description
When an Agent completes an ACD group call, the Agent automatically enters into the Wrap-up
state. In this state, an Agent will not receive ACD calls, allowing the Agent to complete paperwork,
etc. The Agent remains in this automatic Wrap-Up state for the duration of the ACD group WrapUp Timer. After the Wrap-Up Timer or by using “Wrap-Up-End” feature, the Agent returns to
available status and can receive ACD group calls.
Operation
Activation is automatic when the Agent completes an ACD Group call
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {WRAP-UP-END} button;
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “585” + ACD Group Number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To manually deactivate the Wrap-Up state;
1. Dial “585” the Wrap-Up-End code.
Or,
Press the {WRAP-UP-END} flexible button.
Agent SLT
To manually deactivate the Wrap-Up state;
1. Dial “585” the Wrap-Up-End code.
Conditions
1. During Wrap-Up, the assigned {WRAP-UP-END} Flex button flashes. The button LED
extinguishes when the Wrap-Up Timer expires or if the button is pressed, both actions
return the Agent to available.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
ACD Agent Wrap-Up-End (PGM 109-Button 9)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
ACD Wrap-up Timer (PGM 191-Button 9)
Related Features
Hardware
17
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.7.3.3 Agent Help Request
Description
Agents request assistance from a Supervisor using the ACD Help Code, default 574. Using
iPECS IP or LDP Phones, agents with the {HELP} button can request assistance without
interrupting an active conversation.
Operation
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign {HELP} buttons:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “574” + ACD Group Number (optional) + [HOLD/SAVE]
To request Supervisor assistance while on an active ACD call,
1. Press the {HELP} button.
SLT
To request Supervisor assistance while on an active ACD call,
1. Hook-flash.
2. Dial “574”, the Agent Help code.
3. Dial the desired ACD Group number.
Conditions
1. Agents receive error tone to indicate there is no active Supervisor.
2. Using the {HELP} button during a call, no signals are sent on the active conversation
and the connected party is unaware of the request for assistance.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
ACD Group Help (PGM 107-Button 5)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
ACD Supervisor (PGM 191-Button 18)
Related Features

Station Groups

Supervisor Help Response
Hardware
18
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.7.3.4 Agent Id Login/Logout
Description
Stations or 4-digit Agent Ids are assigned as members of an ACD group. A station or Agent ID
can be assigned to a maximum of two (2) ACD groups. Each Agent has a unique 4-digit Agent Id
used to login and logout of active ACD group participation. Agents can login from any station in
the system but only at one station. When an Agent logs in, any active login for the Agent is
terminated and the new login is honored. An Agent may login to two (2) groups at one time,
logging into and out of the primary and secondary group separately.
Operation
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign {LOGIN} or {LOGOUT} buttons:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Login or Logout code + ACD Group Number (optional) +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To Login to a primary group using the Agent Id;
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button,
2. Dial “581”, the ACD Agent Primary Login code, or press the Login Flex button,
3. Dial the ACD group number,
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged into the ACD group.
To Logout of the primary ACD Group;
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button,
2. Dial “582”, the ACD Agent Primary Logout code, or press the Logout Flex button.
3. Dial the ACD group number,
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged into the ACD group.
To Login to a secondary group using the Agent Id;
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button,
2. Dial ‘583’, the ACD Agent Secondary Login code, or press the Login Flex button,
3. Dial the ACD group number,
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged into the ACD group.
To Logout of the secondary ACD Group;
1. Lift the handset or the press [SPEAKER] button,
2. Dial “584”, the ACD Agent Secondary Logout code, or press the Logout Flex button.
3. Dial the ACD group number,
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged out of the ACD Group.
19
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
SLT
To Login to a primary group using the Agent Id;
1. Lift the handset,
2. Dial “581”, the ACD Agent Primary Login code,
3. Dial the ACD group number
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged into the ACD group.
To Logout of the primary ACD Group;
1. Lift the handset,
2. Dial “582”, the ACD Agent Primary Logout code.
3. Dial the ACD group number
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged out of the ACD Group.
To Login to a secondary group using the Agent Id;
1. Lift the handset,
2. Dial “583”, the ACD Agent Secondary Login code,
3. Dial the ACD group number
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged into the ACD group.
To Logout of the secondary ACD Group;
1. Lift the handset,
2. Dial “584”, the ACD Agent Secondary Logout code,
3. Dial the ACD group number,
4. Dial the Agent ID, the agent is logged out of the ACD Group.
Conditions
1. The system outputs ACD events including Login/Logout messages when Discovery
Manager Print (Output ACD Event Message) is enabled.
2. The Agent Id can be any 4-digit number (0000-9999). iPECS does not verify the Agent
Id, other than requiring that four digits be entered.
3. Any Agent Id may be used to login except at a Hot Desk Station where a Station
Authorization code is required.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
ACD Agent Primary Login (PGM 109-Button 5)
ACD Agent Primary Logout (PGM 109-Button 6)
ACD Agent Secondary Login (PGM 109-Button 7)
ACD Agent Secondary Logout (PGM 109-Button 8)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
SYSTEM
ACD Manager Print (Output ACD Event Message) (PGM 160Button 13)
20
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Unified Message Format (PGM 161-Button 18)
Related Features

Station Groups

Hot Desk

Authorization Codes (Password)
Hardware
2.7.3.5 Agent On/Off Duty w/Reason Code
Description
Agents can control their status, On/Off-duty, and assign a Reason code for an Off-duty state. The
system outputs the Reason code as part of the ACD Event message output. The Reason code
may be any digit (0 ~ 9, * and #). With the exception of Reason code “0”, when the Agent goes
Off-duty manually, the Agent must return to the On-duty state manually.
If assigned as the Auto ACD DND code, using Reason code “0” activates the ACD DND Wrap-up
timer. At expiration of the timer, the Agent is placed back On-duty. This provides the flexibility of
an Agent activated Wrap-up time.
The Agent may assign an {ACD ON/OFF DUTY} button to for easy access. The ACD group
number and the Reason code can be assigned in the Flex button for one-button operation. If the
button is assigned Reason code “0”, the Agent will return to On-duty status after the ACD DND
Wrap-up time.
Operation
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign an {ACD ON/OFF DUTY (GROUP)} button;
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “571” + (optional ACD group number) + (optional Reason
Code) + [HOLD/SAVE]
To toggle to Off-duty state from On-Duty,
1. Dial “571”, Agent On/Off Duty Code.
2. Dial ACD group number.
3. Dial Reason Code (“0” ~ “9”, “*” or “#”)
Or,
1. Press {ACD ON/OFF DUTY} button.
2. Dial group number and Reason Code (“0” ~ “9”, “*” or “#”) unless assigned in the
21
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
button.
To return to an On-duty state;
1. Dial “571”, Agent On/Off Duty Code
2. Dial ACD group number
Or,
1. Press the {ACD ON/OFF DUTY} button.
2. Dial the ACD group number unless assigned in the button
To assign an {ACD ON/OFF DUTY, ALL GROUPS} button;
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “58*’ + (optional Reason Code) + [HOLD/SAVE]
To toggle to Off-Duty status to both groups at one time:
1. Dial “58*”, the All group On/Off-Duty code.
2. Dial the Reason code (“0” ~ “9”, “*” or “#”)
Or,
1. Press {ACD ON/OFF DUTY ALL GROUPS} button.
2. Dial the Reason code (“0” ~ “9”, “*” or “#”), unless assigned in the button.
To return to an On-duty state for both groups at once;
1. Dial “58*” the code for the All group On/Off-Duty code.
Or,
Press {ACD ON/OFF DUTY ALL GROUPS} button.
SLT
To toggle to Off-duty state from On-Duty;
1. Lift handset or press [SPEAKER] button,
2. Dial “571”, Agent On/Off Duty Code
3. Dial ACD group number
4. Dial Reason Code (“0” ~ “9”, “*” or “#”)
To return to an On-duty state;
1. Lift handset or press [SPEAKER] button,
2. Dial “571”, Agent On/Off Duty Code
3. Dial ACD group the umber
To return to an On-duty state for both groups at once;
1. Lift handset or press [SPEAKER] button,
2. Dial “58*”, the code for the All group On/Off-Duty code.
To toggle to Off-Duty status to both groups at one time:
1. Lift handset or press [SPEAKER] button,
2. Dial “58*”, the code for the All group On/Off-Duty code.
3. Dial Reason Code (“0” ~ “9”, “*” or “#”).
22
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Conditions
1. The system will output an Agent Availability message with the dialed Reason code
when an Agent changes availability status. The message will include the button type
“Wrap” if the ACD DND timer is activated.
2. The {ACD ON/OFF-DUTY} Flex button will flash while the agent is Off-duty for any
reason. The button LED extinguishes when the Agent returns to the On-duty status.
3. While Off-duty, the supervisor's Flex button LED assigned for the Agent’s station
flashes at the DND rate. The supervisor may call the station overriding the Off-duty
status.
4. Only one {ACD ON/OFF-DUTY} button with the Group number can be assigned at a
station.
5. The default value of the ACD DND Wrap-Up Timer is 10 seconds.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
ACD Agent On/Off Duty (PGM 107-Button 2)
Agent ON/OFF duty in all hunt group (PGM 109-Button 18)
STATION
Auto ACD DND Reason (PGM 113-Button 15)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
ACD DND Wrap-up Timer (PGM 191-Button 20)
Related Features

Agent Automatic Wrap-Up

Auto ACD DND Unavailable Service

Event Messages
Hardware
2.7.3.6 Agent Queued Calls Display
Description
An Agent can view the queued call status for an ACD group when not on a call, On-duty or Wrapup status. In addition, an active Agent can view the queued call status for an ACD group while on
a call using a {Display Call Queue} Flex button. The Call Queue display indicates the ACD
group number, the number of calls in queue and the longest queue time.
23
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Operation
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign a {DISPLAY CALL QUEUE} buttons;
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “575” + ACD Group Number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To display ACD Call Queue status when the Agent is idle and on-duty;
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “575”, the ACD Call Queue status code
3. Dial the ACD Group number. The display shows the Queued call status and will
update as the queue status changes. If no calls are in queue, the phone returns to
idle.
4. Hang-up to return to idle and normal display.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the {DISPLAY CALL QUEUE} button. The display shows the Queued call
status and will update as the queue status changes. If no calls are in queue, the
phone returns to idle.
3. Hang-up to return to idle and normal display.
To display ACD Call Queue status when the Agent is on a call;
1. Press the {DISPLAY CALL QUEUE} button, the queue status displays for several
seconds then returns to the normal call display.
Conditions
1. The Agent cannot display queued call status while the phone is ringing.
2. If there are no queued calls to display and you activate Queued Calls Display, the
phone returns to idle after providing error tone.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
Display ACD Calls In Queue Status (PGM 107-Button 6)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
Related Features

Station Groups
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
24
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.7.4 Announcements
Description
Each ACD group can provide announcements to incoming callers. Primary and secondary
announcements are available with control timers. The first announcement is played after 1st
control timer. The 2nd control timer determines the period between the first and second
announcement. The second announcement can be replayed at defined intervals. If desired, the
primary message can be defined to play in full to all callers as a “guaranteed announcement” or
only for calls that queue.
When enabled, a CIQ (Calls in Queue) announcement is played to callers that are queued to the
ACD group. The CIQ announcement (“Your Call is number xx in Queue”) is played to queued
callers after the 1st announcement is played and again after each time the 2nd announcement is
played. Internal callers using an iPECS IP or LDP phone with Display also receive the “You are
xx in queue” display message.
Operation
System
ACD group announcements are played automatically based on the ACD group assignments.
System Attendant
To record a System Announcement for an ACD Group;
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the Announcement number (“01”-“70”)
5. Dial the language type (“1”~”6”), the current announcement is played followed by the
“Press # to record” prompt.
6. Dial “#”.
7. After the beep-tone, record message.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to stop recording and save the announcement.
To delete a recording
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the Announcement number (“01”-“70”).
5. Dial the language type (“1”~”6”), the current announcement is played followed by the
“Press # to record” prompt.
6. Press the [SPEED] button during playback to erase the announcement
25
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Conditions
1. ACD group announcements are recorded in the integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail.
Up to seventy (70) Announcements are available for group announcement recordings.
Announcements 71 and 72 are reserved for MOH and Multi Language selection
announcements, respectively.
2. When equipped to support multiple languages, the Language selection announcement
is played prior to a guaranteed announcement, allowing the caller to select between
the languages equipped in the system (maximum 3)
3. To define a guaranteed announcement, assign 0 seconds to the 1st announcement
control timer.
4. The sequence number for the voice storage device is given in the Administration and
Programming Manual System Overview Web page.
Programming
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
ACD ICLID Routing (PGM 191-Button 21)
CIQ Mention (PGM191-Button 24-21)
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant

ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing

Multiple Language Support
Hardware
26
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.7.5 Auto ACD DND Unavailable Service
Description
An Agent who does not answer a call offered from an ACD group within the ACD No-Answer
timer is placed in a “No response” unavailable status, called ACD DND. In this state, the Agent is
Off-duty and will not receive ACD calls from the group. If the Auto DND Reason code is “0”,
after the ACD DND Wrap timer expires, the Agent returns to available status. Otherwise the
Agent must return to the On-duty status manually.
Operation
System
Auto ACD DND activates automatically when Reason code “0” is assigned;
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To return to the On-duty status;
1. Dial “571”, the Agent On/Off Duty Code.
2. Dial the ACD group number.
Or,
1. Press the {ACD ON/OFF-DUTY} button.
2. Dial the ACD group number unless assigned in the button.
SLT
To return to the On-duty status;
1. Lift the handset,
2. Dial “571”, the Agent On/Off Duty Code
3. Dial the ACD group number.
Conditions
1. The system will output an Agent Available message with a Reason code when an
Agent changes availability status.
2. At the Supervisor's phone, the LED of a Flex button assigned for an agent’s Station will
flash at the DND rate. The supervisor may call the Station.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
Agent On/Off Duty (PGM107-Button 2)
STATION
Auto ACD DND Reason (PGM 113-Button 15)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
ACD No Answer Timer (PGM 191-Button 24-22)
Related Features

Agent On/Off Duty w/Reason Code
Hardware
27
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.7.6 Calls-In-Queue routing
Description
When a caller is queued to an ACD Group, various announcements may be played and music on
hold may be sent to the caller. The caller may dial a digit at any time while queued to exit the
queue, except during a Guaranteed Announcement. The dialed digit is compared to digits defined
in the ACD Group CIQ Route Table. If a match is found, the call is routed to the defined
destination (Station, Station Group, etc.). If a match is not found, external callers receive an error
message and are placed back in queue; internal callers are simply placed back in queue.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic based on caller input
Conditions
1. ACD CIQ routing is not supported during or within 5 seconds of a Guaranteed
Announcement. Digits dialed during a Guaranteed Announcement use Caller
Controlled ICLID routing to determine routing as discussed in Section 2.7.6.
2. Dialing during ring back tone is not recognized by the system.
Programming
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
ACD CIQ Route Table (PGM 191-Button 23)
Related Features

Station Groups

Announcements

ACD Caller Controlled ICLID Routing
Hardware
28
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.7.7 Calls-In-Queue Page Alert
Description
The administrator can establish CIQ (Calls-In-Queue) thresholds for each ACD Group so that an
assigned System announcement plays over a defined Page zone, if the number of calls in queue
equals or exceeds a CIQ threshold. The message, which is recorded by an Attendant, plays
immediately or after a defined delay. The message repeats at assigned intervals until the number
of Calls in Queue falls below the threshold. The system allows different treatment and
announcements for up to three different Calls-In-Queue thresholds.
Operation
System
When the number of Calls-In-Queue changes, up or down the iPECS;
1. Checks CIQ thresholds,
2. Determines if a threshold is reached,
3. Queues announcement for threshold (sets Delay timer),
4. Plays CIQ announcement.
5. Repeats announcement as defined.
System Attendant
To record a CIQ Announcement for an ACD Group;
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the System Announcement number (“01”-“70”)
5. Dial language type (“1”~”6”), the current announcement is played followed by the
“Press # to record” prompt.
6. Dial “#”.
7. After the beep-tone, record message.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to stop recording and save the announcement.
To delete a recording
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the System Announcement number (“01”-“70”)
5. Dial language type (“1”~”6”), the current announcement is played followed by the
“Press # to record” prompt.
6. Press the [SPEED] button during playback to erase the announcement.
29
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Conditions
1. Thresholds are assigned as total Calls-In-Queue to activate a Page alert and are
checked from lowest priority (CIQ #1) to highest priority (CIQ #3). Thus, the highest
priority CIQ defined should have the largest threshold and the lowest priority CIQ
should have the smallest threshold.
2. The System has seventy (70) announcements employed for Auto Attendant, ACD
groups, CCR, Page Alerts, etc. Two announcements are reserved for MOH and
multi-language support, announcements 71 and 72 respectively.
Programming
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
CIQ #1 Threshold (PGM 191, Button 24-6)
CIQ #1 Announcement Location (PGM 191-Button 24-7)
CIQ #1 Page Zone (PGM 191-Button 24-8)
CIQ #1 Announcement Delay Timer (PGM 191-Button 24-9)
CIQ #1 Announcement Repeat Timer (PGM 191-Button 24-10)
CIQ #2 Threshold (PGM 191-Button 24-11)
CIQ #2 Announcement Location (PGM 191-Button 24-12)
CIQ #2 Page Zone (PGM 191-Button 24-13)
CIQ #2 Announcement Delay Timer (PGM 191-Button 24-14)
CIQ #2 Announcement Repeat Timer (PGM 191-Button 24-15)
CIQ #3 Threshold (PGM 191-Button 24-16)
CIQ #3 Announcement Location (PGM 191-Button 24-17)
CIQ #3 Page Zone (PGM 191-Button 24-18)
CIQ #3 Announcement Delay Timer (PGM 191-Button 24-19)
CIQ #3 Announcement Repeat Timer (PGM 191-Button 24-20)
VSF Group Number (PGM 190)
Related Features

Station Groups

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Internal/External & All Call Page
Hardware
30
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.7.8 Event Messages
Description
Each ACD group sends messages for group and agent events over a defined Serial or TCP/IP
port. These event messages are employed by 3rd party applications to provide enhanced Call
Center functionality. Details of the event messages are provided in the iPECS 3rd Party Support
Guide.
Operation
System
When enabled, Event messages are sent automatically
Conditions
Programming
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
SYSTEM
ACD Pack (PGM 175-Flex button 1-Button 9)
ACD Manager Print (Output ACD Event Message) (PGM 160Button 13)
Related Features

Station Groups
Hardware
31
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.7.9 Group Mail Box
Description
A Voice mailbox can be associated with a Station Group. Calls to the group are assigned to
overflow and can be otherwise re-routed to the Station Group Mail box where the caller can leave
a voice message.
Messages are retrieved in the same manner as normal voice messages employing the Station
Group number as the station number and the defined Group Mailbox Password. Messages can
be retrieved only if a {GROUP MAILBOX} Flex button is assigned to the station.
Operation
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign a {GROUP MAILBOX} Flex button;
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + VM Station Group + Group Message Wait Station +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To retrieve Station Group Voice Mail
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button
2. Press the {GROUP MAILBOX} button to receive the “Password” prompt.
3. Dial the ACD Group number and Group Mailbox Password. The “Number of
Messages” prompt followed by Voice Mail instruction prompts are played.
4. Dial the desired option from the Voice Mail prompt.
5. At completion of the session, hang-up to return to idle.
To leave a voice message
1. After the Mailbox Greeting and beep, leave the message.
2. Hang up to quit recording or dial “*” for further options.
Conditions
1. The System Administrator or Supervisor may change the Group Mailbox Password.
2. An outside caller cannot access the Group Mailbox to retrieve messages.
Programming
STATION GROUPS
Station Group Attributes (PGM 191)
Mailbox Message Wait Station (PGM 191-Button 24-2)
Mailbox Password (PGM 191-Button 24-3)
32
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Related Features

External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Station Groups

Integrated Voice Mail

Supervisors
Hardware

2.7.10
iPECS IP or LDP Phones
Group Name
Description
Each hunt group is assigned a name of up to 12 characters. The name is employed as the called
party display for internal callers and in the output of group statistics.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed.
Conditions
Programming
STATION GROUPS
Station Group Attributes (PGM 191)
ACD Group Name (PGM 191-Button 22)
Related Features

Station Groups
Hardware
33
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.7.11
Issue 1.0
Incoming Call Routing
Description
Incoming calls to an ACD group route directly to the station/agent that has been idle the longest
(Uniform Call Distribution) or an ACD group announcement recorded. If all agents are busy, the
call is queued to the group or routes to the Alternate Destination. The queued caller receives
ACD group announcements or audio from the defined music source. Callers that remain in queue
receive audio from the defined music source or ring-back tone and, after the defined Overflow
time, route to an Overflow destination.
Agents can be assigned a priority from“0” ~ “9”, “0” being the lowest priority and “9” the highest.
When priorities are assigned, calls are routed to the highest priority Agent that has been idle the
longest.
If there are no Agents active in the group when a call arrives, the call will receive the “No Member”
treatment. Intercom calls receive re-order and external callers are routed to an Attendant.
Operation
System
Routing of ACD group calls is automatic based on the ACD group assignments.
Conditions
1. The Alternate ACD Destination can be a group or a station but cannot be a member of
the ACD group.
2. The Overflow destination may be any station or group as well as the ACD group Voice
Mailbox, but cannot be a member of the overflowing ACD group.
3. If an agent becomes available during an announcement, except a guaranteed
announcement, the call is passed immediately to the agent.
Programming
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
Overflow Destination (PGM191-Button 7)
Overflow Timer (PGM 191-Button 8)
Music Source (PGM 191-Button 11)
Alternate Destination (PGM 191-Button 13)
Report No Members (PGM 191-Button 10)
Agent Priority (PGM 191-Button 19)
Related Features

Automatic Call Distribution
Hardware
34
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.7.12
Issue 1.0
Supervisors
2.7.12.1 Agent Call Monitor
Description
Agent Call Monitor permits an active Supervisor to monitor an Agent’s call in progress for training
purposes or to assist the Agent. When used, the Supervisor is connected to the call with the
microphone muted, the [MUTE] button LED is On. If ACD Warning Tone is enabled, a Warning
Tone is provided to the Agent’s call indicating the Supervisor has entered the call. The Supervisor
hears the Agent and connected party and may join the conversation by pressing the [MUTE]
button to activate the microphone.
The Supervisor station must be assigned an {AGENT MONITOR} button to activate the Agent
Call Monitor feature.
Operation
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign an {AGENT MONITOR} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “577” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To enter an active Agent call from the Supervisor phone
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Call the desired Agent and receive busy tone,
3. Press the {AGENT MONITOR} button, the Supervisor is connected to the active
Agent call with the microphone muted, the [MUTE] button LED is On.
To converse with the Agent and connected party
1. Press the illuminated [MUTE] button.
Conditions
1. The Supervisor must be active and logged into the Agent’s ACD group to monitor calls
in progress.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
ACD Supervisor Monitor (PGM 107-Button 8)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Groups (PGM 191)
ACD Group Supervisor (PGM 191-Button 18)
ACD Warning Tone (PGM 191-Button 12)
Related Features

Station Groups
35
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
2.7.12.2 Agent Status Control
Description
An ACD Supervisor can view and control the status of Agents in the group with a {GROUP
STATUS} button.
Operation
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {GROUP STATUS} button at the Supervisor
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “576” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To view/control Agent Status
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button,
2. Press the {GROUP STATUS} button,
[1] ACD STATUS
[2] ACD DATABASE
[3] ACD DUTY
[#] ACD PRINT
3. Dial “3”, the Agent Duty code, the LCD menu will update:
[1] DUTY STATUS
[2] DUTY ON/OFF
[#] DUTY PRINT
To view Agent Status
1. Dial “1”, the Agent Status Code,
ACD STATUS : XXX
TOTAL CALLS : XXX
2. Press [VOL UP] or [VOL DOWN] for:
− Number of ACD calls served
− Number of unanswered ACD Calls
− Average ring time before answer
36
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
−
Issue 1.0
Average ACD call service time after answer.
3. Press the “*” key to view the status of the next Agent,
To control Agent duty status
1. Dial “3”, the Agent Duty code,
2. Dial “2” to set the Agent’s On/Off Duty status,
3. Dial “0” or “1”, (“0”: Off Duty, “1”: On Duty).
Conditions
1. The Supervisor must be assigned as a Supervisor for the ACD Group and be logged
into the group to access the Group Status display information.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
ACD Group Status (PGM 107-Button 7)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
ACD Group Supervisor (PGM 191-Button 18)
Related Features

Station Groups
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
2.7.12.3 Group Status Display
Description
An ACD Supervisor may view the status of each of the ACD groups to which the Supervisor is
assigned. The display will give the status of the active ACD group at the time of the request.
The display indicates the following statistics:

Number of calls in Queue

Wait time for the call in queue longest and

Agents in service and available
When a call is queued to the group, the ACD Supervisor is notified, in real-time, by the LED of the
{GROUP STATUS} button. The {GROUP STATUS} button allows access to the ACD Group
Status display or the Group Status code may be used to display the status information.
37
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Operation
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign a {GROUP STATUS} button at the Supervisor
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “576” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To display the Group status when the {GROUP STATUS} button is flashing
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button,
2. Dial “576”, the Group Status display code,
3. Dial “1” to see the Group Status information,
Or,
2. Press the flashing {GROUP STATUS} button,
3. Dial “1” to see the Group Status display.
Conditions
1. The Supervisor must be assigned as a Supervisor for the ACD Group and be logged
into the group to access the Group Status display information.
2. The {GROUP STATUS} button will flash when the count of Calls-in-Queue reaches or
exceeds the programmed ‘Supervisor Call Count’ after the programmed ‘Supervisor
Timer’.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
ACD Group Status Code (PGM 107-Button 7)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
ACD Group Supervisor (PGM 191-Button 18)
Supervisor Timer (PGM 191-Button 14)
Supervisor Queued Call Count (PGM191-Button 15)
Related Features

Station Groups
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
38
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.7.12.4 Group Parameter Control
Description
An ACD Group Supervisor can adjust several of the ACD Group routing parameters in real-time.
A {GROUP STATUS} button is required. Adjustable parameters are:

Overflow Destination

Overflow Time

Wrap-up Time

ACD Voice Mailbox Password
Operation
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign a {GROUP STATUS} button at the Supervisor
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “576” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To use the Supervisor Status Menu
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button,
2. Press the {GROUP STATUS} button,
[1] ACD STATUS
[2] ACD DATABASE
[3] ACD DUTY
[#] ACD PRINT
3. Dial ACD Dbase Code “2”,
4. Select database item, scrolling with the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button;
Overflow Destination- station (Net station) (1)/group (2)/system speed dial (3)
Overflow Time- xxx seconds
Wrap-Up Time- xxx seconds
Password- up to 12 digits
5. Enter new data,
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The Supervisor must be assigned as a Supervisor for the ACD Group and be logged
into the group to access the Group Status display information.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
ACD Group Status (PGM 107-Button 7)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Group (PGM 191)
ACD Group Supervisor (PGM 191-Button 18)
39
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Related Features

Station Groups
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
2.7.12.5 Supervisor Help Response
Description
An Agent may request assistance from a Supervisor using the ACD Group Help Code, default
574 or {HELP} button. The Supervisor is then notified of the Help request in the Phone display
and a flashing {HELP RESPONSE} button. The Supervisor can respond using the Help
Response button, which is required, and be connected to the Agent’s active call with the
microphone muted. The Supervisor hears the Agent and connected party and may join the
conversation by pressing the [MUTE] button to activate the microphone.
Operation
Agent iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign a {HELP} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “574” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To request Supervisor assistance,
1. Press the {HELP} button.
SLT
1. Hook-flash and dial “574”, the Agent Help code
2. Dial the desired ACD Group number.
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {HELP RESPONSE} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “574” + “Group Number” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To respond to a Help request, at the Supervisor Phone,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button,
2. Press the flashing {HELP RESPONSE} button, the Supervisor is connected to the
active Agent call with the microphone muted, the [MUTE] button LED is On.
To converse with the Agent and connected party
1. Press the illuminated [MUTE] button.
40
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Conditions
1. The Agent Help request is sent to the lowest numbered available Supervisor station for
the associated ACD Group.
2. If no Supervisor is available, the Agent receives error tone.
3. A Warning Tone, if enabled, will be sent to the Agent as the Supervisor is connected to
the conversation.
4. Only one active Help request is allowed at a time, a second help request will cancel
any active help request.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
ACD Group Help Code (PGM 107-Button 5)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Groups (PGM 191)
ACD Group Supervisor (PGM 191-Button 18)
ACD Warning Tone (PGM 191-Button 12)
Related Features

Automatic Call Distribution

Agent Help Request
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
2.7.12.6 Supervisor Login/Logout
Description
Each ACD group is assigned up to five (5) Supervisors to monitor and control real-time status of
the ACD group and Agents assigned to the group. A Supervisor can be assigned to multiple
groups. The Supervisor login/logout feature provides a means for a supervisor to log into one or
more ACD groups and monitor calls.
Each Supervisor has a unique 4-digit Agent Id used to login and logout of active ACD group
participation. Supervisors can login from any station in the system but only at one station at a
time. If a Supervisor logs into a group from a station while logged in at another station, the active
login is terminated and the new login is honored.
Operation
Supervisor iPECS IP & LDP Phone
To assign {LOGIN} or {LOGOUT} buttons:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Login (“572”) or Logout (“573”) code + ACD Group
Number + [HOLD/SAVE]
41
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
To login;
1. Dial “572”, the ACD Supervisor Login code or press the Flex button.
2. Dial the ACD group number
3. Dial supervisor Id code (“0000”-“9999”)
Or
1. Press the Supervisor {LOGIN} button.
2. Dial supervisor Id code (“0000”-“9999”)
To Logout;
1. Dial “573”, the ACD Supervisor Logout code or press the Logout Flex button.
2. Dial the ACD group number
3. Dial supervisor Id code (“0000”-“9999”)
Or
1. Press the Supervisor {LOGOUT} button.
2. Dial supervisor Id code (“0000”-“9999”)
Conditions
1. The system will output a Login/Logout message when a Supervisor logs-in or out.
2. The Supervisor Id can be any 4-digit number (“0000”-“9999”).
3. The system does not verify the Supervisor Id codes, other than requiring four digits are
entered.
4. Any Supervisor Id may be used to login through stations not assigned as a Hot Desk.
5. The ACD Supervisor phone can be assigned an ACD Group Status Flex button used
to view the activity for the group when the Supervisor logs in to multiple groups.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
Supervisor Login (PGM 107-Button 3)
Supervisor Logout (PGM 107-Button 4)
STATION GROUPS
ACD Groups (PGM191)
ACD Group Supervisor (PGM 191-Button 18)
Related Features

Automatic Call Distribution

Hot Desk
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
42
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.8 Automatic Pause Insertion
Description
The system will automatically pause when dialing a Speed Dial number to allow for potential
connection delays. The pause will be inserted when any of the following occur:

After a Flash is encountered in a Speed Dial number,

After a PABX access code is encountered in a Speed Dial or redial number,

After a Pulse to Tone Switchover is encountered in a Speed Dial or Redial number.

When a connect message is received on an ISDN Line.
Operation
System
The system automatically pauses dialing after an appropriate event.
Conditions
1. An automatically inserted pause is not counted as a digit in a Speed Dial number.
2. The LCD of an iPECS IP or LDP Phone will show a "P" when a pause is encountered.
This indication is not shown if the system inserts the Pause automatically.
Programming
SYSTEM
Pause Timer (PGM 181-Button 10)
Related Features

Station Speed Dial

System Speed Dial

Auto Called Number Redial (ACNR)

LNR (Last Number Redial)

Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover
Hardware
43
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.9 Automatic Privacy
Description
Privacy is insured on all communications in the system. If desired, the customer may elect to
disable the Automatic Privacy feature, allowing another station to join in an existing external
conversation uninvited. In such a case, a conference is established.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To intrude into a call when Privacy is disabled
1. Press a busy (lit steady) individual {LINE} access button, user connected to the call
with existing internal station user.
Conditions
1. With Automatic Privacy disabled, privacy is still assured on all intercom and conference
calls.
2. To override privacy, Privacy must be disabled and the intruding Station must have
Override enabled as well as a direct appearance for the desired {LINE} button.
3. Only one station can intrude on an active call.
4. An intrusion tone can be provided to the call indicating another station has accessed
the Line.
5. If either internal party presses another {LINE}, a {DSS}, {PAGE}, [CONF] or other
conflicting button, the party is removed from the “Conference” and must press the
{LINE} button again to reenter the conversation.
Programming
STATION
Override Privilege (PGM 113-Button 4)
SYSTEM
Automatic Privacy (PGM 161-Button 3)
Privacy Warning Tone (PGM 161-Button 4)
Related Features

Multi-Party Voice Conference

Station Flexible Buttons
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
44
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.10
Issue 1.0
Auto Service Mode Control
Description
The service mode defines different ring assignments, COS (Class of Service) and answering
privileges for the external network connections and Stations in the system based on the time-of
day. The service mode can be controlled automatically through definitions in the Auto Ring Mode
Selection Table(Weekly Time table), which defines the time of day for the Day, Night and Timed
shift modes.
The Attendant may change the service mode selection from automatic to manual selecting the
Day, Night, timed or Scenario mode.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
Programming
STATION
Station COS (Class of Service) (PGM 116)
CO/IP
CO/IP CO Ring Assignment (PGM 144)
CO Line COS (Class of Service) (PGM 141-Button 2)
SYSTEM
DISA COS (Class of Service) (PGM 166)
External Control Contact (PGM 168)
PABX Access Codes (PGM 172)
LD Digit Count (PGM 177-Button 3)
LD Digit Code (PGM 177-Button 19)
TABLES
Toll Restriction Tables (PGM 224)
Authorization Codes Table (PGM 227)
Weekly Time Table (PGM 233)
Related Features

Off-Hook Signaling

Authorization Codes (Password)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode

System Clock Set

Outside Line Ring Assignment

LBC (Loud Bell Control)

Dialing Restrictions
Hardware
45
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.11
Issue 1.0
Automatic System Daylight Saving Time
Description
The system can automatically adjust for Daylight Saving Time (DST). When DST is enabled, the
system will adjust the system time forward one (1) hour at the DST Start time and back one (1)
hour at the DST End time. The system time is sent for display to all devices and terminals and is
the basis of the system various time-based features (Auto Service Mode, Wake-up Alarm, etc.).
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
1. The DST Start and End times are set through the Web Admin interface only.
2. The interval between the DST Start and End times must be at least 7 days.
Programming
SYSTEM
System Time (PGM 178-Button 1)
System Date (PGM 178-Button 2)
DST Enable (PGM 178-Button 3)
DST Start & End Time (Web only)
Related Features

Auto Service Mode Control

Automatic System Time Synchronization

System Clock Set
Hardware
46
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.12
Issue 1.0
Automatic Time Synchronization
Description
When enabled, the system automatically determines and sets the time of day employing Network
Time Protocol (NTP) or ISDN time messages. When using NTP, the system, at ten (10) minute
intervals, requests the time from the specified NTP time server and receives GMT (Greenwich
Mean Time) time. This feature allows the System Time to synchronize with the NTP time server
automatically. If the time deviates more than two (2) seconds, the system clock is adjusted to
match the NTP server.
When using ISDN, the system receives the time of day in ISDN messages and automatically
adjusts the time if the time in the system deviates from the ISDN time.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
1. NTP packets are expected over UDP port 123. Assure this port is open and available.
2. A secondary NTP server address can be defined should the first server not respond.
3. The system adjusts for the local time zone assigned in the system as the Standard
System Time as well as Daylight Savings Time (DST), if set.
Programming
SYSTEM
Network Time & Date (PGM 161-Button 12)
Network Time & Date (PGM 195-Button 1)
NTP Sever address (Web only)
Standard System Time, Local Time Zone (Web only)
Related Features

Auto Service Mode Control

Automatic System Daylight Savings Time

System Clock Set
Hardware
47
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.13
Issue 1.0
Call Duration Warning Tone
Description
While on an outside call, you may receive a tone indicating the elapsed time of a call has reached
the Warning Tone time. The station hears the tone after the CO Warning Tone Timer has elapsed.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned
Conditions
1. Warning tone is received 15 seconds prior to expiration of the timer and is repeated at
intervals equal to the Warning Tone Timer.
Programming
STATION
CO Call Time Tone (PGM 112-Button 1)
SYSTEM
Elapsed Call Tone Timer (PGM 180-Button 19)
Related Features

Outside Call Time Restriction
Hardware
48
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.14
Issue 1.0
Call Forward
Description
You can have selected incoming calls re-routed to other stations (local or networked), station
groups, the integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail, or over a system outside Line (Off Net).
The user selects the type and condition under which calls will forward by entering a Call Forward
code as follows:
Code 0:
Remote Call Forward, forwards all calls to the station, except recalls, activated from a
remote station, Call Forward, Follow-me.
Code 1:
Unconditional, all calls to the station, except recalls, are forwarded internally or externally
immediately upon receipt.
Code 2:
Busy, if the station is busy, forwards all calls, except recalls, to the selected station.
Code 3:
No Answer, forwards all calls, except recalls, to the selected station when the station does
not answer within the No Answer timer.
Code 4:
Busy/No Answer, forwards calls if the selected station is busy or does not answer within the
No Answer timer.
Code 5:
Attendant Off-Premise, forwards incoming outside calls to an outside number.
Code 6:
Off-Net Unconditional, all calls to the station, except recalls, forward internally or externally,
only SLT.
Code 7:
Off Net Busy, forwards all calls, except recalls, to the selected station when station is busy,
only SLT.
Code 8:
Off Net No Answer, forwards all calls, except recalls, to the selected station when the station
does not answer within the No Answer timer, only SLT.
Code 9:
Off Net Busy/No Answer, forwards calls if the selected station is busy or does not answer
within the No Answer timer, only SLT.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate Call Forward, (Unconditional, Busy, No Answer, or Busy/No Answer)
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive dial tone.
2. Press the [FWD] button or Soft key. For the LIP8002, the [DND] button is used to
activate Forward.
3. Dial desired Call Forward code (“1”~“4”).
4. Dial the station or station group to receive calls.
Or,
1. Dial an outside Line access code (9, 8xx, 88xx) and the desired external phone
number.
49
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save.
Or,
3. Press the [SPEED] button and dial the desired bin number.
4. Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Remote (Follow-me)
1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] button to receive dial-tone
2. Press the [FWD] button or Soft key,
3. Dial Call Forward code “0”,
4. Dial the station’s Authorization Code (Station number and password),
5. Dial the Forward condition (“1”~“4”),
6. Dial the destination station or station group,
Or
6. Dial an outside Line access code (“9”, “8xx”, “88xx”) and the desired external phone
number.
7. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to save.
Or
8. Press the [SPEED] button and dial the desired bin number
9. Replace the handset, return to idle.
To deactivate Call forward
1. Press flashing [FWD] button, Call Forward will deactivate and the [FWD] button
LED is off.
Or, for an iPECS IP Phone,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive dial-tone,
2. Press the [FWD] Soft button,
3. Press the # dial pad button.
SLT
To activate Call Forward,(Unconditional, Busy, No Answer, or Busy/No Answer)
1. Lift the handset to receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forward feature dial code “554”
3. Dial desired Call Forward code (“1”~“4”).
4. Dial the destination station, station group, or dial CO access code (9, 8xx, 88xx) and
desired external phone number.
5. Momentarily press the hook-switch and receive confirmation tone.
6. Replace the handset to return to idle.
To activate Call Forward to a Speed number
1. Lift the handset to receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forward feature dial code “554”.
50
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3. Dial the Call Forward code (“6”~“9”),
4. Dial the Speed Dial bin number.
5. Replace handset to return to idle.
To activate Call Forward, Remote (Follow-me)
1. Lift the handset to receive dial tone.
2. Dial the Call Forward feature code “554”.
3. Dial the Remote Forward code “0”
4. Dial the station’s Authorization Code (Station and Password),
5. Dial the Forward condition (“1”~“4”)
6. Dial the destination station, station group, or dial CO access code (9, 8xx, 88xx) and
desired external phone number.
7. Momentarily press the hook-switch and receive confirmation tone.
8. Replace handset return to idle.
To deactivate the Call forward
1. Lift the handset and receive stutter dial-tone,
2. Dial the Call Forward feature dial code “554”,
3. Dial “#” to cancel Call Forward.
Conditions
1. A station receiving a forwarded call can transfer the call to the forwarding station.
2. A station, denied the use of Call Forward, will receive error tone in response to
attempts to activate Call Forward.
3. A forwarded intercom call will signal the receiving station in the Tone Signaling mode,
regardless of the Intercom Signaling Mode at the station.
4. You cannot forward calls to a station in DND and, if attempted, error tone is returned.
5. Attempting activation of Call Forward will automatically deactivate any activate Display
Text Message or DND status at your phone. Active Call Back or Queue requests are
not canceled.
6. When Call Forward is active, you can make outgoing calls (internal or external) but
cannot activate a Call back or Queue request.
7. Your private lines calls will forward if the receiving station has a direct appearance
button for the Private line or if you forward to a Voice Mail group.
8. For outside calls, manually activated Call Forward will override any Preset Call
Forward assignment.
9. You may forward calls to the integrated Voice Mail without recording a greeting, in
which case, calls still forward to your Mailbox but callers receive the "No
announcement recorded" message before they can leave a voice mail.
10. Call Forward status is maintained in the system’s non-volatile memory for protection
from power outage.
11. A station in a Station Hunt Group (ACD, Circular or Terminal) can be assigned to
receive incoming hunt calls, overriding any Call Forward. That is, the system
recognizes the Forward condition and but routes hunt calls to the station based.
51
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
12. Off-Net Call Forward of incoming outside calls is essentially an automated DISA call
that establishes an Unsupervised Conference. Such calls are subject to the conditions
of a DISA call and Unsupervised Conference, and may require entry of an
Authorization Code.
13. Off-Net forward calls are not answered by the system until the system completes
dialing of the external call. The caller is then connected to the outgoing call.
14. If the Speed Dial number used in Off-Net Call Forward contains a Flash, only digits
prior to the Flash are dialed.
15. An unlimited number of stations may be set-up in a Call Forward chain, forwarding
calls from one station to the next. However, a station cannot forward calls to a station
already a part of the chain.
16. Calls to a Call Forward chain will progress as appropriate through the chain to the last
station. If the last station enters DND, outside calls revert to the previous station while
intercom calls receive DND tone.
17. No Answer forward employs the Station No Answer Forward Timer unless it is set to
zero in which case the System No Answer Timer is used.
Programming
STATION
Call Forward (PGM 111-Button 2)
Station Call Forward No Answer Timer (PGM 123-Button 1)
SYSTEM
System Call Forward No Answer Timer (PGM 181-Button 1)
STATION GROUPS
Member Forward (PGM 191-Button 14-Circ/Term Group, 2423-UCD/ACD Group, or 12-RingGroup)
Related Features

Call Forward, Attendant

Authorization Codes (Password)

DND (Do Not Disturb)

DND - One Time DND

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Unsupervised Conference

Dialing Restrictions

Station Groups

Station Speed Dial

System Speed Dial

Intercom Signaling Mode

Call Forward, Preset
Hardware
52
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.15
Issue 1.0
Call Forward, Preset
Description
With Call Forward, Preset, your calls forward to a pre-determined destination assigned in the
system database. Preset Station Call Forward can define separate treatment of outside and
intercom calls. In addition, separate busy and no-answer treatments are defined.
Treatments available are:

Unconditional, all calls immediately forward,

Internal Busy, Intercom calls that encounter busy, forward immediately.

Internal No-Answer, Intercom calls that are not answered in the No-Answer time,
forward. Note calls to a busy station also forward after the No-Answer time.

Internal DND, if your phone is in the DND state, Intercom calls route to preset forward
destination.

External Busy, external calls that encounter busy forward immediately.

External No-Answer, external calls, not answered in the No-Answer time, forward.
Note calls to a busy station also forward after the No-Answer time.

External DND, if your phone is in the DND state, Incoming calls route to preset
forward destination.
In addition, calls can directly forward to the users Voice Mail box using Call Forward, Preset.
Operation
System
Operation of Preset Call Forward is automatic.
Conditions
1. A station receiving a forwarded call can transfer the call to the forwarding station.
2. Manual Forward has higher priority than Preset Forward and overrides any Preset
Forward setting.
3. Calls to a Preset Call Forward chain will progress as appropriate through the chain to
the last station. If a station in manual Call Forward or DND is encountered, it is
bypassed and the next station in the chain is signaled. If the last station has entered
DND, outside calls revert to the previous station, signaling until answered or
abandoned.
4. Internal Busy or No-Answer will only operate when the internal call encounters a busy
state or no answer, respectively. External Busy or External No-Answer will only
operate when the external call encounters a busy state or no answer, respectively.
5. Preset call forward status is not shown in the LCD of the Station.
6. A station in a Station Hunt Group (ACD, Circular or Terminal) can be assigned to
receive incoming hunt calls, overriding any Call Forward. That is, either the system
recognizes the Forward condition and bypasses hunt calls around the station or routes
53
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
hunt calls to the station based on the system database.
7. No-Answer forward employs the Station No-Answer Forward Timer unless it is set to
zero in which case the System No-Answer Timer is used.
Programming
STATION
Preset Call Forward (PGM 120)
Station Call Forward No Answer Timer (PGM 123-Button 1)
Direct Transfer Mail Box Destination (PGM 120-Button 6)
STATION GROUPS
Member Forward (PGM 191 Button-14-Circ/Term Group, 2423-UCD/ACD Group, or 12-Ring Group)
SYSTEM
System Call Forward No Answer Timer (PGM 181-Button 1)
Related Features

Call Forward

Off-Hook Signaling

External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

DND (Do Not Disturb)

DND - One Time DND

Private Line
Hardware
54
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.16
Issue 1.0
Call Park
Description
You may place an active outside call in a special holding location called a Park Orbit for easy
access from any station in the system. There are 19 Park Orbits allowing multiple calls to be
parked simultaneously.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To park an active external call
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the Park Orbit number (601~619).
3. Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button,
2. Dial the Park Orbit number (601~619).
SLT
To park an active external call
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial the Park Orbit number (601~619).
3. Return to idle.
To retrieve a parked call
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Park Orbit number (601~619).
Conditions
1. If the selected Park Orbit returns a busy signal, the user may simply dial another Park
Orbit without the need to disconnect.
2. Intercom calls cannot be placed in a Park Orbit.
3. A Parked call will recall to the station that parked the call should the Call Park Timer
expire. The normal Hold Recall process is then initiated.
4. A Parked call will indicate busy at all appearances.
Programming
SYSTEM
Call Park Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 2)
Related Features


Hold Recall
Attendant Recall
Hardware
55
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.17
Issue 1.0
Call Pick-Up
2.17.1
Directed Call Pick-Up
Description
You may answer (“Pick-Up”) incoming and transferred intercom and outside calls ringing at
another station. All ringing calls are subject to Directed Call Pick-up except Private Line calls,
queue Callbacks and recalls from hold.
iPECS IP and LDP Phone users may assign a Flex button as a {DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP}
button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “7” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To Pick-up a call ringing at another station
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “7”, the Directed Call Pick-up feature code.
3. Dial the ringing station’s number.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the {DIRECTED CALL PICK-UP} button.
3. Dial the ringing station’s intercom number.
SLT
To Pick-up a call ringing at another station
1. Lift the handset
2. Dial “7”, the Directed Call Pick-up code.
3. Dial the ringing station’s number.
Conditions
1. To pick-up an outside call, you must have an idle appearance button available.
2. When several calls are ringing at a station simultaneously, Call Pick-up will connect the
oldest highest priority call (Ringing Line Preference, PGM 173).
3. Queue callback and Private Line calls are not subject to Call Pick-up and such
attempts receive error tone.
4. Hands free announced intercom calls cannot be picked up by another station. Only
ringing intercom calls are subject to Call Pick-up.
56
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Programming
SYSTEM
Ringing Line Preference Priority (PGM 173)
Related Features

Intercom Signaling Mode

Ringing Line Preference

Group Call Pick-Up

Private Line
Hardware
2.17.2
Group Call Pick-Up
Description
You can answer (“Pick-Up”) incoming and transferred intercom and outside calls ringing at
another station in the same Station group. All ringing calls, except Private Line calls, queue
Callbacks and recalls from hold, are subject to Pick-up by other stations in the same group.
iPECS IP and LDP Phone users may assign a Flex button as a {GROUP CALL PICK-UP} button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {GROUP CALL PICK-UP} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “566” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To Pick-up a call ringing at another station
1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “566”, the Group Call Pick-up feature code.
Or,
1. Press the {GROUP CALL PICK-UP} button.
SLT
To Pick-up a call ringing at another station
1. Lift the handset
2. Dial “566”, the Group Call Pick-up code.
57
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Conditions
1. To pick-up an outside call, you must have an idle appearance button available.
2. When several calls are ringing simultaneously, Call Pick-up will connect the oldest
highest priority call (Ringing Line Preference, PGM 173).
3. Queue callback and Private Line calls are not subject to Call Pick-up and such
attempts receive error tone.
4. Hands free announced intercom calls cannot be picked up by another station. Only
ringing intercom calls are subject to Call Pick-up.
5. When a station belongs to multiple groups, calls to the group with the lowest number
are answered first.
Programming
STATION GROUPS
Station Group (PGM 190-Button 1)
SYSTEM
Ringing Line Preference Priority (PGM 173)
Related Features

Intercom Signaling Mode

Ringing Line Preference

Directed Call Pick-Up

Station Groups

Private Line
Hardware
2.17.3
Pick Up Group Call Pick-Up
Description
You can answer (“Pick-Up”) incoming and transferred intercom and outside calls ringing at
another station in the same Pick-up Group. All ringing calls, except Private Line calls, queue
Callbacks and recalls from hold are subject to Pick-up by other stations in the same Pick-up
group.
iPECS IP and LDP Phone users may assign a Flex button as a {PICK UP GROUP CALL PICKUP} button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {PICK UP GROUP CALL PICK-UP} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “588” + [HOLD/SAVE]
58
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
To Pick-up a call ringing at another station in the same Call Pick-up group
1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “588”, the Pick-Up Group Call Pick-up feature code.
Or,
3. Press the {PICK UP GROUP CALL PICK-UP} button.
SLT
To Pick-up a call ringing at another station in the same Call Pick-up group
1. Lift the handset
2. Dial “588”, the Pick-Up Group Call Pick-up code.
Conditions
1. Pick-Up Group Call Pick-up applies to stations within the same Pick-up Group and
does not apply to other types of Station Groups where Group Call Pick-up may be
used.
2. To pick-up an outside call, you must have an idle appearance button available.
3. When several calls are ringing simultaneously, Call Pick-up will connect the oldest
highest priority call (Ringing Line Preference, PGM 173).
4. Queue callback and Private Line calls are not subject to Call Pick-up and such
attempts receive error tone.
5. Hands free announced intercom calls cannot be picked up by another station. Only
ringing intercom calls are subject to Call Pick-up.
6. When a station belongs to multiple Pick-up Groups, calls to the group with the lowest
number are answered first.
7. A Station must have “Pick up by Button” enabled to use a Flex button for Pick-up
Group Call Pick-up.
Programming
STATION GROUPS
Pick Up Group (PGM 192-Button 1)
STATION
Pick up by Button(PGM 114-Button 20)
SYSTEM
Ringing Line Preference Priority (PGM 173)
Related Features

Intercom Signaling Mode

Ringing Line Preference

Directed Call Pick-Up

Pick Up Group

Private Line
Hardware
59
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.18
Issue 1.0
Call Re-Routing (CRR)
Description
The system can be assigned to route outside incoming calls based on the called number and the
Line group receiving the call. Calls can be rerouted to an outside telephone number, a networked
system or, using DISA to a Station. The reroute can be assigned for calls on a Line group or on
all Line groups. The received called number is compared to entries in the database and, if a
match occurs, the call is rerouted. The database called number entries may include an “*” as a
wild card digit, any digit will match the wild card entry.
Operation
System
Operation of Call Re-Route is automatic once configured.
Conditions
1. Call Re-Routing employs a Table with up to 170 entries.
Programming
SYSTEM
CO Call Rerouting (PGM252-Web only)
Related Features
Hardware
60
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.19
Issue 1.0
Call Transfer
2.19.1
Call Transfer, Outside Line
Description
If allowed in the system database, you may transfer an outside call over an external line to
another destination, establishing an Unsupervised Conference between the two external parties.
If the receiving party is called through an ISDN or VoIP path, the Transfer Hold Recall Timer is
initiated and if it expires, Hold Recall is initiated.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To transfer an active call with Screened Call Transfer
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Place the outside call to the destination in normal manner.
3. At answer, announce the call.
4. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
To transfer an active call with Unscreened Call Transfer
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Place the outside call to the destination in normal manner.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
SLT
To transfer an active call with Screened Call Transfer
1. Momentarily depress the hook-switch.
2. Place the outside call to the destination in normal manner.
3. At answer, announce the call.
4. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
To transfer an active call with, Unscreened Call Transfer
1. Momentarily depress the hook-switch.
2. Place the outside call to the destination in normal manner.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Conditions
1. For this feature, at least one of the two outside Lines (transferred or receiving) must
provide detection of disconnect supervision and lost loop condition.
2. Calls on Lines using digital or VoIP provide “Answer Supervision”, thus the iPECS
system can provide Transfer Recall.
61
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3. If, during the transfer to an external party you press the outside Line of the original call,
the outgoing call is disconnected and the original call is connected to your phone.
Programming
STATION
Off Net Forward (PGM 111-Button 14)
SYSTEM
Transfer Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 7)
Off Net Prompt Usage (PGM 160-Button 11)
CO to CO UC Timer Extension (PGM 160-Button 12)
Unsupervised Conference Timer (PGM 182-Button 5)
Related Features

Hold Recall

Call Transfer, Station

Unsupervised Conference
Hardware
2.19.2
Call Transfer, Station
Description
After answering an outside call, you can send the call to another station in the iPECS system.
Calls can be transferred announcing the call (screened) or without an announcement
(unscreened).
When a call is transferred, the Transfer Recall Timer is initiated. If the timer expires before the call
is answered, the Hold Recall process is initiated.
A Flex button on iPECS IP and LDP Phones can be assigned for the DSS/BLF (Direct station
Selection/Busy Lamp Field) function, which allows One-button Transfer.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {DSS/BLF} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Station Number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To transfer an active call with Screened Call Transfer
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the station to receive the transfer.
3. At answer or splash tone, announce the call.
4. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Or,
62
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
1. Press the {DSS/BLF} button for the desired station.
2. At answer or splash tone, announce the call.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
To transfer an active call with Unscreened Call Transfer
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the station to receive the transfer.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Or,
1. Press the {DSS/BLF} button for the desired station.
2. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
SLT
To transfer an active call with, Screened Call Transfer
1. Momentarily depress the hook-switch.
2. Dial the Station number to receive the transfer.
3. At answer or splash tone, announce the call.
4. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
To transfer an active call with Unscreened Call Transfer
1. Momentarily depress the hook-switch.
2. Dial the Station number to receive the transfer.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Conditions
1. The transferring station may camp a call on to a busy station.
2. The LED of a {LOOP} or {POOL} button will display the status of an outside call until
the station no longer has call supervision i.e.; the call is successfully transferred.
3. To prevent Toll abuse, outside Lines without an active call (either incoming or dialed
digits on outgoing) cannot be transferred.
4. For outgoing calls on analog Lines, the system will monitor the Line for dial tone to
prevent Toll abuse.
Programming
STATION
SYSTEM
No Touch Answer (PGM 111-Button 6)
Transfer Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 7)
Related Features




Hold Recall
Call Transfer, CO/IP
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Station Flexible Buttons
Hardware
63
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.19.3
Issue 1.0
Call Transfer, System Announcement
Description
You can transfer outside calls to a System announcement allowing the system to play the
announcement and, if configured, the party can then dial digits to route the call further.
After transferring to a System announcement the system establishes DISA (Direct Inbound
System Access) service for the outside party.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To transfer an active call to a System announcement,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial ‘55*’ and the System announcement (01-70).
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
SLT
To transfer an active call to a System announcement
1. Momentarily depress the hook-switch.
2. Dial ‘55*’ and the System announcement number.
3. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Conditions
1. Only an outside call can be transferred to a System announcement.
Programming
Related Features

DISA

CCR

External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Integrated Voice Mail
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
64
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.19.4
Issue 1.0
Call Transfer, Voice Mail
Description
If permitted, you may transfer outside calls directly to another station’s Voice Mailbox, either the
integrated or an external Voice Mail system.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To transfer an active call to a user’s Voice Mailbox
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Press the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button.
3. Dial the Station number or press the {DSS/BLF} button for the desired station.
4. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
Conditions
2. The LED of a {LOOP} or {POOL} button will display the status of a call until the station
no longer has call supervision i.e.; the call is successfully transferred.
Programming
STATION
Direct Transfer to Mail Box Destination (PGM 120-Button 6)
SYSTEM
Transfer Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 7)
Related Features

Hold Recall

Call Waiting/Camp-On

External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Integrated Voice Mail
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
65
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.20
Issue 1.0
Call Waiting/Camp-On
Description
Call Waiting is used to notify a busy station that a call is waiting to be answered. The busy station
is notified of the waiting call by a “Camp-On” tone. For users of an iPECS IP or LDP Phone, the
LED of the [HOLD/SAVE] button will flash.
After receiving a busy signal, the calling station camps on to the called station. The called station
can respond by:
 answering the waiting call, which places the active call on hold first,
 sending a silent text or voice message,
 activating One-Time DND, or
 ignoring the Camp-On tone.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate a Camp-On while receiving Intercom busy tone
1. Press the “*” button, the called and calling stations receive Camp-On tone.
SLT
To activate a Camp-On while receiving Intercom busy tone
1. Press the “*” button, the called and calling stations receive Camp-On tone.
Conditions
1. The user may only Camp-On to a station in the busy mode. A user may not Camp-On
to a station in DND, in a conference, receiving a Page, etc.
2. The Camp-On procedure is also employed by an Attendant or Secretary of an
Executive/Secretary pair to activate DND Override.
3. A Camp-On tone is sent each time the calling user presses the “*” button.
4. You can respond to a Camp-on by activating a Pre-defined or Custom may be used to
respond to a Camp-On, or a System prompt can be configured to play to the calling
Station.
Programming
Related Features





Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Intercom Call (ICM Call)
Silent Text Message
Voice Over
Hardware
66
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.21
2.21.1
Issue 1.0
Conference
Conference Group
Description
You can arrange stations and external contacts in groups so that you may create a conference
with all members of the group through a single call. Each conference group can have up to 13
members that can be a station or an external telephone number. Conference groups are
assigned in the iPECS User Portal (Station Web Admin) by assigning members to a conference
group.
Once the group is established, placing a call to the Conference Group initiates the Conference
Group call. The system calls each member and a System announcement, which you pre-record,
is played to members receiving the group call. Initiation of a Group call can be password
protected with a 5-digit password that you assign when the group is created.
There are two (2) types of Conference Groups, Station and System. The Station Conference
group is created by the station user, assigned as the group supervisor, and is the only member
that can initiate a Conference group call. The System Conference Group is created by an
Attendant or system administrator and any member can initiate the Conference Group call. The
member initiating the call becomes the supervisor for that group call.
The supervisor can manage membership in the conference and can monitor the status of each
member, in/out of conference. The Supervisor can remove members from the conference or add
a non-member to the conference. An Absent Supervisor timer terminates the conference if the
supervisor is not in the conference for the timer interval. Setting the interval to “0” disables this
feature.
Once a group is created, the supervisor imitates the conference by calling the conference group.
The system then attempts to call each member of the group either simultaneously or in turn using
the Interval timer assigned for the group. Members that answer the call receive the recorded
voice announcement, if any, and can enter the conference, dial “1”, or reject the conference,
hang-up. The system will attempt to contact a busy or no-answer member based on the assigned
Retry Count. A call is consider no-answer using the No-answer timer set when the group was
created.
Operation
To create a conference group from the iPECS User Portal:
1. Access Station Program in the Web Admin.
2. Select Conference Group button.
3. Create the Conference group entering:
− The name of group : up to 12 character,
− The password: Passwords must be 5-digits.
− Announcement number for the group: (pre-recording the announcement is
67
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
−
−
−
−
Issue 1.0
required),
The Absent Supervisor timer,
The No answer timer,
The busy/no-answer Retry count,
The Interval time: Each member is called in turn at expiration of the interval
timer.
4. Set the Member Attributes by entering:
− Index number
− Type: Station, Individual CO, CO group, loop or Transit-out code (access loop
for networking call).
− The CO value: the supervisor can select a specific CO line or CO group for
used to call external members.
− Dial number: The station or external party number.
5. Press the Save button to store the Conference Group configuration.
Operation
IPECS phone & LDP Phones
To assign a {GRP MONITOR} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “55” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To initiate a Conference Group call:
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “68”xxx, the Conference Group code and group number (xxx).
3. Enter the Conference group password, if assigned, members receive the
Conference Group call.
To enter a Conference Group call:
1. Answer the ringing call and receive recorded announcement, if assigned and
recorded.
2. Dial “1” to enter the conference or hang-up to reject the conference. For iPECS
Phontage or UCS clients, use Accept or Deny when notified of the conference.
To monitor conference member status or delete members while in the conference:
1. Press the Monitor flex button, the state of the first member is displayed.
2. Press [VOL UP/VOL DOWN] button to display the state of other members.
3. Press the [DND] button to delete a participant from the conference.
To monitor the Group member conference status while Not in the conference:
4. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
5. Dial “55”, the Monitor Conference Group code.
6. Press [VOL UP/VOL DOWN] button to display the state of other members.
To add a non-member to the Group:
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to place the conference on hold.
68
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2. Call the desired party.
3. Press the [CONF] button.
Conditions
1. The conditions associated with Multi-Party Voice Conference apply.
2. Members using the iPECS Phontage or UCS client Soft phone may view the state of
other members in the conference.
3. A maximum of twenty (20 Conference Groups can be created for user by any system
user and up to twenty-five (25) users can create a Conference Group.
4. The user must have access to the Station Web Admin with the proper password
(Authentication code).
5. If there are insufficient Conference channels available when initiating the conference
group call, the initiator receives error tone.
6. Two-way record can be used to record the Conference Group call.
Programming
Related Features

Multi-Party Voice Conference

Conference Room

System Admin Programming
Hardware
69
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.21.2
Issue 1.0
Conference Member View & Delete
Description
When you establish a Multi-Party conference, you are the Conference supervisor. As the
Supervisor, you can view, add, and remove parties from the conference. An iPECS IP or LDP
Phone with 3-Soft buttons is required.
Operation
IPECS phone & LDP Phones w 3-Soft buttons
To view and modify the Conference members, while in the conference
1. Select the {VIEW} Soft button, the LCD displays the first Conference Member.
MEMBER 01
STA 101
BACK
ADD
DELETE
2. Use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons to scroll the list of members, use the [ADD]
button to add a member to the Conference, [DELETE] removes the member from
the Conference. The BACK button returns the display to the normal Conference
display.
Conditions
1. Only supervisor of Multi-Party conference can use this feature.
2. Only the iPECS IP and LDP phones with 3 soft buttons can use this feature.
Programming
Related Features

Multi-Party Voice Conference
Hardware

IPECS IP or LDP Phone models w/3-Soft buttons
70
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.21.3
Issue 1.0
Conference Room
Description
In addition to ad-hoc Multi-party conferencing, you may open a Conference Room. Other internal
and external parties are invited to the conference and can join the conference without further
action by you, the Conference Room Supervisor. A Conference Room can be password
protected so that only parties that enter the password are allowed to join the Room. As parties
enter the Conference Room a tone is provided notifying members that a party has entered the
conference.
A maximum of 13 parties can join a Conference Room and two such conferences can be active
simultaneously.
A system Attendant can view the list of participants in an active Conference Room and close any
Conference Room.
Operation
Attendant Phone
To view Room participant list
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “054”.
3. Dial Room number (“1”~”9”).
To delete a Conference Room
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “055”.
3. Dial Room number (“1”~”9”).
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To open a Conference Room
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “53” to create a Conference Room.
3. Dial the desired Conference Room number (“1”~”9”).
4. If desired, enter a password (exactly 5 digits) for the Conference Room.
5. Press [HOLD/SAVE] button to open the Room.
To join a Conference Room
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “59”, the Conference Room entry code.
3. Dial the Conference Room Number.
4. Dial the Conference Room password, if required.
To close a Conference Room
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “54”, the close Conference Room code.
71
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3. Dial the Conference Room number (1~9)
4. Dial the Conference Room password.
5. Press [HOLD/SAVE] to delete the Conference Room.
To transfer an active call to a Conference Room
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “59”, the Conference Room entry code.
3. Dial the Conference Room Number.
4. Dial the Conference Room password.
5. Hang-up to complete the transfer.
SLT
To open a Conference Room
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “53”, the Create Conference Room code.
4. Dial the desired Conference Room number (“1”~”9”).
5. Dial the Conference Room password.
6. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
To join a Conference Room
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “59”, the Conference Room entry code.
3. Dial the Conference Room Number.
4. Dial the Conference Room password.
To close a Conference Room
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “54”, the close Conference Room code.
4. Dial the Conference Room number (“1”~”9”).
5. Dial the Conference Room password.
6. Momentarily press the hook-switch, receive confirmation tone.
Conditions
1. Once established, a Conference Room will remain opened until the Room is closed.
2. iPECS Phontage and UCS Client Soft phones may also create, delete and join a
Conference Room. For operation, refer to the iPECS Phontage or UCS Client User
Guide.
Programming
Related Features



Multi-Party Conference
Automatic Speaker Select
Hold Recall
Hardware
72
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.21.4
Issue 1.0
Multi-Party Conference
Description
You can join multiple internal and external parties in a single call as a conference. You can join
a maximum of thirteen (13) parties can be in a conference with a maximum of two such
conferences simultaneously. There is no limit on the number of 3-party conferences.
You can place a Conference on hold, allowing you to accomplish other tasks while permitting the
other parties to continue to converse.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To establish an ad-hoc conference
1. Establish the first call.
2. Press the [CONF] button. The LED will light, the connected party is placed on
exclusive hold and you receive dial tone.
3. Place the second call.
4. When connected, press [CONF], the new call is placed on exclusive hold.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 above to add additional conference parties.
6. Press the [CONF] button to establish conference.
To place a conference on hold
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, the [CONF] button LED will flash.
To retrieve held conference
1. Press the flashing [CONF] button, all parties reconnected.
SLT
To establish an ad-hoc a conference
1. Establish the first call.
2. Momentarily press the hook-switch, the connected party is placed on exclusive hold
and you receive dial tone.
3. Place the second call.
4. When connected, repeat steps 2 and 3 above to add additional parties.
5. When completed adding parties, momentarily press hook-switch twice in 2 seconds
to connect all parties.
Conditions
1. The [CONF] button remains illuminated at the initiators phone for the duration of the
conference.
2. If the system receives a disconnect signal and no internal parties remain in the
conference, the conference is terminated and all parties are disconnected. If an
internal party is still connected when a disconnect signal is received, the connection to
remaining parties is maintained.
73
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3. The normal Hold Recall process is applied to a conference on hold using the
Unsupervised Conference recall Timer for recall timing.
4. If while setting up a conference, system error tone is received, the initiator must press
the [CONF] button to regain Intercom dial tone; an SLT user must hook-flash.
5. A station that is busy, in DND or other non-idle state cannot be added to a conference.
Programming
Related Features





Automatic Speaker Select
Hold Recall
Unsupervised Conference
Broker Call
Conference Room
Hardware
2.21.5
Unsupervised Conference
Description
Using your iPECS IP or LDP Phone, you may establish a conference with external parties and
exit the conference while allowing the external parties to converse privately without the system
supervising the connection through your phone. In this case, the system monitors the outside
Lines to determine if either party disconnects. Also, the Unsupervised Conference timer is
initiated when an Unsupervised Conference is established. Fifteen seconds prior to expiration of
the timer, a Warning Tone is provided and at expiration, the call disconnects.
If enabled, either party in an Unsupervised Conference can extend the Unsupervised Conference
beyond the timer expiration. The party enters the Timer Extension feature code and a digit “1” to
“9” indicating the Timer extension multiplier. The system extends the timer based on the dialed
digit multiple of the Timer. For example, if the Unsupervised Conference timer is 5 minutes and
the user dials the digit 4, the timer will extend to 20 minutes (4 multiplied by 5 minutes).
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To set up an Unsupervised conference
1. Establish a conference with external parties as normal.
2. Press the [CONF] button. The [CONF] button LED flashes to indicate the
Unsupervised Conference state.
74
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
To reenter the Unsupervised conference
1. Press the flashing [CONF] button.
Conference Party
To extend the Unsupervised Conference from a connected party
1. Dial “# #”.
2. Dial the Timer extension multiplier (1~9).
Conditions
1. The Unsupervised Conference Timer also applies to an external call placed by to a
DISA line in the system.
2. An Unsupervised Conference will be terminated if the system receives a disconnect
signal or the Unsupervised Conference Timer expires.
3. An Unsupervised Conference will not recall the user.
Programming
NUMBERING
Unsupervised Conference Timer Extension (PGM 109-Button
3)
STATION
Off Net Forward (PGM 111-Button 14)
SYSTEM
CO to CO UC Time Extension (PGM 160-Button 12)
Unsupervised Conference Timer (PGM 182-Button 5)
Related Features

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Multi-Party Voice Conference
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
75
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.22
Issue 1.0
Customer Site Name
Description
A Name, up to 24 characters, may be entered into the system database as the Site name. The
Site Name, which is displayed on the SMDR and database outputs as well as during an Admin
session, is commonly used as a site identifier.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when a name is assigned
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM ID
Site Name (PGM 100-Button 2)
Related Features
Hardware
76
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.23
Issue 1.0
Data Line Security
Description
Data from an analog Modem or FAX transmitted over analog Lines is subject to distortion and
errors if system tones such as Camp-On and Override are applied during transmission. To
eliminate such errors, stations that use analog data (modems or Fax) can be assigned to block
incoming system tones.
Operation
System
System tones are automatically blocked when Data Line Security is assigned
Conditions
1. Stations or an Attendant attempting to Camp-On or Override a station with Data Line
Security will receive error tone.
2. When Data Line Security is enabled, the system will not apply audio gain to the call.
Programming
STATION
Data Line Security (PGM 111-Button 4)
Related Features

Call Waiting/Camp-On

DND Override

Intrusion
Hardware
77
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.24
Issue 1.0
Delayed Line Ring
Description
Ring signals for an incoming call on a “Normal” type outside Line can be sent to Stations
immediately upon detection or after an assigned ring cycle delay. The delay can be up to 9
system ring cycles, thus allowing other Stations to answer the call. Note a “Normal Line is a
standard non-DID/DISA line which use other routing techniques to determine the ring assignment.
Operation
System
Delay Ring operation is automatic when assigned
Conditions
1. Outside Lines must be assigned an immediate ring destination. As a default all
incoming outside calls ring to the Attendant Station 100 and, if no immediate
destination is assigned, the Attendant will receive ring for the call.
2. Delay Ring can be assigned for a Station or Station Group.
3. If no delay is entered when programming Ring assignments, the Station will receive
immediate ring.
4. Private Lines may be assigned with delayed ring.
5. If no Station or Station Group is assigned for immediate ring, the call will ring
immediately at the first available Attendant.
Programming
CO/IP
CO Ring Assignment (PGM 144)
Related Features

Private Line

Station Groups

Line Ring Assignment
Hardware
78
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.25
Issue 1.0
Delayed Auto Attendant
2.25.1
DISA Incoming Line-Russia-
Description
If the Country Code for the system is assigned as Russia, an incoming DISA call will be answered
after the DISA Answer Timer expires. After the DISA Delay Timer expires, the caller is connected
to the System Auto Attendant announcement number ‘1’.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned
Conditions
1. The DISA Answer and Delay Timers are only applicable when the Country Code is set
to Russia.
Programming
CO/IP
DISA Answer Timer (PGM 142-Button 24)
DISA Delay Timer (PGM 142-Button 22)
Related Features


DISA Service Attribute
DID Service Attribute
Hardware
79
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.25.2
Issue 1.0
Normal Line Ring Assignment
Description
An incoming outside call on a “Normal” outside Line can ring to the integrated Auto Attendant
either immediately upon detection or after a delay of up to 30 seconds. This allows other stations
assigned immediate ring the opportunity to answer before the call is routed to the Auto Attendant.
Once routed to the Auto Attendant the pre-recorded system announcement plays and the routing
associated with the announcement will apply.
Note a “Normal” outside Line is a standard non-DID/DISA line.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned
Conditions
1. When Delayed Auto Attendant Ring is assigned, after the delay, the call will no longer
ring the assigned stations and will only ring to the Auto Attendant.
2. If no delay is entered, the call will ring to the Auto Attendant immediately.
3. To assign Delayed Auto Attendant ring, at least one Station or Station Group must be
assigned immediate ring.
4. Ring is assigned to a System announcement (01-70) or the AA Ring Time can be set.
In the former case, the call is immediately routed to the announcement. In the latter
case, the call will notify Stations assigned ring for the duration of the AA Ring time,
then the call is routed to System announcement number ‘01’.
Programming
CO/IP
CO Ring Assignment (PGM 144)
Related Features

Line Ring Assignment
Hardware
80
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.26
Issue 1.0
Diagnostics & Maintenance
Description
The system software incorporates various diagnostic and maintenance routines that may be
“called” remotely or locally through the systems RS-232 serial ports, a TCP/IP connection using a
Web browser established over IP networks or a PPP connection over ISDN. Routines that can be
accessed include trace functions at the device level, commands for diagnostics, database and
software upload and download, and maintenance, and tools for manipulation at the OS level.
Operation
Conditions
Programming
Related Features
Hardware
81
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.27
Issue 1.0
Dial-by-Name
Description
A name, up to 16 characters, may be assigned to each Station and System Speed dial. In
addition, each station may be assigned a 12-character name. When Names are assigned, if using
an iPECS IP or LDP phone, you may place an intercom call to another station or select a Station
or System Speed dial using the Name.
You select from one of three Dial-by-Name directories and enter characters employing 2 dial pad
buttons for each character. The system finds and displays the nearest match to your entries. You
may continue entering characters or scroll the directory at any point using the [VOL UP]/[VOL
DOWN] button and selecting a name to call. The number associated with a selected name is
displayed by using the [TRANS/PGM] button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To use Dial by Name using a [SPEED] button
1. Press the [SPEED] button twice.
2. Dial the desired directory, I: Intercom, U: User Speed Dial, S: System Speed Dial.
3. Search the directory using the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button or by entering
characters. See Station Speed Dial for character entry procedure.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to place the call.
To use Dial by Name using the LIP-8000 series soft buttons
1. Press the [DIR] soft button.
2. Dial the desired directory, 1: User Speed Dial, 2: System Speed Dial 3: Intercom.
3. Search the directory using the Navigation buttons or by entering two digits for each
character, refer to Station Speed Dial for the Character Entry Chart.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to place the call.
To toggle between the name and number display
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
To program your Station User Name
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “071”, the Attendant User Name Program code.
3. Dial the Station number.
4. Dial the name, up to 12 characters; refer to Station Speed Dial for The Character
Entry Chart.
5. Press [HOLD/SAVE].
82
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Conditions
1. Available characters are A to Z, space and period.
2. The LCD will display multiple names, one per LCD line up to 12 characters.
3. If you select a directory with no entries or there is no match to the entry, the “No
Entries” message is displayed and error tone is provided.
4. Dial-by-Name is only available to iPECS IP and LDP Phones with a display. Other
users will receive error tone if an attempt is made to access Dial-by-Name.
5. You may both scroll and enter characters to search a directory.
Programming
STATION
System Speed Dial Access (PGM 106-Button 16)
Related Features

Station Speed Dial

System Speed Dial
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone models w/Display
83
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.28
Issue 1.0
Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover
Description
On a pulse dial outside Line, you can request the system to change the signaling mode from
pulse to DTMF. This allows you to access outside facilities that require DTMF signals such as
banking services, Voice mail, etc.
Operation
To switch from pulse to DTMF while on a pulse Line
1. Dial “*”, the signaling changes to DTMF.
Conditions
1. This command is only recognized for analog pulse dial CO lines.
2. Dial pulse to tone switchover is not available in the Redial features.
3. When “*” is the first digit of a dialed number, the Display Security feature is enabled
and not Pulse to tone switchover. Otherwise, when the system encounters an “*” in a
Speed Dial digit string, dialing will pause then the remaining digit are sent using DTMF
signaling.
4. For VoIP calls, pulse dialing is not available thus; switchover is not required or
supported.
Programming
CO/IP
CO Line Type (PGM 141-Button 4)
CO Line Signal Type (PGM 141-Button 5)
Related Features

Speed Dial

Display Security
Hardware
84
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.29
2.29.1
Issue 1.0
Dialing Restrictions
Class of Service
Description
Dialing privileges can be assigned for each station, DISA line and Authorization Code. Dialing
privileges are assigned in “Allow” and “Deny” Exception tables that are associated with a COS.
The dialing privileges are the result of the interaction of the Station and CO Class of Service
(COS) assignments and Exception Tables as shown in the charts below. Users placing an
outgoing call or dialing after answering a call will be allowed the dialing privileges assigned.
Station/DISA/Code Class of Service – There are eleven (11) Station Class of Service
assignments, which also apply to DISA and Authorization Code users based on the assigned
COS (Class of Service).
Station COS (Class
of Service)
Dialing Restriction
1
No restrictions are placed on dialing.
2
Assignments in Exception Table A are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
3
Assignments in Exception Table B are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
4
5
6
7
Assignments in Exception Tables A & B are monitored for allow and deny
numbers.
The leading digit cannot be a Long Distance code and assignments in
Exception Table C apply.
Number of digits cannot exceed LD digit count and assignments in Exception
Table C apply.
Intercom and Emergency number calls are allowed. Incoming and transferred
calls are allowed.
8
Assignments in Exception Table D are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
9
Assignments in Exception Table E are monitored for allow and deny numbers.
10
11
The assignments in the Exception Table D & E are monitored for allow and
deny numbers.
The assignments in the Exception Table A & B and D & E are monitored for
allow and deny numbers.
85
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
CO Class of Service – There are five (5) CO line COS (Class of Service) assignments.
Dialing Restriction
Station COS
(Class of
Service)
1
Dialing privileges are governed by the Station COS only.
2
Assignments in Exception Table A govern dialing privileges for Station COS 2 & 4.
3
4
5
Assignments in Exception Table B govern dialing privileges for Station COS 3 &
5.
No LD calls (LD code & digit count) and assignments of Exception C apply to
Station COS 2 & 6 only.
No dialing restrictions applied, overrides Station COS 2 through 6.
Station and CO COS (Class of Service) Interaction – The following chart displays the dialing
capabilities based on the interaction between the Station COS (Class of Service) and CO line
COS (Class of Service) assignments.
Station COS
(Class of
Service)
1
Restriction
CO COS 1
No restriction
CO COS 2
CO COS 3
No restriction
CO COS 4
CO COS 5
No restriction
No LD calls &
Table C
No restriction
No restriction
No LD calls &
Table C
No restriction
2
Exception Table Exception Table
A
A
3
Exception Table
B
Exception Table No LD calls &
B
Table C
No restriction
4
Exception Table Exception Table Exception Table No LD calls &
A&B
A
B
Table C
No restriction
No restriction
5
Local call &
Table C
Local call &
Table C
Local call &
Table C
No LD calls &
Table C
No restriction
6
Local call &
Table C
Local call &
Table C
Local call &
Table C
No LD calls &
Table C
No restriction
7
Intercom only
Intercom only
Intercom only
Intercom only
Intercom only
8
Exception Table Exception Table
D
D
No restriction
No LD calls &
Table C
No restriction
9
Exception Table Exception Table
E
E
No restriction
No LD calls &
Table C
No restriction
10
Exception Table Exception Table
D&E
D&E
No restriction
No LD calls &
Table C
No restriction
11
Exception Table Exception Table
A, B, D & E
A, B, D & E
No restriction
No LD calls &
Table C
No restriction
PBX Dialing Codes – Four (4) one or two-digit PBX Trunk Access Codes can be defined in the
86
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
system database. When dialed as the first digit(s), these codes signal the system to apply the
appropriate COS (Class of Service). If not dialed, the call is treated as an internal PBX call and
dialing is not restricted.
Exception Tables – Each Exception Table permits entry of 50 Allow codes and 50 Deny codes.
Each code can contain up to 20 digits including digits 0-9, “#” as a wild card (any digit) and “*” as
the end of entry mark. Reference the previous charts for application of the Exception Tables.
Exception Table process – As digits are dialed, they are compared to entries in the appropriate
Exception Table. Based on the Allow and Deny entries, the system applies the following rules to
allow or deny the call.
Rule 1
If a table has no entries, no restrictions are applied.
Rule 2
If there are only Deny entries, restrictions are provided as
Deny only.
Rule 3
If there are only Allow entries, restrictions are provided as
Allow only.
Rule 4
If there are both Allow and Deny entries, the Deny entries
are searched. If the dialed number matches a Deny entry,
and is not part of an allow entry the call is restricted; if no
match is found the call is allowed. For example, if 2223 is
assigned in the Allow Table and 222 is assigned in the
Deny Table numbers starting with 222 are denied except
for 2223.
Operation
System
The system automatically applies the assigned COS (Class of Service)
Conditions
1. The dialing privileges are based on the CO and Station COS (Class of Service).
2. When you enter an Authorization code the COS associated with the code may be
selected for the call.
Programming
STATION
Station COS (Class of Service) (PGM 116)
CO/IP
CO Line COS (Class of Service) (PGM 141-Button 2)
SYSTEM
DISA COS (Class of Service) (PGM 166)
PABX Access Codes (PGM 172)
LD Call Digit Count (PGM 177-Button 4)
87
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
LD Digit Code (PGM 177-Button 19)
TABLES
Toll Restriction Tables (PGM 224)
Related Features

Day/Timed & Night Station COS (Class of Service)

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock

Walking COS (Class of Service)
Hardware
2.29.2
Day/Timed & Night Station COS (Class of Service)
Description
Each station, DISA line and Authorization code is assigned a COS (Class of Service) for two
modes: Day, which includes Timed, and Night service modes. The service mode is generally
controlled by the System Attendant or automatically and, based on the mode, appropriate dialing
privileges are established.
Operation
System
Dialing restrictions are automatically applied based on COS (Class of Service) assignments
Conditions
Programming
STATION
Station COS (Class of Service) (PGM 116)
CO/IP
CO Line COS (Class of Service) (PGM 141-Button 2)
SYSTEM
DISA COS (Class of Service) (PGM 166)
PABX Access Codes (PGM 172)
LD Call Digit Count (PGM 177-Button 4)
LD Digit Code (PGM 177-Button 19)
TABLES
Toll Restriction Tables (PGM 224)
Authorization Codes Table (PGM 227)
88
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Related Features

Authorization Codes (Password)

Class of Service

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock

Walking COS (Class of Service)

Auto Service Mode Control

Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
Hardware
2.29.3
Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock
Description
You or an Attendant can change the Station’s Class of Service to COS (Class of Service) 7,
temporarily preventing unauthorized outside calls from the station, i.e. “lock the station”. The
Station can still place internal calls and Emergency number calls.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate Temporary COS (Class of Service)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “21”, the Temp COS (Class of Service) code.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To restore the assigned COS (Class of Service)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “22”, the restore COS (Class of Service) code.
3. Dial Authorization Code (station number and code).
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
SLT
To activate Temporary COS (Class of Service)
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “21”, the Temp COS (Class of Service) code.
4. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
89
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
To restore the assigned COS (Class of Service)
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “22”, the restore COS (Class of Service) code.
4. Dial Authorization Code (station number and code).
5. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
System Attendant
To activate Temporary COS (Class of Service)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “021”, the Temp COS (Class of Service) code.
3. Dial the Station range. If only one Station is to be assigned Temp COS, dial the
Station number twice.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To restore the assigned COS (Class of Service)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “022”, the restore COS (Class of Service) code.
3. Dial the Station range. If only one Station is to be assigned Temp COS, dial that
Station number twice.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. When the COS of a Station is restored the Station COS (Class of Service) is changed
to the COS assigned for the active service mode, Day, Night, or Timed.
Programming
STATION
Station COS (Class of Service) (PGM 116)
CO/IP
CO Line COS (Class of Service) (PGM 141-Button 2)
SYSTEM
DISA COS (Class of Service) (PGM 166)
PABX Access Codes (PGM 172)
LD Call Digit Count (PGM 177-Button 4)
LD Digit Code (PGM 177-Button 19)
TABLES
Toll Restriction Tables (PGM 224)
Authorization Codes Table (PGM 227)
Related Features

Class of Service

Walking COS (Class of Service)
90
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual

Auto Service Mode Control

Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode

Authorization Codes (Password)
Issue 1.0
Hardware
2.29.4
Walking COS (Class of Service)
Description
You may temporarily override the toll restriction of a Station to make outside toll calls from a
normally toll restricted Station. You must input an Authorization Code in order to activate Walking
COS (Class of Service) and are subject to the assigned COS (Class of Service) of the
Authorization Code. The COS (Class of Service) associated with the Authorization Code is
applied for the next call.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate Walking COS (Class of Service)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “23”, the Walking COS (Class of Service) code.
3. Dial the Station number and Authorization code, “*” and System Authorization code
or “*”, the code index and System Authorization code.
4. Place your call as normal.
SLT
To activate Walking COS (Class of Service)
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “23”, the Walking COS (Class of Service) code.
4. Dial the Station number and Authorization code, “*” and System Authorization code
or “*”, the code index and System Authorization code.
5. Place your call as normal.
Conditions
1. The Station COS (Class of Service) applied for Walking COS (Class of Service) is the
COS (Class of Service) of the Station associated with the Authorization code or, for a
System Authorization code, COS1.
91
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2. Walking COS (Class of Service) applies the COS (Class of Service) for only one call.
Terminating the call returns the station to the assigned Station COS (Class of Service).
The user may reactivate Walking COS (Class of Service) to place another call or use
Flash to maintain the Walking COS (Class of Service).
3. Use of Authorization codes varies based on the Country Code assigned in the system
database. In some regions, particularly the US and UK, a System Authorization code
may be required for DISA access. Entering a Station code on a DISA line will fail in
these areas. In other regions, a System Authorization code can be used with Walking
COS (Class of Service).
Programming
STATION
Station COS (Class of Service) (PGM 116)
CO/IP
CO Line COS (Class of Service) (PGM 141-Button 2)
SYSTEM
DISA COS (Class of Service) (PGM 166)
PABX Access Codes (PGM 172)
LD Call Digit Count (PGM 177-Button 4)
LD Digit Code (PGM 177-Button 19)
TABLES
Toll Restriction Tables (PGM 224)
Authorization Codes Table (PGM 227)
Related Features

Class of Service

Auto Service Mode Control

Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode

Authorization Codes (Password)
Hardware
92
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.30
Issue 1.0
Differential Ring
Description
Differential Ring allows any one of 14 different audible Ring signals to be assigned to iPECS IP
and 15 Ring signals for the LDP Phones, allowing you to determine which phone is ringing and
the type of call (Intercom or external). When the phone receives an incoming call, the selected
ring signal is provided over the speaker. Different selections are assigned for Intercom and
outside calls.
Eight different tones are stored in the iPECS IP Phones. Four of these tones are permanent while
the other four are downloaded from the 10 ring-tones in the iPECS system. Note the system ringtones may be replaced with any eight (8) second *.wav file through the iPECS Web Maintenance.
In addition, each outside Line can be configured to provide one of twelve different ring tones so
that you can determine which outside Line is ringing.
Operation
iPECS IP Phones
To select the desired ring tone
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “1” for Ring Selection.
3. Dial “1” for Intercom or “2” for outside Line ring
4. Dial Ring Tone selection “1”-“8”, the ring tone is received.
To download a Ring tone from the system to an iPECS IP Phone
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 1 for Ring selection.
3. Dial 5 for Ring tone download.
4. Dial the Ring tone storage bin “5”-“8”.
5. Dial the Ring tone selection, “0”-“9”, the tone is received.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
LDP Phones
To select the desired ring tone
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “1” for Ring Selection.
3. Dial “1” for Intercom or “2” for outside Line ring
4. Dial Ring Tone selection “1”-“15”, the ring tone is received.
93
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Conditions
1. To employ one of the system Ring tones, it must first be downloaded to a Ring tone
storage bin in the iPECS IP.
2. The iPECS Phontage and UCS Client Soft phones do not have access to the system
Ring tones. In the iPECS Phontage or UCS Client phones multiple tones are available
and you may load an *.wav file for use as a Ring tone.
3. Any or all of the ten ring-tones stored in the system can be replaced via the iPECS
Web Maintenance.
4. In case of LDP phone, 15 Ring tones can be served from the memory in the phone.
Programming
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
94
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.31
Issue 1.0
DND (Do Not Disturb)
Description
You can activate DND for a phone to prevent incoming calls from ringing at the station. This can
be useful, for example, when you are in a meeting or busy. DND will also block page
announcements.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate DND
1. Press the [DND] button, the [DND] button LED illuminates.
To remove DND
1. Press the [DND] button, the [DND] button LED extinguishes.
SLT
To activate DND
1. Dial “553”, the DND feature code; stutter dial tone is received.
To remove DND
1. Dial “553”, the DND feature code, dial tone is received.
Conditions
1. A station will receive error tone if not allowed access to DND.
2. If DND is allowed, pressing the [DND] button while ringing will activate One-Time DND.
3. Only the Secretary of and Executive/Secretary Pair or an Attendant may override DND
at the Executive’s station.
4. An Attendant may cancel DND for other stations.
5. DND service is not available to Attendants.
6. Recalls for outside calls will override the DND feature.
7. A station in DND is out-of-service for all incoming calls including Station Group calls.
8. A station in DND is bypassed by calls forwarded to the Station. If the last Station in a
Call Forward chain is in DND, the call will ring to the previous Station in the chain.
9. When calling a Station in DND, an iPECS IP or LDP Phone display will indicate the
DND status.
Programming
STATION
DND (PGM 111-Button 3)
Related Features







Feature Cancel
Intrusion
Call Forward
DND Override
Executive/Secretary Forward
Station Groups
DND - One Time DND
Hardware
95
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.32
Issue 1.0
Door Open
Description
The iPECS hardware is equipped with relays that activate External Control Contacts. The
contacts can be assigned to one of several functions including a Door Open Contact. When used
as a Door Open Contact, the contact is connected to a door-lock release mechanism. When
assigned stations receive the Door Bell signal, the user may dial the Door Open code to activate
the contact.
iPECS IP and LDP Phones may be assigned a Flex button as a {DOOR OPEN} button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {DOOR OPEN} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Door Open code (“#*1” or “#*2”) + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate the relay contact
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial the Door Open code, “#*1”and “#*2”.
3. Hang-up to return to idle.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER].
2. Press the {DOOR OPEN} button.
3. Hang-up to return to idle.
Conditions
1. The eMG80 has two External Control Contacts, one each located on the
Miscellaneous connector of the KSU and EKSU.
2. The Door Open feature dial code is based on the assigned External Contact as below:
 External Contact 1 = “#*1”
 External Contact 2 = “#*2”
3. The contacts are rated at 1 amp, 24 VDC.
4. A station will receive error tone if not allowed access to the Door Open feature (PGM
113-Button 24-2)
Programming
SYSTEM
External Contact Control (PGM 168)
Door Open Timer (PGM 181-Button 5)
STATION
Door Open (PGM 113-Button 24-2)
Related Features

LBC (Loud Bell Control)
Hardware

External Control Contact connected to a door-lock release mechanism.
96
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.33
Issue 1.0
Emergency Call Caller-Location Support
Description
Emergency Call - Caller Location Support integrates the iPECS to a PBX ANI Link unit, such as
from Tone Commander, to provide Caller Id and location information to an emergency center.
When an Emergency call is placed from a Station, an assigned emergency outside Line is used
to connect the ANI Link unit. The iPECS sends the Station number, four (4) digits, to the unit as
DTMF digits. The ANI Link unit places a call to the emergency center over a connected CAMA
trunk. Caller Id and location information from the ANI Link unit database is sent to the emergency
center in the proper format and the Station is connected to the call.
This feature also provides a means to identify a Power Failure signal from the ANI Link unit.
Typically, an ANI Link unit will incorporate a normally open contact that closes when power to the
unit fails. If a Power Failure signal is detected, iPECS routes emergency calls via PSTN/ISDN
circuits other than those marked for emergency call use until the Power Fail signal is removed.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned
Programming
STATION
Emergency CO/Group (PGM 112-Button 18)
Proctor Monitor (PGM 113-Button 22)
CO/IP
Proctor On/Off (PGM 141-Button 12)
TABLES
Emergency Service Call Table (PGM 226)
Conditions
1. The system analog CO Lines connected to the ANI Link unit must be assigned to a
separate Line group and the individual Lines assigned for emergency service.
2. The ANI Link unit must be properly connected to an SLT port, an analog CO Line port
and on the same LAN as the system KSU LAN port.
3. The ANI Link unit must be properly installed and connected to a CAMA trunk from the
carrier service provider to send location information to the local emergency center.
4. It is the Customer’s responsibility to maintain the ANI Link unit number and location
database; there is no integration provided between the iPECS database and the ANI
Link unit.
5. The system must be programmed for a three or four digit Station Numbering Plan. The
system must send four digits to the ANI unit. When a three digit plan is used, a leading
“0” is automatically added to the Station number.
6. During a power failure, if the ANI Link unit Power Fail contacts, normally open, are
connected to a system SLT port, the iPECS will recognize the fault and emergency
calls are not sent to the ANI Link unit. In this situation, emergency calls are sent over
97
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
normal system PSTN/ISDN circuits and the station digits are not sent.
7. SMDR output will identify any call made via the Emergency call feature, including the
success or failure of such calls.
Related Features

Emergency Call

Emergency Call Attendant Alert
Hardware

Tone Commander PABX ANI Link unit or equal

CAMA Trunk

SLT port connected to ANI Link unit

Analog Line connected to ANI Link unit
98
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.34
Issue 1.0
Emergency Call
Description
Regardless of a Station’s dialing restrictions (Class of Service), the user may dial any assigned
Emergency numbers.
Operation
System
The system will automatically override any toll restrictions and process an assigned Emergency
number call.
Conditions
1. If there is no idle outside Line for the emergency call, a busy Line will be forced to
release the current call and used for emergency call.
2. An emergency call can be placed without a Line access code, except Australia. If an
emergency number conflicts with the Station Numbering Plan, emergency calls must
use a Line access code. For example, if the emergency number is “112” and the
Station Numbering Plan is 100~, you must dial a Line access code before dialing the
emergency number “112”.
Programming
STATION
Emergency CO Group (PGM 112-Button 18)
TABLES
Emergency Service Call Table (PGM 226)
Related Features
Hardware
99
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.35
Issue 1.0
Executive/Secretary Forward
Description
iPECS IP and LDP Phones can be assigned as Executive/Secretary pairs. By activating DND, the
Executive also activates Unconditional Call Forward to the Secretary, which will forward
Executive calls to the Secretary. With the “CO Call to Secretary” option enabled, all outside calls
to the Executive forward to the Secretary regardless of the Executive’s station status. In addition,
if the Secretary is in DND, Executive calls sent to the Secretary route back to the Executive if the
“Call Exec If Sec in DND” option is enabled.
Each Executive can be assigned a “Grade” (01, highest ~12, lowest). Executives with a higher
grade can call lower grade Executives overriding the Executive/Secretary forward.
With the “ICM Call to Secretary” option (PGM229-Button 5) enabled, all intercom calls to the
Executive (except for calls from higher or same grade executive) forward to the Secretary
regardless of the Executive’s station status.
Callers to an Executive in DND can leave a Message Wait indication. The message waiting
indication is given to the Executive or Secretary station based on the system database and User
Programming options.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate/deactivate Executive/Secretary Forward from the Executive
1. Press the [DND] button to toggle Executive/Secretary Forward.
Conditions
1. The eMG80 supports 36 Executive/Secretary pairs.
2. An Executive may have multiple Secretaries and a Secretary may have multiple
Executives. Each forms a separate Executive/Secretary pair.
3. If the Secretary is busy when a call is received for the Executive, the caller will receive
busy tone.
4. The Secretary may override the DND status of the Executive to Camp-On and transfer
calls to the Executive.
5. A chain can be constructed by assigning the Secretary of one pair as an Executive of
another. Although a chain may be constructed, a loop back is not allowed.
6. If an Executive has multiple Secretaries, calls will automatically route to the Executive’s
first idle Secretary.
7. The Executive may use Call Forward to send calls to stations other than the Secretary.
8. Messages are left at the Executive or Secretary based on assignment of “Left
Message Exec”. When enabled (On), messages are left at the Executive’s station.
9. The Executive Grade can be assigned only for Country Code “82”, Korea.
10. The Executive can call to another executive who is same Group in ADM 229 – B7 even
100
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
though they are different grade.
Programming
STATION
DND (PGM 111-Button 3)
Left Message Exec (PGM 113-Button 10)
TABLES
Executive/Secretary Pair (PGM 229-Button 1)
CO Call to Secretary (PGM 229-Button 2)
Call Exec If Secretary in DND (PGM 229-Button 3)
Exec Grade (PGM 229-Button 4)
ICM Call to Secretary (PGM 229-Button 5)
Secretary Auto Answer (PGM 229-Button 6)
Executive Group (PGM 229-Button 7)
Related Features

DND (Do Not Disturb)

Call Forward

Call Waiting/Camp-On

CLI Message Wait

Message Wait/Call Back

Call Transfer
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
101
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.36
Issue 1.0
External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
2.36.1
AA/VM Group
Description
The system provides support for an adjunct Auto Attendant/Voice Mail system via connection to
SLT ports. When a call arrives for the External AA/VM Group, the system will search the group for
an idle port and deliver the call.
Signaling information between the iPECS and external AA/VM system may be assigned for inband DTMF signaling or the SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface) signaling protocol over
the assigned iPECS system RS-232 port.
Operation
The system will interface with the External AA/VM based on database assignments.
Conditions
1. Selection of SMDI or in-band signaling can be configured using Virtual Dip Switch
settings (PGM 453-button 2).
2. Only one AA/VM Group (Internal or External) can be defined in the system. Multiple
definitions will cause erroneous system operation.
Programming
STATION GROUPS
Station Group Assignment (PGM 190)
Station Group Attributes (PGM 191)
TABLES
Voice Mail Dialing Table (PGM 234)
DIP SWITCH
Virtual Dip Switch (PGM 453-Button 2)
Related Features

In-band (DTMF) Signaling

SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface)

Auto Call Recording

Two-Way Record

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware

External AA/VM system
102
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.36.2
Issue 1.0
In-band (DTMF) AA/VM Signaling
Description
The system may employ in-band signaling to communicate with an External AA/VM system.
When a call is routed to the AA/VM SLT port, the system will send DTMF signals informing the
AA/VM of the characteristics of the call. DTMF digit strings are assigned to various functions
allowing the AA/VM to respond appropriately to the call. These definitions are entered in the
Voice Mail Dialing Table (PGM 234).
Operation
System
The system will interface with the External AA/VM based on database assignments.
Conditions
1. Selection of SMDI or in-band signaling can be configured using Virtual Dip Switch
settings (PGM 453-button 2).
2. Only one AA/VM Group (Internal or External) can be defined in the system. Multiple
definitions will cause erroneous system operation.
Programming
STATION GROUPS
Station Group Assignment (PGM 190)
Station Group Attributes (PGM 191)
TABLES
Voice Mail Dialing Table (PGM 234)
DIP SWITCH
Virtual Dip Switch (PGM 453-Button 2)
Related Features

AA/VM Group

SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface)

Auto Call Recording

Two-Way Record

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware

External AA/VM system
103
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.36.3
Issue 1.0
SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface) AA/VM Signaling
Description
The system may employ SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface) protocol to communicate
with an adjunct AA/VM system. When a call is routed to an AA/VM SLT port, the system will send
SMDI messages over the assigned SMDI RS-232 port, informing the AA/VM of the
characteristics of the call.
SMDI Protocol
There are three types of SMDI messages. Within each message is an “Action Code”, which
defines the function or required action of the AA/VM system. Fields within the messages also
define the called/calling station and station status. The various message types and definition of
the fields are shown in the chart below.
Type I message
cr lf MD ggg mmmm a xxxxxxxxx sp yyyyyyyyy sp cr lf^Y
Type II message
cr lf MD ggg mmmm a xxxxxxxxx sp sp cr lf^Y
Type III message
cr lf MD ggg mmmm a sp yyyyyyyyy sp cr lf^Y
Field
cr
lf
MD
ggg
mmmm
a
xxx...x
yy…y
sp
^Y
Description
carriage return
line feed
Message Desk
Message desk number, AA/VM system, default 001
Message Desk terminal, 0001-9999, VM port
action code
called station number or station calling the VM group
calling station number
ASCII space character
end of SMDI message, control + Y (0x19)
The following table provides detailed information on the meaning and function of the various
SMDI action codes.
Table 2.36.3-1 SMDI Messages
Action Code
Reason
Purpose
Message Type
SMDI Message
MD 001 0001-
Put Mail
II
A xxxxx yyyyy
A
Unconditional forward to VM
B
Called Station busy
Busy Mail
II
B xxxxx yyyyy
C
Disconnect, connected party
disconnect
II
C xxxxx yyyyy
D
Direct Fwd to VM group
Get Mail
II
D xxxxx yyyyy
104
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Table 2.36.3-1 SMDI Messages
Action Code
Reason
E
Error, invalid number
H
Two-way Record
I
DND
N
No Answer
R
Direct ring to VM group
Purpose
Message Type
SMDI Message
MD 001 0001-
Error
II
E xxxxx yyyyy
record
II
H xxxxx yyyyy
DND
II
I xxxxx yyyyy
No Answer
II
N xxxxx yyyyy
AA
III
R xxxxx yyyyy
Operation
System
The system will interface with the External AA/VM based on database assignments.
Conditions
1. Selection of SMDI or in-band signaling can be configured using Virtual Dip Switch
settings.
2. Only one AA/VM Group (Internal or External) can be defined in the system. Multiple
definitions will cause erroneous system operation.
Programming
STATION GROUPS
Station Group Assignment (PGM 190)
Station Group Attributes (PGM 191)
TABLES
Voice Mail Dialing Table (PGM 234)
DIP SWITCH
Virtual Dip Switch (PGM 453-Button 2)
Related Features

AA/VM Group

In-band (DTMF) Signaling

Auto Call Recording

Two-Way Record

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware

External AA/VM system
105
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.36.4
Issue 1.0
Voice Mailbox Translation
Description
Your Station can be assigned to employ a Voice Mailbox number that is different from your
Station number. When a call is routed to voice mail, your Mailbox number, which is assigned
separately from your Station number, is sent to the Voice Mail system. The Voice Mailbox number
can be any 4-digit number (“0001” to “9999”). An entry of 0000 or blank sends the Station number
to the VM system.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed.
Conditions
1. Voice Mailbox Translation applies to iPECS UMS and External In-band and SMDI
Voice mail systems.
Programming
STATION
Voice Mail Id (PGM 113-Button 14)
STATION GROUPS
Station Group Assignment (PGM 190)
Station Group Attributes (PGM 191)
TABLES
Voice Mail Dialing Table (PGM 234)
Related Features

AA/VM Group

SMDI (Simplified Message Desk Interface)

Two-Way Record

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
106
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.37
Issue 1.0
Flexible Numbering Plan
Description
Your access to the iPECS system resources and features is accomplished through feature codes
or Flexible buttons on your iPECS IP or LDP Phone. The Administrator selects from one of the
eight (8) different standard numbering plans and, if desired, assigns codes for individual functions
in the Flexible Numbering Plan. The feature codes are defined in the system’s Flexible
Numbering Plan; refer to the iPECS Admin and Programming Manual.
Operation
System
System implements feature activation based on the Flexible Numbering Plan.
Conditions
1. Feature codes can be one to three digits in length.
2. During programming, conflicts in the Numbering Plan are not allowed. The existing
non-conflicting Numbering Plan is used until correctly updated.
Programming
SYSTEM ID
System Id (PGM 100-Button 4)
NUMBERING
Flexible Station Numbering Plan (PGM 105)
Flexible Numbering Plan (PGM 106 – 109)
Related Features
Hardware
107
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.38
Issue 1.0
Forced Disconnect Intrusion
Description
You can force a busy outside Line or station to disconnect an active call, and connect to your
phone. Prior to connecting, the outside Line is returned to idle. When connecting to a station, the
station will receive a short warning tone.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
[TRANS/PGM] + [Flex button] + [TRANS/PGM] + [7#] + [HOLD/SAVE].
To activate forced Line disconnect feature:
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the busy Line button or dial a Line access code, you will receive busy tone.
3. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial “56#”, the Flexible Numbering Plan code.
4. The call on the busy Line is terminated, the connected station receives error tone
and you are connected to the Line.
To activate forced intrusion to a busy station feature:
1. Place an intercom call to the busy station and receive busy tone.
2. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial “56#”, the Flexible Numbering Plan code.
3. The call on the busy Station is terminated, the station receives warning tone and
you are connected to the station.
SLT
To activate forced Line disconnect feature:
1. Lift the handset
2. Dial a Line access code, you will receive busy tone.
3. Make a Hook Flash.
4. Dial “56#”, the Flexible Numbering Plan code.
5. The call on the busy Line is terminated, the connected station receives error tone
and you are connected to the Line.
Conditions
1. If the station was talking to other station or CO line, the call is disconnected when the
station receives forced Intrusion call.
2. A Forced Intrusion call is not possible to a station in DND state.
3. A Forced Intrusion call is not possible to an Attendant.
4. Any station with a Forced Intrusion button can activate this feature.
108
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Programming
Related Features
Hardware
2.39
Green Power Save
Description
The system can disable the power to LDP Phones and SLTs (Single Line Telephone) connected
to the system at pre-determined times such as at night or during holidays when no one will be
using the phones. In addition the automatic control, power to the phones can be manually
controlled from the Web Admin.
Operation
Operation of this feature is either automatic when programmed, or by Web Admin.
Conditions
1. When power is removed from an LDP Phone or SLT, the phone cannot place or
receive calls.
2. In the event of a system reset while the Green Power mode is active, after the reset,
the Green Power mode is disabled. If in the automatic mode, the Green Power mode
will reactivate when the activation time is reached.
3. Station ports 1 and 2 are not affected by the Green Power mode and these ports will
continue to operate normally to receive and place calls.
Programming
Green mode
Green Mode Activation (PGM 500)
Green Mode Time (PGM 501)
Related Features
Hardware
109
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.40
Issue 1.0
Headset Compatibility
Description
You can use an industry standard headset with iPECS IP and LDP Phones in place of or in
addition to the handset. The station is programmed for Headset operation.
In the Headset mode, pressing the [SPEAKER] button will send audio to the Headset instead of
the speakerphone. In addition, when in the Headset mode, ring signals can be delivered to the
speaker or the headset as defined in the system database.
As an iPECS IP or LDP Phone users, you may assign a Flex button to select Headset or
Speakerphone operation. The {HEADSET SELECT} button may be used to toggle the operation
of the phone between Headset and Speakerphone.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button for {HEADSET SELECT}
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “61” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To change operation from Speakerphone to Headset
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “61”, the Headset select code.
3. Dial “0” to select Headset, “1” to select Speakerphone.
Or,
4. Press the {HEADSET SELECT} button.
To change the device to receive ring signals
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “62”, the Ring select code.
3. Dial “1” for Speaker, “2” for Headset or “3” for both.
To place/answer calls using the headset
1. Press the [SPEAKER] button with the phone in Headset mode.
Conditions
1. The Intercom Signaling Mode can be set in the Headset mode as with the
Speakerphone mode.
2. The station always receives Page announcements over the speaker of iPECS IP and
LDP Phones.
3. Although the phone is in the Headset mode, the system will monitor the hook-switch
status. If the user lifts the handset to go off-hook, audio is delivered to the handset.
4. If you are using a LIP-8012D, 8024D or 8040L phone in the Headset mode, the
{SPEAKER} Soft button is available during an active call. You can switch to the
110
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
speakerphone for the duration of the active conversation. If you take further action,
such as pressing another feature or {LINE} button, the mode switches back to Headset.
Programming
STATION
/Headset Ring Mode (PGM 111-Button 8)
Speakerphone/Headset (PGM 111-Button 9)
Related Features

Speakerphone

Paging
Hardware
111
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.41
Issue 1.0
Hold
2.41.1
Automatic Hold
Description
While on an active outside call, the system will place the call on hold automatically if you press
the [FLASH], [CONF], {DSS/BLF} or other feature buttons. In addition, your station can be
programmed to support Line to Line Automatic Hold. In this case, pressing an outside Line button
while on an outside call will place the active call on hold and access the selected Line.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To use Automatic Hold while on an active outside call
1. Press the desired feature button or {LINE}; the active call is placed in the Preferred
Hold state.
Conditions
1. Outside Lines placed on hold with Automatic Hold are placed in the assigned Preferred
Hold.
2. There is no limit on the number of calls that can be placed on hold using Automatic
Hold.
Programming
STATION
Automatic Hold (PGM 112-Button 2)
SYSTEM
Hold Preference (PGM 160-Button 7)
Related Features

Hold Preference

Hold Recall
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
112
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.41.2
Issue 1.0
Hold Preference
Description
Hold Preference defines either Exclusive Hold or System Hold as the preferred hold state, which
is activated on the first depression of the [HOLD/SAVE] button. Pressing the [HOLD/SAVE]
button twice in succession, places the call in the non-preferred hold state. The selection of the
preferred hold state is the assigned Hold Preference in the system database.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate the Preferred Hold while on a call
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, the connected party is placed in the preferred hold
state.
2. Press the button a second time for non-preferred hold.
Conditions
1. A transferred call is placed in the Exclusive hold state at the receiving station
regardless of the assigned Hold Preference.
2. Hold Preference is not available to an SLT.
Programming
SYSTEM
Hold Preference (PGM 160-Button 7)
Related Features

Call Transfer, Outside Line

Exclusive Hold

System Hold
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
113
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.41.3
Issue 1.0
Hold Recall
Description
When you place an outside call on hold, a hold timer is activated. If the timer expires, the held call
will recall your station for the I-Hold Recall time. If the call remains unanswered, the Attendant
also receives recall for the Attendant Recall time and, if the call is on Exclusive hold, the call is
placed on System Hold. If still unanswered after the Attendant Recall time, the call is
disconnected and the appropriate circuits returned to idle.
Operation
Hold Recall operation is automatic
Conditions
1. Separate timers are assigned for the various types of hold: System, Exclusive,
Transfer, Call Park, etc.
2. If the I-Hold timer is set to zero, the station will not receive recall. If the Attendant
Recall timer is set to zero, the Attendant will not receive recall.
3. If the specific Hold timer is set to zero, recall is disabled.
4. In case of Private Lines, recall ring is served to only the station that held the call and
will recall until answered or abandoned.
Programming
SYSTEM
Hold Preference (PGM 160-Button 7)
Attendant Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 1)
Exclusive Hold Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 4)
I-Hold Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 5)
System Hold Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 6)
Transfer Hold Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 7)
Related Features

Call Transfer, Line

Exclusive Hold

System Hold
Hardware
114
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.41.4
Issue 1.0
Exclusive Hold
Description
Outside lines may be placed in a waiting state such that other stations in the system are unable to
access the line. Only the station placing the line on Exclusive hold can access the held line.
If the call remains on hold at expiration of the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer, normal Hold Recall
will apply.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To place a call on Exclusive Hold
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button twice.
To access a call on Exclusive Hold from the holding station
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the held line button.
Or,
3. Dial “8#”, the Held Call Access code.
4. Dial the line number.
SLT
To place a call on Exclusive Hold
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
To access a call on Exclusive Hold from the holding SLT
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “8#”, the Held Call Access code.
3. Dial the line number.
Conditions
1. When an outside line is placed on Exclusive Hold, the button LED will flash at 120 ipm
at the holding station and will be On at all other stations.
2. All Transferred outside calls are placed on Exclusive Hold for the receiving station.
3. The LED of {LOOP} and {POOL} buttons will display the active outside line status.
Programming
SYSTEM
Hold Preference (PGM 160-Button 7)
Attendant Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 1)
Exclusive Hold Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 4)
115
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
I-Hold Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 5)
Transfer Hold Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 7)
Related Features

Call Transfer, Line

Hold Preference

Hold Recall

System Hold
Hardware
2.41.5
System Hold
Description
Outside Lines may be placed in a waiting state such that other stations in the system are able to
access the Line. Stations must have access to the Line in the system database to access the
held call.
If the call remains on hold at expiration of the System Hold Recall Timer, normal Hold Recall will
apply.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To place a call on System Hold
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To access a call from System Hold
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the line button.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “8#”, the Held Call Access code.
3. Dial the line number.
SLT
116
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
To place a call on Exclusive Hold
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial “560”, the System Hold feature code.
To access a call from System Hold
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “8#”, the Held Call Access code.
3. Dial the line number.
Conditions
1. When an outside Line is placed on System Hold, the button LED will flash at 30 ipm
and wink at the holding station and will flash at all other stations.
2. A call on System Hold can be retrieved from any station allowed access to the Line in
the system database using the Line button or the Held Call access code.
3. The LED of {LOOP} and {POOL} buttons will display the active outside Line status.
Programming
SYSTEM
Hold Preference (PGM 160-Button 7)
Attendant Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 1)
I-Hold Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 5)
System Hold Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 6)
Related Features

Call Transfer, Outside Line

Hold Preference

Hold Recall

Exclusive Hold
Hardware
117
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.42
Issue 1.0
Hot Desk
Description
The iPECS IP and LDP Phones can be assigned as Hot Desk phones allowing users (Agents) to
login with the iPECS. The Hot Desk will become active and will take on the attributes defined for
the Agent’s Station number. When the Agent logs off, the Hot Desk phone becomes inactive and
the Agent’s calls are forward to the user-entered destination. A different Agent may then login
through the inactive Hot Desk phone.
Operation
iPECS IP Phones
To login through an inactive Hot Desk;
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button,
2. Dial “*0”,
3. Dial the Agent’s Station number and authorization code, Agent is logged in.
To logout through the active Hot Desk;
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button,
2. Dial “* *” or press the {AGENT LOGOUT} Flex button,
3. Use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons to select the call forward destination for
Agent calls (speed dial, joined mobile phone, Internal or External VM group).
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. Hot desk can be used only for IP phone in eMG80 system
2. An active (logged in) Agent can login to another inactive Hot Desk. However, this will
log the Agent off the previously active Hot Desk.
3. A user may only logout from the Agent’s active Hot Desk phone. Attempting to logout
using a different Hot Desk phone will return error tone.
4. The Flex button map of the Hot Desk station is fixed and does not take on the
configuration associated with the Agent’s station.
5. When logged off, the Agent’s active database, including the following items, are saved.
 Station Number
 Station Attributes, PGM 111~124
 CO Routing, Ring assignments, DID routing, etc.
 Voice Mail
 Station Group assignment
6. The number of Hot Desk phones and Hot Desk users is limited to the system capacity.
Each Hot Desk phone and Hot Desk user (Agent) requires a separate station channel
in the system.
118
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
7. To identify the station number, only Station Authorization codes may be used for Hot
Desk login.
8. An ACD Agent must use the Agent Login procedure as defined under the ACD feature
description.
Programming
STATION
Hot Desk Station (PGM 112-Button 13)
TABLES
Hot Desk Attributes (PGM 250-Button 1~3)
Auto Logout Timer (PGM 250-Button 3)
Related Features

Station Groups

Automatic Call Distribution

Call Forward
Hardware

iPECS IP Phone
119
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.43
Issue 1.0
ICLID Call Routing
Description
The system can employ ICLID (Incoming Calling Line Id) to determine the routing of incoming
external calls. Each outside Line, including DID Lines, may be assigned to employ ICLID routing.
The system will compare the received ICLID to entries in the ICLID Routing Table and, if a match
is found, will route the call to the destination defined in the ICLID Ring Assignment Table.
Destinations can be System announcement, integrated or external Voice Mail, a station or a
station group.
An ACD group may be assigned to route calls employing the ICLID Tables. When configured,
ACD calls re-route based on the “Caller Entered ICLID”.
Operation
System
System implements routing automatically based on database entries and the received ICLID.
Conditions
1. If the received ICLID does not match an entry in the ICLID Route Table, the call is
routed based on the type and other programming (Ring assignments, etc.) for Line.
2. For analog CO Lines, the system will await receipt of valid ICLID for the ICLID Ring
Timer. At expiration of the timer, if ICLID is not received, the call is routed based on the
type and other programming (Ring assignments, etc.).
3. The ICLID received from the Line must be a telephone number to match an ICLID
Route Table entry.
4. If ICLID routing is enabled for a DID Line, DID Call Wait is disabled.
Programming
CO/IP
ICLID Ring Timer (PGM 142-Button 14)
ISDN/ICLID
ICLID Route Table Attributes (PGM 203)
ICLID Ring Assignment Table (PGM 204)
STATION GROUPS
ACD ICLID Use (PGM 191-Button 21)
TABLES
Flexible DID conversion (PGM 231)
Related Features

Outside Line Ring Assignment

Automatic Call Distribution

Direct Inward Dial (DID)
Hardware
120
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.44
Issue 1.0
In-Room Indication
Description
As an In-Room Supervisor, you can notify other station users that you are in the room and the
phone is idle using a Flexible button on your phone. Activating the In-Room indicator illuminates
the LED of the In-Room Indicator button assigned to the other stations. This feature is often used
in small call centers or where the Supervisor’s office is not visible by the supervised employees.
Up to ten (10) In-Room Supervisors can be assigned with up to twenty notified stations for each
Supervisor.
You may assign a Flex button for In-Room indication however; the In-Room Supervisor can only
be assigned in the system database.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign an “In-Room Indication button”
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “9*” + In-Rom Bin No (01~10) +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To Active or Deactivate the In-Room Indication from the Supervisor phone while idle,
1. Press the In-Room button.
2. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The In-Room Indication button operates only while the Supervisor’s phone is idle.
2. If the In-Room button on a station other than the Supervisor’s is pressed, error tone is
heard.
3. The Supervisor must press the [HOLD/SAVE] button within 5 seconds of pressing the
In-Room button to activate the indication otherwise; the station goes back to the idle
state.
Programming
SYSTEM
In-Room Indication (PGM 183)
Related Features
Hardware
121
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.45
2.45.1
Issue 1.0
Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Integrated AA/VM Overview
Description
The integrated AA/VM application is provided through the Voice Store and Forward (VSF)
Gateway incorporated in the KSU main board and includes an application processor, four (4)
access channels and 1 hour of storage. The storage can be increased to 16 hours with the
addition of the Memory Expansion Unit.
The memory is employed to store System announcements, Voice mail (greetings and messages),
and various system prompts. The system prompts (time, date, etc.) are employed by the Auto
Attendant and Voice Mail applications as well as other system features.
A second separate Gateway with four (4) access channels and 15 hours of storage is available
for the eMG80.
Operation
System
Operation of the integrated AA/VM is automatic based on configuration.
Conditions
Programming
Related Features










Station Groups
Automatic Call Distribution
Delayed Auto Attendant
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward Dial (DID)
Remote Message Retrieval
Multiple Language Support
MOH (Music-On-Hold)
Integrated Auto Attendant
Integrated Voice Mail
Hardware

eMG80 MEMU, AA/VM 15 hour Memory Expansion Unit

EMG80 VVMU, 2nd VSF Gateway
122
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.45.2
Issue 1.0
Integrated Auto Attendant
Description
When an outside call is received, on a DID or DISA line, the call may be routed directly to one of
70 user recorded System Announcements to function as an Auto Attendant announcement. Each
System announcement has a corresponding CCR (Caller Controlled Routing) Table. As an Auto
Attendant, the announcement instructs the caller to dial a digit for a specific route (“for sales dial
2”). The CCR Table defines the routing for each digit the caller may dial. The routing may be a:
 Station
 Station group
 Speed Dial number
 Page Zone
 Voice Mail
 System Announcement
In addition, the system will monitor digits for a station number. If the user dials a station number,
the Auto Attendant will complete an unsupervised call transfer to the station.
Operation
System Attendant
To record an Auto Attendant Announcement
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the Announcement number (01-70).
5. With Multi Language support, enter the Language number (1~6), the current
announcement is played followed by the “Press # to record” prompt.
6. Dial “#”.
7. After the beep-tone, record message.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to stop recording and save the message.
To delete a recording
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the Announcement number (01-70).
5. With Multi Language support, enter the language number (1~6), the current
announcement is played followed by the “Press # to record” prompt.
6. Dial “#”.
7. Press the [SPEED] button during playback to erase message.
123
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
System
Operation of the CCR Audio Text Tables and Auto Attendant are automatic.
Conditions
1. There are no individual time limits on an Auto Attendant announcement.
2. The external caller may experience ring-back tone before the system answers and play
the System announcement.
3. The System Attendant must “Save” a recording before returning to the on-hook state,
otherwise, the existing recording is used.
4. To record or delete an Auto Attendant message, all of the AA/VM channels must be in
the idle state.
5. The external caller may dial at any time during an Auto Attendant announcement and
must dial prior to the expiration of the CCR Analysis timer.
6. If the external caller dials an invalid selection or station, the system will play the “Invalid
Entry” prompt and allow re-entry. The DISA Retry Counter determines the number of
times the caller may retry entries.
7. If the external caller dials more than a single digit, the call is routed based on the
Station Numbering Plan.
8. Calls answered by an Auto Attendant (CCR) Announcement are interactive DISA calls
and are subject to conditions of a DISA call.
9. The “*” digit is reserved in the Audio/Text Tables to repeat the current or previous Auto
Attendant announcement.
10. The “#” digit is reserved for callers to access their Voice Mailbox remotely.
11. A CCR Announcement may be programmed to disconnect after playing.
12. The Auto Attendant Announcement feature is supported for DISA and DID calls.
13. With the optional second Voice Store Forward Gateway, System announcement
should be recorded in both the main and second gateway. Also, each station and
Line Voice Mailbox should be associated with one of the gateways.
Programming
STATION
VSF Access (PGM 113-Button 2)
CO/IP
CO/IP Ring Assignment (PGM 144)
DID Service Attributes (PGM 145)
STATION GROUPS
Station Groups (PGM 190)
Station Group Attributes (PGM 191)
SYSTEM
DISA Retry Counter (PGM 160-Button 5)
DID/DISA Destination (PGM 167)
CCR Inter-digit Timer (PGM 180-Button 13)
VSF User Record Timer (PGM 181-Button 3)
VSF Valid User Message Timer (PGM 181-Button 4)
TABLES
Customer Call Routing Tables (PGM 228)
Flexible DID Conversion Table (PGM 231)
124
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Related Features

Station Groups

Automatic Call Distribution

Delayed Auto Attendant

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Direct Inward Dial (DID)

Remote Message Retrieval

Multiple Language Support

MOH (Music-On-Hold)
Hardware
2.45.2.1 Company Directory
Description
The integrated AA incorporates a Company Directory. A caller that reaches a configured CCR or
Flexible DID Table can select to Dial-by-Name and will be prompted to spell the last three
characters of the desired station user name using the dial pad. If the entry matches a Name in the
database, the call is transferred to the station. If multiple matches exist, the system plays the
name greeting for the first nine (9) matches and the caller can select the appropriate station to
receive the call. If no matches exist the caller is prompted to reenter the name (three characters).
The caller may retry the name entry based on the DISA Retry counter.
To be included in the directory, you must record a “Name Greeting” and your first and last name
must be assigned in the system database.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To record a Company Directory Name
1. Dial the “563”, the Company Directory Name record code.
2. Dial “1” to record your Name.
3. After recording prompt, say your name.
To delete Company Directory Name
1. Dial the [Record VM Subscriber Name] flexible number.
2. Dial 2 to delete the Name recording
125
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
SLT
To record a Company Directory Name
1. Dial “563” the Company Directory Name record code flexible number.
2. Dial 1, to record your Name.
3. After the recording prompt, say your Name.
To delete Company Directory Name
1. Dial “563”, the Company Directory Name record code.
2. Dial 2 to delete the Name recording
To use Company Directory Feature
1. In response to the system announcement, the caller dials the Company Directory
index.
2. The system plays the First/Last name selection prompt
3. The caller selects first or last name entry
4. The system plays the enter 3-character prompt
5. The caller dials the first three characters of the desired station user.
6. The System plays Name Greeting for each match (maximum 9).
7. If there is a single match, the called is transferred. If multiple matches exist, the
system plays prompts for each with a selection digits below:
8. “for [subscriber name], press 1”
“for [subscriber name], press 2”
…
“for [subscriber name], press 9”
9. When the caller enters the desired digit, the system routes the caller to that station
Conditions
1. To be searched in company directory, the Station user name must be recorded and the
first and last name also must be programmed properly.
Programming
STATION
VSF Access (PGM 113-Button 2)
Company Directory First Name (PGM 127-Button 5)
Company Directory Last Name (PGM 127-Button 6)
Related Features

CCR

Integrated Auto Attendant
Hardware
126
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.2.2 Remote Announcement Recording
Description
An outside caller can be allowed to record a System announcement. This capability is often used
in schools or other organizations to allow remote recording of school closing. The administrator
calls the Auto Attendant and dials the digit assigned for remote recording in the CCR Table.
Note that this should not be included in the Auto Attendant announcement for security purposes.
The administrator enters the System Attendant password then can record any System
announcement desired as shown in the Operation section.
Operation
To remote record a System Announcement.
1. Call the number for the Auto Attendant.
2. During the announcement dial the digit assigned in the CCR Table for Remote
Recording.
3. In response to the system prompt enter the Attendant’s password.
4. In response to the system prompt, enter the System announcement number (001072).
5. When prompted enter the Language type (1-6).
6. The system prompts “to record a new greeting, press pound” followed by any
existing recording for the announcement and Language.
7. Press ‘#’ and after the beep tone, start recording the new announcement.
8. Press ‘#’ to complete and store the new recording, the system returns to step 5 so
you can select another announcement to record. Conditions.
Conditions
Programming
TABLES
Customer Call Routing Tables (PGM 228)
Flexible DID Conversion Table (PGM 231
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant

Attendant
Hardware
127
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.45.3
Issue 1.0
Integrated Voice Mail
2.45.3.1 Administrator Mailbox
Description
A Mailbox may be assigned as an Administrator to allow access to other mailboxes and the
administration menu to add, delete, or reset a mailbox password to default (station number). The
administrator can record a Greeting and a Name for a mailbox and record and send a broadcast
message to all mailboxes.
When you access an Administrative Mailbox the prompt “to access administrative options, press
six” is added to the main VM prompt.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To access the Administrative Mailbox menu:
From a Station with an Administrative Mailbox
1. Call the integrated Voice Mail and enter the password.
2. Dial 6 to hear the Administrator menu.
3. Dial the desired option digit and follow the prompts to make the settings as below.
Administrator Mailbox Menus
− To add a mailbox, press 1
− To delete a mailbox, press 2
− To reset a mailbox password, press 3
− To record a mailbox greeting, press 4
− To record a broadcast message, press 5
− To record a mailbox name, press 6
Conditions
1. There are no limits on the number of mailboxes that can be marked as administrators.
2. The broadcast message is sent to all mailboxes in the same tenancy group and is
always retrieved first regardless message retrieve option.
3. A station can delete broadcast message without confirming receipt.
4. Only administrator can remove a recorded broadcast message.
Programming
TABLES
Customer Call Routing Tables (PGM 228)
Flexible DID Conversion Table (PGM 231)
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/ Voice Mail
Hardware
128
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.2 Announce Only Mailbox
Description
A mailbox can be configured to provide an announcement only and not provide incoming
message storage. After the announcement is played, the call is disconnected or returned to the
previous announcement.
Operation
Operation of an Announce Only Mailbox is automatic once configured
Conditions
1. There is no limit to the number of mailboxes that can be assigned as Announce only.
Programming
Station
Announce Only Mailbox (PGM 127-button 3)
Announce Only Option (PGM 127-button 4)
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/ Voice Mail
Hardware
129
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.3 Call Forward from VM
Description
If you are at a remote location, you can activate or deactivate Unconditional Call Forward from
the integrated Voice Mail. Pressing “7” at the main VM menu will return the "Mailbox Set Forward"
prompt.
Operation
To activate Call Forward while in the VM;
1. Press “7”, for Mailbox set forward, the “Mailbox Set Forward” prompt is received.
2. Dial “1” and receive the “Forward” prompt (“Please enter the number to forward
to ...").
3. Dial Station Number as follows:
− To forward to another station, dial the station number.
− To forward calls Off net, dial “*” and enter station speed number. If the station
Speed bin is valid, confirmation announcement “forwarded to station (‘xxx’)” or
“forwarded to speed bin number (yyyy)” is played.
To deactivate Call Forward
1. Press “7”, for Mailbox set forward, the “Mail Box Set Forward” prompt is received.
2. Dial “2” and receive the “Station forwarding is canceled” prompt.
To return to the Main menu
1. Dial “9” and receive the “Mailbox Settings” prompt.
Conditions
1. Remote user dialing is subject to the inter-digit timer. If you do not input a response to
the VM prompts in the inter-digit time, the call is released.
2. The ability to activate Unconditional Call Forward from your Mailbox is only available
when the Mailbox is accessed from a remote location.
Programming
Related Features

Message Storage

Message Retrieval

Remote Message Retrieval

Message Retrieval Options
Hardware
130
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.4 Distribution Lists
Description
In your Voice Mailbox you can create a distribution list that will allow you to record and send or
forward messages to all of the Mailboxes in the list. You can create five (5) different Distribution
Lists with up to 25 Mailboxes in each list.
Operation
To create a Distribution List
1. At the main Voice Mail prompt dial 5 for Personal Options and follow the voice
instructions to create your list.
Conditions
1. The maximum number of distribution lists you can create is five (5) and up to 25
mailboxes can be assigned in a distribution list.
Programming
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Send a Message

Distribution Lists
Hardware
131
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.5 E-Mail Notification
Description
When the system stores a new voice message, it will check the notification settings for your
mailbox. If E-mail notification is configured, the system will send you an E-mail notification. If
configured, the voice message is attached as an *.wav file and the message may be erased from
the mailbox since a copy has been delivered via e-mail.
Operation
System
System automatically sends e-mail to notify you of new voice message.
Conditions
1. The E-mail is sent to the address assigned for the station with the “sender” address
defined for the System. Note the latter is required, as many E-mail servers will reject
anonymous e-mails.
2. The E-mail address for the System and the station are defined under the Web Admin.
3. To attach the Voice message to the E-mail notification, the Attach Message option
(PGM 111 – Button 24) must enabled.
4. The “Sender E-Mail information (system E-mail account) is assigned in both the Station
and System Data areas. If both are assigned, the Station assignment is used.
Programming
STATION
VSF MESSAGE – SMTP Mail Server Address (PGM113 – Button 18)
VSF MESSAGE – Receiver Mail Address (PGM113 – Button 19)
VSF MESSAGE – SMTP Mail Server ID (PGM113 – Button 23)
VSF MESSAGE – SMTP Mail Server P/W(PGM113 – Button24-1)
VSF MESSAGE – Add Message
VSF MESSAGE – Delete Message After Add (PGM113 – Button24-5)
VSF MESSAGE – SMTP Security (PGM113 – Button24-12)
VSF MESSAGE – SMTP Port (PGM113 – Button24-13)
VSF MESSAGE – Sender Mail Address (PGM113 – Button24-14)
BOARD
VSF Sender Mail Address (PGM 132-Button 6)
SYSTEM
VSF SMTP Port (PGM113 – Button24-13)
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
132
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.6 Mark a Message as Private
Description
When you send or reply a message, you can mark the message as Private so that the receiver
cannot forward the message.
Operation
To mark a message as private,
1. After identifying the receiver, you will receive the send message options prompt
“For regular delivery, press 1. To mark urgent, press 2. To mark private, press 3. To
mark urgent and private, press 4. To request delivery receipt of the message for future,
press 5.”
2. Dial “3” or “4” for Urgent and Private, the message is sent as a private message and
you receive the “Your message has been sent”.
Conditions
1. You must be permitted to mark a message as Private as part of the VM COS
Programming
SYSTEM
VM COS Attributes (PGM 253)
Related Features

Send a Message

Distribution Lists
Hardware
133
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.7 Mark a Message for Delivery Confirmation
Description
You can mark a message so that when the receiver listens to the message you are notified with a
confirmation Voice message.
Operation
To mark a message for Delivery Confirmation,
1. After identifying the receiver, you will receive the send message options prompt
“For regular delivery, press 1 to mark urgent, press 2 to mark private, press 3 to mark
urgent and private, press 4 to request delivery receipt of the message for future, press
5.”
2. Dial “5”, the message is sent
3. After the receiver listens to the message you receive a confirming Voice message
with the Mailbox number that received the message and the time the message was
received (listened to).
Conditions
1. You must be permitted to mark a message for Delivery Confirmation as part of the VM
COS.
Programming
SYSTEM
VM COS Attributes (PGM 253)
Related Features

Send a Message
Hardware
134
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.8 Message Cascade
Description
Message cascading copies messages left for the originating mailbox to another mailbox. Once
the message is copied into the other mailbox, notification events can take place based on setting
for that mailbox settings. This is useful to differentiate the notification for Urgent messages.
Your Mailbox can be cascade based on one of the following selections.

Disable - Disable this function.

Copy-Immediately – Copy (Cascading) begins immediately, allowing storage of
duplicate messages in several mailboxes.

Copy-Urgent Only – Copy (Cascades) only those messages marked urgent.

Move-Immediately – Move (Cascading) begins immediately, allowing storage of
duplicate messages in several mailboxes.

Move-Urgent Only – Move (Cascades) only those messages marked urgent.
Operation
Operation of a Cascade Mailbox is automatic once configured
Conditions
1. A mailbox can only have 1 cascade mailbox destination.
2. Mailbox messages are retained in each mailbox.
Programming
Station
Cascade Mailbox (PGM 127-button 7)
Cascade Type (PGM 127-button 8)
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
135
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.9 Message Retrieval
Description
You can access your Mail Box locally by placing a call to the integrated Voice Mail group or, from
an iPECS IP or LDP Phone, by pressing the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button, or by pressing a
{VMAILBOX} button, if assigned to the phone.
Prompts are then received to guide you in the Voice Mailbox operation. You must enter a Mailbox
number, generally the station number, and a corresponding password in response to the
“Request for Mailbox number” (“Please enter your Mailbox number.”) and “Request for Password”
(“Please enter your password code.”) prompts.
If you enter valid and matching Mailbox and password numbers, the “Number of Messages"
prompt (“You have xx new messages. You have yy saved messages.”) is received. At this point,
you also receives the “VM long option prompt” (“To play new messages, press one, to play
saved messages, press two, to set greeting or password, press eight, to disconnect, press
pound, Press 0 for the operator, Press nine to hear this message again.”).
When you respond by dialing 1, the first new message is played. At the end of message
playback, the “New Message option” prompt (“To replay message, press one, to listen to the
next message, press two, to delete message, press three, to forward message, press four, to
call the sender, press five, to skip message, press six, to return to main menu, press nine.”) is
played. This process is repeated until the last new message is played and the "No Message"
prompt (“No Messages”) is played.
When you dial 2 in response to the “Number of Messages” prompt, the oldest saved message
is played. At the end of the message, the “Old Message option” prompt (“To replay message,
press one, to listen to the next message, press two, to delete message, press three, to forward
message, press four, to call the sender, press five, to return to main menu, press nine.”) is
played. This process is repeated until the last saved message is played and the "No Message”
prompt (“No Messages”) is played.
In addition to the options indicated in the prompt, you can record a memo, which is attached to
the current voice mail by dialing the digit 7. The current voice mail and memo can then be
forwarded to other iPECS users.
When you dial 9 in response to the “Number of Messages” prompt or during or at the end of a
message the “VM long Options” prompt is played.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {VMAILBOX} Flex button;
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + VM group + Mail-box (station) number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To retrieve Voice Mail locally
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button. The message contents summary is shown
136
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
as below.
ST CL VS VM FS MS
001 001 005 006 001 004
3. Dial digit “3” to select the integrated VM Messages to receive the “Mail Box &
Password” prompts sequentially.
4. Dial the Mail Box and corresponding password to receive the “Number of Messages”
prompt.
5. Dial desired option code.
6. At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press {VMAILBOX} button.
3. Dial the Mailbox password to receive the “Number of Messages” prompt.
4. Dial desired option code.
5. At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To attach a memo to the current voice message;
1. During or after the New or Old Message option prompt, dial “7”.
2. At the beep, record the memo.
3. Dial “*” to stop recording and store the memo.
4. During or after the New/Old option prompt, dial 4 to forward the message and memo.
SLT
To retrieve Voice Mail locally
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the Voice Mail Group to receive the Mailbox number and Password prompts.
3. Dial the Mailbox and corresponding password to receive the “Number of Messages”
prompt.
4. Dial desired option code.
5. At completion of session, hang-up to return to idle.
To attach a memo to the current voice message;
1. During or after the New or Old Message option prompt, dial “7”.
2. At the beep, record the memo.
3. Dial * to stop and store the memo.
4. During or after the New Old option prompt, dial “4” to forward the message and
memo.
Conditions
1. If no new/old messages are available, pressing “1” or “2”, is an invalid operation and
you will receive the “Invalid Entry” prompt or “No Message” prompt.
137
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2. If the dialed number is not recognized, the "Invalid Entry" prompt is played. After the
second invalid entry, you are disconnected.
3. You may dial digits at any time during a voice mail playback, system prompt or silence.
You must dial a digit in response to a system prompt within the CCR Analysis timer or
the system will disconnect and return error tone.
4. Messages can be retrieved in either a FIFO (First in First out) or LIFO (Last in First out)
order to meet the desire of each user.
5. If your Mailbox is configured with Auto Save New Message, after listening to the
message, the message is stored and you must be expressly delete the message. To
minimize the potential for large amounts of unwanted stored messages, Auto Save
New message can be disabled then the message is deleted if not expressly saved.
Programming
STATION
Retrieve Message Order (PGM 113-Button 13)
Auto save new message (PGM 161-Button 24-11)
Related Features

Message Retrieval Options

Remote Message Retrieval

Multiple Voice Mailbox Support
Hardware
2.45.3.10 Message Retrieval Options
Description
You may dial the digit 9 to receive the “VM long Options” prompt while in the Voice Mailbox,
including during or after a voice message or system prompt except when an option has been
selected that requires user dialing. The later may occur when you selects Message Retrieval
Option 1/2 (Play New/Saved Message), 7 (Cancel or Forward message, for Remote Access Only)
or 8 (Mail Box settings). The “VM long Options” prompt is:
"To play new messages, press one, to play saved messages, press two, to set station forwarding,
press seven (This option is available only for remote access), to set greeting or password, press
eight, to disconnect, press pound, Press 0 for the operator, Press nine to hear this message
again."
The integrated Voice Mail will respond to incoming digits as shown in the following table.
Station VM Feature Usage : Off
138
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Digit
Function
1
Play New message
2
Play Saved message
7
Set Cancel/Fwd, available only for remote access
8
Mailbox Setting, "Mailbox Settings" prompt
9
VM Long options
#
Drop, "Goodbye”
0
Attendant Call, Call to System Attendant.
Issue 1.0
Station VM Feature Usage : On
Digit
Function
1
Play New message
2
Play Saved message
3
Play urgent message
4
Send a message
5
Personal options
6
Administrator options (administrator only)
7
Set Cancel/Fwd, available only for remote access
8
Mailbox Setting, "Mailbox Settings" prompt
9
VM Long options
#
Drop, "Goodbye”
0
Attendant Call, Call to System Attendant.
Operation
To access a Message Retrieval option
1. At any time after the “Number of Messages” prompt, dial the digit to play a message.
The system initiates the selection providing any needed prompts.
Conditions
1. You must begin dialing within the CCR Analysis timer in response to a system prompt.
If the timer expires, the system will disconnect the call and you will receive error tone.
2. When the “call sender” option results in an external call, dialing restrictions will be
applied based on your Station COS (Class of Service).
3. If you remain off-hook after a call placed through the Voice Mail is complete, you will
be returned to the previous place in the Voice Mailbox. If you hangs up, the integrate
139
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Voice Mail will recall you and, upon answer will play “Request Mailbox Number” prompt.
4. If your Mailbox is configured with Auto Save New Message, after listening to the
message, the message is stored and you must be expressly delete the message. To
minimize the potential for large amounts of unwanted stored messages, Auto Save
New message can be disabled then the message is deleted if not expressly saved.
Programming
SYSTEM
Auto Save New Message (PGM 161-Button 24-11)
Related Features

Message Retrieval

Remote Message Retrieval

Voice Mailbox Settings

Class of Service
Hardware
2.45.3.11 Message Storage
Description
When you activate Call Forward to the integrated Voice Mail, calls are transferred to your mailbox
or recall the Auto Attendant, the call is handled by the iPECS Voice Mail application. The caller
connects to your User Greeting followed by beep tone to notify the caller to leave a message.
The caller can record a message and hang-up or dial “*” for further options. At disconnect, the VM
application stores the message in your Voice Mailbox and activates the Message Waiting
indication at your station. If VM back up is assigned, the back-up station (Phontage or UCS Client)
is also notified and the message stored on the hard drive of the Soft phone PC. Other notification
including sending an e-mail with the Voice Mail can be configured for your integrated Voice
Mailbox.
The integrated Voice Mail application provides 1 hour and 4 access channels and can be
expanded to 16 hours.
Operation
Remote Caller
To leave a voice message after Greeting and beep
1. State you message
2. Hang up to quit recording or dial “*” for further options.
140
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Conditions
1. Two timers are provided to control Voice Message duration. The Valid User Message
Timer establishes the minimum Voice Message duration. Voice Messages shorter than
this timer are not stored. The User Record Timer establishes the maximum Voice
Message duration. When the User Record Timer expires while recording a Voice
Message, confirmation tone is heard and the message is saved for destination station.
2. If all the AA/VM channels are in use, Ring Back tone is provided until a channel is
available.
3. All stations including an SLT can leave and receive voice messages.
4. Individual User Greetings and Voice Mails are protected from loss of AC power.
5. With the optional second Voice Store Forward Gateway, System announcement
should be recorded in both the main and second gateway. Also, each station and
Line Voice Mailbox should be associated with only one of the gateways.
Programming
STATION
VSF Back-up Station (PGM 112-Button 23)
VSF Access (PGM 113-Button 2)
Direct Transfer to Mailbox (PGM 120-Button 6)
Station Call Forward Timer (PGM 123)
SYSTEM
Call Forward No Answer Timer (PGM 181-Button 1)
VSF User Record Timer (PGM181-Button 3)
VSF Valid User Message Timer (PGM 181-Button 4)
Related Features

Call Forward

Station Message Wait/Call Back

Integrated AA/VM Overview

Call Transfer, Voice Mail
Hardware
2.45.3.12 Outbound Message Notification
Description
When a new message is received, the system will check the new message notification settings.
If configured to notify your Mobile extension, the system will place a call to your mobile phone and,
when answered, play the station number prompt followed by the new message prompt, “You
have xx new messages.” The new message prompt indicates the number of unheard messages.
141
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
After the new message prompt you will be prompted to enter your password, which will access
your mailbox. You must listen to the new messages to confirm the notification.
If you take no action within the CCR Inter-digit timer, do not answer, the system receives busy or
you hang-up, the call is disconnected and the system will retry the call after the retry timer expires.
The system will attempt to complete the notification until you listen to the message or the number
of attempts reaches the DISA Retry counter.
Operation
To receive and confirm the notification
1. Answer Notification call and receive the New messages and password prompt.
2. Enter your Mailbox password.
3. Listen to the new messages.
Condition
1. Caller Id will be the external caller who left the message or, for messages from another
station, Caller Id will be the station receiving the message.
2. If notification is disabled, any existing notification will be terminated after the initial
notification call.
3. For proper operation, the Station COS (Class of Service) and CO Group access for the
station must be such as to allow the notification call.
4. The Mobile telephone number to notify is assigned in PGM 236.
5. The system will continuously attempt to seize an outside Line for the notification call
until successful, if all lines in the assigned Line group are busy.
6. The Retry counter is incremented after the system accesses the outside Line for
notification.
7. The Retry count is from 1 to 9; the retry interval is from 1 to 3 minutes.
8. If a new message is logged before answer of the notification call, the message will be
available to the user and a new notification is not invoked. If a new message is
received after answering the notification call, the System will invoke another notification
call. The user will receive the notification after returning to idle.
9. An analog CO Line may be used for the notification however, notification over these
Lines (LCO Lines) must be enabled and several timers must be set to compensate for
the lack of answer and disconnect signals from an analog CO Line. The system will
treat the call as answered after VM Notify Play Delay Over LCO Timer then play the
new message prompt. The system will wait for you to enter a password for the VMIB
Group Dial Time Out. You must enter the correct password or the call will be
disconnected.
10. If you enter an incorrect password, the system will allow you to reenter a correct
password. You may retry entry for the DISA Retry Counter.
Programming
TABLES
Hunt Call Enable (PGM 236-Button 6)
VSF Notify (PGM 236-Button 7)
142
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Notify Retry Count (PGM 236-Button 8)
Notify Retry Interval (PGM 236-Button 9)
SYSTEM
VM MEX Notify over LCO (PGM160-Button24-13)
Notify Play Delay (PGM181-Btn18)
Related Features

Mobile Extension

Message Retrieval

Remote Message Retrieval

Message Retrieval Options
Hardware
2.45.3.13 Personal CCR/User Greeting DISA
Description
Your integrated Voice Mail User greeting can have an associated Personal CCR Table
configured by your system Administrator. While listening to your greeting, outside callers may dial
a digit that that correlates to a destination in the Personal CCR Table. When the digit is dialed,
the caller is routed to the defined destination.
The available destinations, shown below, are the same as the system CCR tables employed for
Auto Attendant.

Station

Station group

Speed Dial number

Conference Room

Page Zone

Voice Mail

System Announcement

Company Directory
In addition, the system will monitor digits for a station number. If the user dials a station number,
the system will transfer the caller to the station.
If this option set to OFF, CCR table is not worked, and next following digits are available, and
follow system DISA call flow.
143
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Operation
Outside Caller
To use Personal CCR,
1. Call or be transferred to a Station with Personal CCR active.
2. During or within the CCR analysis timer, dial a digit from the User Greeting
instructions.
3. The caller routes to the CCR destination or to the DID/DISA destination if the CCR
destination is unavailable.
Conditions
1. The caller can dial “*” or “#” to replay your greeting.
2. If the caller dialed digit does not match an entry in the Personal CCR table the caller
routes based on the numbering plan or DID/DISA Destination (PGM 167
3. If the destination defined in the CCR Table for the caller dialed digit is not available
(Busy, No-answer or error) the call is sent to the appropriate destination defined by
PGM 167 DID/DISA Destination.
4. The Personal CCR option is available to outside callers only.
5. Personal CCR use must be enabled, you must record your Voice Mail User Greeting
and your calls must forward to your integrated Voice Mailbox for this feature to function
properly.
6. No retry count is applied to Personal CCR; the caller can attempt to enter a matching
digit once.
7. The priority of Personal User Greeting is as followings.
 Personal CCR
 Outgoing Mailbox Destination
 User Greeting DISA
Programming
STATION
Station CCR Table (PGM 128)
SYSTEM
DID/DISA Destination (PGM 167)
CCR Interval Digit Timer (PGM 180-Button 13)
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant

Call Forward

DISA
Hardware
144
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.14 Remote Message Retrieval
Description
You can access your mailbox from a remote location. You will be required to enter your mailbox
number then normal mailbox operation applies. The system will require configuration for a remote
access telephone number.
Operation
Remote Caller
To access Voice Mailbox from a remote location
1. Call the telephone number for remote access to the integrated Voice Mail.
2. Upon answer, dial “#” to receive the “Request for Mail Box number” prompt.
3. Follow local access procedures.
Conditions
1. The conditions associated with Message Retrieval and Message Retrieval Options
apply.
2. The conditions associated with DISA apply.
Programming
Related Features

Message Retrieval Options

Integrated Auto Attendant

Message Retrieval
Hardware
145
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.15 Send a Message
Description
You can record and send messages to other Mailboxes or distribution list from your Voice
Mailbox.
Operation
To send a message to another Mailbox
1. At the main Voice Mail prompt, dial “4” and follow the voice instructions to record
and send you message.
Conditions
Programming
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Distribution Lists

Mark a Message as Private

Mark a message for Delivery Confirmation
Hardware
146
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.16 Voice Mail Back-up Station
Description
An iPECS Soft phone (Phontage and UCS Client) user receives notification of new messages for
assigned stations. The Soft phone will indicate the total messages for the assigned stations as
well as the Soft phone. The Soft -phone user can download the messages for other stations to
the hard drive of the Soft phone PC and, using the Soft phone application, manage the messages
on the hard drive. If enabled, the Soft phone user may delete voice messages from the Voice
Mailbox of the other assigned stations.
Operation
System
System automatically notifies the back-up station of new messages
Phontage or UCS Client
See Phontage or UCS Client Guide
Conditions
1. Voice messages are stored in the integrated Voice Mail and must be expressly deleted.
Deleting messages from the soft-phone hard drive does not delete the message from
the Voice Mail memory.
2. It is not possible to backup Voice Mail messages to a Phontage PC when Phontage is
connected to the system remotely in R/NAPT mode.
Programming
STATION
VSF Back-up Delete (PGM 112-Button 22)
VSF Back-up Station (PGM 112-Button 23)
VSF Back-up prompt (PGM 112-Button 24)
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
147
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.17 Voice Mail Class of Service
Description
The system employs a Voice Mailbox Class of Service to provide control and management of
Mailboxes. There are five VM Classes of service used to define the COS characteristics listed
below.

Greeting length: 00-99 seconds

Message length: 000- 600 seconds

Number of messages: 00-250

Retention time: 00-99 days

E-mail notification

Future delivery messages

Confirm message receipt

Private message mark
Operation
Operation of a Voice Mailbox COS is automatic once configured
Conditions
1. The default Class of Service for all mailboxes is 1.
Programming
SYSTEM
VM COS Attributes (PGM 253)
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
148
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.45.3.18 Voice Mailbox Settings
Description
You can program the Mailbox settings for your mailbox including a security password and record
a greeting. When you press “8” while retrieving messages, the "Mailbox Setting" prompt, (“To edit
your greeting, press one, to edit your password, press two. To return to main menu, press nine”)
is played.
Operation
To program Mailbox settings while “in” the Voice Mailbox
1. Press “8”, for Mailbox settings, the “Mailbox Setting” prompt is received.
To edit your greeting
1. Dial “1” and receive the “Greeting Option” prompt (“To listen to your current greeting,
press five, To record a new greeting, press seven, To return to the main menu,
press nine.”).
2. Dial “5”, to hear your current greeting.
3. Dial “7” to record a new greeting (“At the tone, record your new greeting, press #
when you have finished”.)
To edit your password
1. Dial “2” and receive the “Password Entry” prompt (“Please enter your new password
and press pound when finished.”).
2. Dial new password.
3. Press “#” and receive the “Reenter Password” prompt (“Please re-enter your
password to confirm and press pound when finished.”).
4. Dial new password again.
5. Press “#” and receive “Password Confirmation” prompt (“Your password is saved.”).
To return to main menu
1. Dial “9” to return to the main VM menu.
Conditions
1. If you are accessing your Voice Mail remotely, you must begin dialing within the CCR
Analysis time, if not the call is released.
2. If the dialed number is not recognized, the “Invalid Entry” prompt is played.
3. You must assign a password (Authentication code up to 12 digits) before access to the
mailbox will be allowed. Note that a greeting need not be recorded.
Programming
Related Features




Message Storage
Message Retrieval
Remote Message Retrieval
Message Retrieval Options
Hardware
149
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.45.4
Issue 1.0
System Voice Memo
Description
The integrated AA/VM memory incorporates Voice Memos for the system time and date as well
as station number, and settings that can be played to your station upon request.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To hear the Date & Time Prompt
1. Dial “661”, the Play Time and Date code. The system plays the date and time Voice
memo.
To hear the Station Number Prompt
1. Dial “662”, the Play Station number code. The system plays the Station Number
voice memo.
To hear the Station Settings
1. Dial “663”, the Play Station Settings code. The system plays the Station setting,
reporting the following items
− Station Number
− Station IP Address
− Station Mac Address
− Station ICM Mode (Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
− Listed message x (x: number of all message waiting)
− Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
− Do not disturb
− Forwarded to station xxx
− Forwarded to speed bin xxx
− Queued Line xx
− Locked (temporary COS (Class of Service) change)
− COS (Class of Service) x
SLT
To hear the Date & Time Prompt
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “661”, the Play Time and Date code. The system plays the date and time Voice
memo.
To hear the Station Number Prompt
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “662”, the Play Station number code. The system plays the Station Number
voice memo.
150
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
To hear Station Settings
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “663”, the Play Station Settings code. The system plays the Station setting,
reporting the following items:
− Station number
− Station IP Address
− Station Mac Address
− Station ICM Mode Handsfree/Tone/Privacy)
− Listed message x (the number of all message waiting)
− Wake-Up Time (hh:mm)
− Do not disturb
− Forwarded to station xxx
− Forwarded to speed bin xxx
− Queued Line xx
− Locked (temporary COS (Class of Service) change)
− COS (Class of Service) x
Conditions
1. For station status, items from “Listed message x” to “COS x” are not include unless
active.
Programming
STATION
VSF Access (PGM 113-Button 2)
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
151
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.46
Issue 1.0
IP Bridge Mode
Description
Phontage and UCS client Soft phones can automatically bridge the audio for a call to a “linked
pair” Station. When the Soft phone places a call in the bridged mode, the audio for the call can
delivered to the iPECS IP or LDP Phone by simply lifting handset or pressing the [SPEAKER]
button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To use the IP Bridge mode:
1. Place a call from Soft phone. The Soft phone must be in the Bridged mode.
2. Lift the handset of the linked iPECS IP or LDP Phone to receive audio.
Conditions
1.
2.
3.
4.
The Soft phone must be used local to the bridged iPECS IP or LDP Phone.
Bridged operation must be selected at the Soft phone.
The Soft phone must be linked to the associated iPECS IP or LDP Phone.
Bridging is not available from the iPECS IP or Phone to the Soft phone.
Programming
Related Features

Linked Station Pairs
Hardware
152
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.47
Issue 1.0
IP System DECT
Description
The iPECS supports office building mobility employing Digital Enhanced Cordless Technology
(DECT). Ericsson-LG’s Multi-channel DECT Base stations connect to the Wireless Interface
board of the system to establish cells. With the DECT handsets, you can roam and maintain an
uninterrupted communications link to iPECS features and resources.
For further information on installation and operation of the IP System DECT solution, refer to the
eMG80 and DECT Installation Manuals.
Operation
DECT operation is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. The maximum number of DECT phones (desktop or portable handsets) is 48.
Programming
DECT
DECT Registration (PGM 491-Web only)
DECT Attributes (PGM 491)
Related Features
Hardware

WTIB4

GDC-600B/600BE Base stations

GDC-450H/500H handsets
153
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.48
Issue 1.0
IP FAX Relay, T.38 Support
Description
Because of their nature, Fax tones do not transmit well through IP networks, particularly when
compression is employed. To address this, the external network interfaces of the system support
T.38 protocol that defines the translation of analog fax tones to digital signals. When Fax tone is
detected on a port, the system will activate a T.38 Fax relay channel to the appropriate port.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
Programming
Related Features
Hardware

SLT port with FAX machine connected
154
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.49
Issue 1.0
LBC (Loud Bell Control)
Description
The iPECS hardware is equipped with relays that activate External Control Contacts. Each
contact is assigned to one of several functions including a Loud Bell Control. If used as a Loud
Bell Control, the contact will activate when:

External Page is accessed

Assigned Station receives ring in Day Ring mode (LBC)

UNA (Universal Night Answer) outside line receives a call while in the Night or Timed
Ring mode.
Operation
System
Operation of the relays is automatic when defined
Conditions
1. Two contacts are available, one each appearing in the Miscellaneous contacts of the
KSU and the EKSU.
2. When assigned to activate as a Loud Bell Control, outside Line ring, transfers, and
tone ring Intercom calls to the assigned station will activate the contacts.
3. The contacts are rated at 1 amp, 24 VDC.
4. While in the Night or Timed Ring mode, the LBC function is not activated by ringing at
the assigned station. If the system is in the Night or Timed ring mode with External
Night Ring enabled, an incoming call on an outside Line assigned with UNA will
activate the contact. This permits operation of an external night ring device.
Programming
CO/IP
Universal Night Answer (PGM 141-Button 7)
SYSTEM
External Night Ring (PGM 160-Button 6)
External Contact Control (PGM 168)
Related Features

Universal Night Answer

Door Open
Hardware

External Control Contact connected to an external loud bell.
155
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.50
Issue 1.0
LCR (Least Cost Routing)
Description
The LCR Tables are employed to define appropriate routing for outgoing calls based on the
dialed number. Generally, the LCR Tables are structured to define the Least Cost Route for Long
Distance calls.
Your dialed digits are compared to table entries and modified based on time of day, day of week,
and assigned routes. There are four LCR Tables: LCR Control Attributes, LCR Leading Digit
Tables, LCR Digit Modification and LCR Initialization Tables.
LCR Access modes are assigned in the LCR Control Attributes Table. These modes define the
manner in which you access the LCR function. LCR may be disabled or one or more of the three
access modes can be allowed to access LCR. The basic modes are:
1. Internal LCR
If you dial digits that match an Internal LCR code in the LDT (Leading Digit Table), an
outside Line is selected and digits are modified using the DMT (Digit Modification
Table).
2. Loop LCR
If you dial 9 (the 1st available Line Group access code) or presses a {POOL} or
{LOOP} button to place a call, the Loop LCR mode is accessed. Dialed digits are
compared to the Loop LCR codes in the LDT; the system will seize an outside Line
from the assigned Line Group and sends digits from the DMT.
3. Direct CO LCR
If you select a {LINE} or {LINE GROUP} button, the Direct CO LCR mode is
accessed. If the dialed number matches a Direct LCR code in the LDT and the
seized Line belongs to the assigned Direct CO LCR group, the system will send
digits modified based on the DMT.
Operation
System
Operation of LCR is automatic based on assignments in the system’s LCR Tables
Conditions
1. There are a total of 6 LCR access mode combinations that can be defined as below:
1) LCR Access Mode 00 (M00) – LCR is disabled.
2) LCR Access Mode 01 (M01) – Loop LCR access is active.
3) LCR Access Mode 02 (M02) – Loop and Internal LCR access are active.
4) LCR Access Mode 11 (M11) – Direct CO and Loop access are active.
5) LCR Access Mode 12 (M12) – Direct CO, Loop and Internal LCR access are
156
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
active, seize Co line according to the LCR attributes.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
6) LCR Access Mode 13 (M13) – Direct CO, Loop and Internal LCR access are
active, seize CO line according to the station attributes.
Multiple Leading Digit Tables can be configured for each station and outside Line.
Leading digit entries may be duplicated in the Leading Digit Table. Using a different
“LDT Index” will make each entry unique. The system will use the lowest matching
entry.
When Direct CO LCR is used on an ISDN line, an ISDN information message with the
Called party Info Element, which includes only the numbering plan and numbering type,
is sent to the ISDN to maintain the ISDN connection while the user finishes dialing and
the system modifies the digits.
For Direct CO LCR, the number of digits for the LDT Table should be programmed
considering the dial-tone time-out of the network.
Since an outside Line is connected, Direct CO LCR does not support the Alternative
DMT index, which allows the system to select a second or alternative outside Line to
place the call.
If the LCR CO group is not assigned, the system will not seize an outside Line and will
make internal call.
If the LCR CO group is assigned as the unused group, the system it will seize an
outside Line according to the station attributes.
Programming
TABLES
LCR Control Assignment (PGM 220)
LCR LDT Table (PGM 221)
LCR DMT Table (PGM 222)
LCR Table Initialization (PGM 223)
Related Features

Outside Line Access

Outside Line Groups

ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network)

Station Flexible Buttons
Hardware
157
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.51
Issue 1.0
Linked Station Pairs
Description
A station can be logically linked to a primary station so that the two stations function as a single
station. When linked, the two stations effectively act as a single station with the station attributes
of the primary station. The status of one station is reflected in the status of the other and features
activated at one are active at the other. All internal or external calls to a linked pair station will ring
both stations.
All features available to the primary station are available and controllable by the secondary
station, one station may activate Call Forward and the other may cancel the forward. The displays
of the linked stations will display the status of the linked pair. When one is busy, the display of the
linked station will be as shown below.
IN USE AT LINK STA
Operation
System
Operation of Linked pairs is automatic when defined
Conditions
1. Support for Linked Pairs is available with the iPECS IP Phones, Phontage and UCS
client Soft phones and WIT 400HE WiFi phones only.
2. Intercom calls to the Linked stations always signal in the Tone ring mode and cannot
be changed using the Caller Controlled ICM Signaling feature.
3. Linked pair stations are treated as having a single station number for all features
including LCD displays, station programming, ADMIN access, ACD statistics, SMDR,
etc.
4. The station attributes of the secondary station will follow attributes of the primary
station, i.e. Day/Night COS (Class of Service), CO Warning Tone, CO Auto Hold, CO
Call Drop, DID Call Waiting, Speed Access, Alarm, Voice Mail Access, DND, FWD,
Paging, outside Line Access, outside Line Ring Assign, etc.
5. If one station of a Linked pair is busy, the other station of the linked pair is also
considered as busy, thus use of the linked station to place a call is not supported.
6. A station can be linked to another station without registration to the system. This allows
a station to be linked without affecting the overall capacity of the system. In this case,
only an iPECS IP or LDP Phone, Phontage, or SLT can be used as the unregistered
linked station. In other cases, the linked station must be registered with the system,
reducing the system capacity by one.
7. The IP Attendant application can be linked as the secondary phone only.
8. A SIP Phone cannot be part of a linked pair.
158
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
9. Linked pair station cannot call the other member of the pair. It is possible to place a
call on hold at one and pick-up the call at the other member.
Programming
SYSTEM
Linked Station Pairs Table (PGM 124)
Related Features

Intercom Caller Controlled ICM Signaling
Hardware
159
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.52
Issue 1.0
LNR (Last Number Redial)
Description
The last number dialed is stored (up to 48 digits) in the Station’s Last Number Redial buffer. You
may request the system redial the last dialed number without the need to dial the number.
For iPECS IP and LDP Phones with displays, the last 10 numbers are stored in the LNR buffer.
The user may view the ten numbers using the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button to scroll and select
the number to dial from the list.
Operation
LDP Phone
To use Last Number Redial using the [Redial] button;
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [REDIAL] button.
3. Press the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button to highlight the desired number.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] or [REDIAL] button to dial the number highlighted.
iPECS IP Phone
To use Last Number Redial using the LIP-8000 series phone soft buttons
1. Press the [DIR] Soft button.
2. Press the [SPEED] Soft button.
3. Dial “*”.
4. Use the Navigation button to select the desired number.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to place the call.
SLT
To use Last Number Redial
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “552”, the Last Number Redial code.
Conditions
1. For iPECS IP and LDP Phones with display, the redial buffer will store duplicate
numbers unless dialed consecutively.
2. When the outside Line used for the original call is busy, the system will select an idle
Line from the same Line group to place the call.
3. Using Last Number Redial will cancel Automatic Called Number Redial if active.
4. Manually dialing a Flash during an outgoing call will cause only those digits dialed after
the Flash to be stored in the LNR buffer.
160
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Programming
Related Features

Save Number Redial (SNR)

Station Speed Dial

System Speed Dial
Hardware
161
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.53
Issue 1.0
Mobile Extension
Description
Your mobile phone may be registered to a station allowing the mobile phone to place and receive
calls through the system. DID calls are sent to your iPECS IP or LDP Phone and your registered
mobile phone simultaneously. If the mobile phone is paired with a Hunt group station, Hunt group
calls routed to the station can also ring to your mobile phone.
From your mobile phone you may access the facilities of the iPECS to place internal and external
calls as well as activate and access features. To access system facilities and resources, you call
your DID number from your mobile. When the call is received, the system matches the Calling
Line ID (CLI) to the mobile phone and provides you with system dial tone.
You may be permitted to register and activate a mobile phone for the Mobile Extension feature.
Operation
iPECS IP LDP Phones
To register the mobile phone number;
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button,
2. Dial “37”.
3. Dial the mobile phone number.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To activate a registered mobile phone from the user’s station:
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “38”.
3. Dial digit “1” to activate, “0” to deactivate.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To place a call from the mobile extension using the iPECS:
1. Dial the DID number of your station, the system will check the CLI, answer the call
and you receive internal dial tone.
2. Place an internal or external iPECS call as normal.
To Transfer a call your mobile received from iPECS:
1. Dial “*” while on the iPECS call.
2. Dial the desired station, the call is transferred and the mobile phone returns to idle.
Or
Dial a Park code to Park the call
Or
Dial a Page zone to place an Internal/External or All Call page within the iPECS
162
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
system.
Or
Dial a Conference Room to transfer the external party to a Conference Room.
Note
The mobile may reconnect to the call by dialing “#”.
System
Incoming DID calls are sent to active mobile phones automatically.
Conditions
1. When the mobile phone places an external call through iPECS, the CLI of the
corresponding station is used.
2. The Mobile Extension features are not supported on analog CO Lines as answer and
disconnect supervision is not reliable on these Line types.
3. Message Wait and Callback cannot be activated to a mobile phone.
4. The Mobile Extension feature is not supported over a distributed networked
environment.
5. When an incoming ISDN DID call is received, the system will access an ISDN line and
place a call to the mobile phone. Thus, an ISDN line must be available for the system
to notify the mobile user of the incoming call.
6. Hold and Transfer Recalls to the mobile phone are sent to mobile phone and the
associated station.
7. ACD, Circular and Terminal Hunt Group calls can be routed to the active Mobile
Extension.
Programming
SYSTEM
Mobile Extension Table (PGM 236)
Related Features

DND (Do Not Disturb)

Station Message Wait/Call Back

Attendant Recall

Distributed Control Network

Station User Programming & Codes
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
163
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.54
Issue 1.0
MOH (Music-On-Hold)
Description
When you place a call in a hold state, the system will deliver audio from the defined MOH source.
In this way, the connected user can determine that the connection is still active.
The system delivers audio from one of several sources that are defined for the system and can
be defined for each Line and DID number. With multiple sources, different organizations can have
different on-hold messages.
Audio sources available include:

An External audio connection through the Miscellaneous connector of the KSU,

An Internal source with 13 canned melodies, one is selected as the internal source,

Up to five (5) SLT ports can be assigned as SLT MOH ports and connected to an
audio source and

Up to three System announcements can be assigned, recorded and used for MOH,
one announcement, number 71, is dedicated for MOH and two using any desired
System announcement number.
When using a System announcement, separate messages can be recorded for each of the
languages, maximum six (6), supported by the system.
Operation
System
Operation of MOH is automatic
To record a System announcement for MOH
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the sequence number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the System Announcement number, if other than 71, assure the announcement
is configured for MOH use.
5. Dial the Language number, only required with multi-language support. The current
announcement is played followed by the “Press # to record” prompt.
6. Dial “#”.
7. After the beep-tone, record message.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to stop recording and save the message.
Conditions
1. The External music source should only be connected to one of the inputs.
2. The System announcements can be externally recorded and uploaded to the system.
164
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3. The Internal source uses an *.wav format and any 8-second recording can be
uploaded to the system in place of the internal source.
4. Separate MOH announcements should be recorded for each Language when multiple
languages are supported.
Programming
CO LINE
MOH (PGM 142-Button 6)
SYSTEM
MOH Type (PGM 171-Button 2)
Related Features

Hold

Back Ground Music

Multiple Language Support
Hardware

External Music source connected to KSU music source input.
165
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.55
Issue 1.0
Multiple Language Support
Description
With the integrated Auto Attendant and Voice Mail, iPECS can support six (6) languages
simultaneously. Prompts in the desired languages are loaded into the integrated AA/VM memory
along with the Language Selection prompts. To assure the proper language is employed, the
Language Selection prompts are played when an incoming call is assigned to be answered by a
DID, DISA, System Announcement or Station Hunt Group announcement. The Language
Selection prompts are played in multiple phrases, one in each of the equipped languages, with a
request for the caller to input a digit to select the appropriate language. The system then employs
the defined announcement (DID, DISA, etc.) recorded for the selected language.
Operation
System
System automatically plays the Language Selection prompts and plays prompts in the selected
language.
To record a Multi-Language Selection prompt
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “06”, the System Announcement Record code.
3. Dial the slot number of the voice storage unit.
4. Dial the Multi Language selection Announcement number, 72.
5. Dial the Language number, only required with multi-language support. The current
announcement is played followed by the “Press # to record” prompt.
6. Dial “#”.
7. After the beep-tone, record your message.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to stop recording and save the message.
Conditions
1. The Language Selection prompts must be recorded as announcement number 72.
2. Multi-language support is only available using the integrated Auto Attendant.
3. Separate announcements must be recorded by the Attendant for each language
supported.
Programming
SYSTEM
Multi-language (PGM 179)
Related Features
166
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Direct Inward Dial (DID)

Station Groups

Announcements

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Hardware

MEMU recommended
167
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.56
Issue 1.0
Multiple Voice Mailbox Support
Description
A station can access any Voice Mailbox by dialing the VM group, the mailbox number and
password. If you use an iPECS IP and LDP Phone, one or more Flex buttons of your phone can
be configured to access a specific mailbox and receive a visual indication (LED flashes) of
message status in the mailbox. A Flex {VMAILBOX} button is assigned to allow access to each
Voice Mailbox.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {VMAILBOX} Flex button;
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + VM group + Mail-box (station) number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To access a Voice Mailbox using the {VMAILBOX} Flex button;
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER].
2. Press the {VMAILBOX} Flex button.
3. Dial the Mailbox password.
Conditions
1. A Flex button can be assigned to access the Mailbox for a Station Group or outside
Line Voice Mailbox.
2. The {VMAILBOX} button LED will flash indicating new messages have been received
in the associated mailbox.
3. A Flex button cannot be assigned to access the mailbox of a networked station.
4. An external Voice Mail system may not provide proper notification to the system of
message status and thus, the {VMAILBOX} button LED may not properly indicate new
messages.
Programming
Related Features

External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Integrated Voice Mail
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone

External or Integrated Voice Mail
168
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.57
Issue 1.0
Network Security & Priority
Description
Each IP device that connects to the eMG80 supports several security and priority protocols. IP
devices incorporate a Web server, which will deliver the Module Web Admin pages to a standard
browser. Characteristics that can be established are:

IEEE 802.1p/Q, VLAN – sets Virtual LAN tag and priority for Ethernet frame

Diffserv – sets Diffserv Code Point priority for IP packet

IPSec – enables IPSec to establish IPSec tunnel and encryption of IP packet

SRTP – enables Secure RTP for RTP packet payload using AES (Advanced
Encryption Service).
Operation
System
Operation of Security and priority is automatic once configured
Conditions
1. For Web Admin, the password is encrypted using the Ericsson-LG Java Virtual
Encryption plug-in. A Java Virtual Machine (MS or Sun) must be installed in the user’s
PC to support password encryption.
2. Security and priority characteristics can be set for all devices, local or remote.
3. Devices must be on the same LAN to support SRTP.
4. The iPECS implementation of IPSec employs a proprietary Key exchange protocol
from the MPB to the iPECS device.
5. IEEE 802.1 VLAN priority and ID are set at each device using the device Web interface.
Diffserv, IPSEC and SRTP treatments may also be set in the device via the local Web
interface. For the eMG80 MPB, VLANs are configured via the maintenance interface of
the RS-232 port.
Programming
BOARD
RTP Security (PGM 132-Button 4)
SYSTEM
Web Password Encryption (PGM161-Btn15)
Related Features
Hardware
169
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.58
Issue 1.0
Outside Call Redirect
Description
You can assign a Flex button of your iPECS IP or LDP Phone to send an incoming outside call to
a pre-defined destination such as the Attendant, Voice Mail, another Station, or Hunt group
without answering the call. Call Redirect acts as a one-time Call Forward.
Operation
To assign a Flex button for {DSS/BLF}
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + destination + [HOLD/SAVE]
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate Call Redirect while receiving an outside call:
To reroute a call,
1. Press the {Call Redirect} button; the call is redirected to the defined destination.
Conditions
1. Conditions associated with Call Forward apply.
2. Only the call ringing at the time Call redirect is activated will be redirected. The next
incoming outside call is routed as normal.
Programming
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
170
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.59
Issue 1.0
Outside Call Time Restriction
Description
The system can be programmed to limit the length of outgoing calls by specified stations. If Call
Time Restriction is assigned to a station, when the station places an outgoing call, the system
initiates the Cut Off timers for the Station and the outside Line. Fifteen (15) seconds prior to
expiration of the shortest timer, a warning tone is delivered to the station. At expiration, the
system terminates the call returning the external Line to idle.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when assigned
Conditions
1. Once activated, the Cut Off timer continues timing while the call is connected to the
system even if the call is transferred or picked up at another station.
2. Two Cut Off timers are provided, one assigned on a Station basis, the other assigned
CO basis. The shortest of the two timers will control the Cut-Off function
Programming
STATION
CO/IP Call Time Restriction (PGM 112-Button 3)
Cut Off Timer (PGM 123-Button 2)
CO/IP
CO Cut Off Timer (PGM 142-Button 21)
Related Features

Call Duration Warning Tone Timer
Hardware
171
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.60
Issue 1.0
Outside Line Access
Description
Stations can access outgoing Lines if allowed Line allowed access in the System database. The
iPECS IP and LDP Phones may use flexible buttons assigned to access a specific Line or Line
group button for outgoing calls or a {LOOP} button.
Individual users may be allowed to assign Flexible buttons to access a Line or Line group.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {LOOP} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “85” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To assign a {POOL} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + 8 + CO Group Number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To place an outgoing outside call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press desired {LINE}, {POOL} or {LOOP} button, or dial the Line or Line group
access code.
3. Dial the desired outside number.
To answer an incoming outside call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
Or,
1. Press flashing {LINE}, {POOL} or {LOOP} button; which will answer the call over
the speakerphone. You may lift the handset to speak privately.
SLT
To place an outgoing outside call
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial the CO line or Group access code.
3. Dial the desired number.
To answer an incoming outside call
1. Lift handset.
Conditions
1. When a user dials “9”, the system will search the preferred Line Group for an idle Line,
if there is no idle line then the system will search the 1st Line Group for an idle Line.
172
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Issue 1.0
The system may continue the search through all Line Groups for an available line if “1st
CO/IP Group Override” is enabled.
If not allowed access to a specific outside Line, you receive error tone when access is
attempted. The station may receive transferred calls on such denied access Lines but
will not be able to flash or use the Line for an outgoing call.
A station denied access to an outside Line but assigned to have ring for the Line will
receive ring, a flashing {LINE} button LED and may answer the call. The user may
transfer the call but cannot make an outgoing call on the Line.
When you place an outside call, the audio transmit path to your station is muted until
the system has verified Toll Restriction for the Line.
When an analog Line is seized, the system will monitor the Line for dial tone.
The system selects Lines from a group using the Round-robin or Last-choice method
as assigned in the system database.
When an iPECS IP or LDP Phone is not assigned Ringing Line Preference, the user
must press the ringing {LINE} button to answer the call.
iPECS IP and LDP Phone users may be assigned exclusive use of a Line as a Private
Line.
Programming
STATION
Individual CO Access (PGM 112-Button 4)
CO Line Programming (PGM112-Button 6)
Ringing Line Preference (PGM112-Button7)
Prefer CO/Group (PGM112-Button 14th)
CO/IP Group Access (PGM 117)
CO/IP
CO/IP Group (PGM 141-Button 1)
CO Ring Assignment (PGM 144)
Related Features

Outside Line Groups

Line Ring Assignment

Ringing Line Preference

Private Line
Hardware
173
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.61
Issue 1.0
Outside Line Queuing
Description
When outside Lines are busy, if permitted, you can request to be placed in a queue awaiting the
Line or a Line in the same group to become available. When an appropriate Line becomes
available, the system calls the waiting station on a first in first out basis.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To request to be placed in queue for a busy Line
1. Press the busy {LINE} or {POOL} button.
2. Press the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button, confirmation tone is received.
3. Hang-up, the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] LED flashes.
To cancel the queue from the queued station
1. Press the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button, the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] LED
extinguishes.
SLT
To request to be placed in queue while receiving “All Lines Busy” signal
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial “556”, the Callback feature code.
To cancel the queue from the queued station
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “556”, the Callback feature code.
System
When a Line becomes available
1. Send distinctive Queue recall to the station with oldest queue, flash appropriate
{LINE} button LED. Make the Line and station busy to all other users.
Conditions
1. An outside Line can have any number of simultaneous queue requests.
2. A station may only have a single active outside Line queue request. Activating a new
queue request will replace, and thus cancel, an existing queue.
3. A Queue recall will always signal the station with tone ring, ignoring the station’s
assigned Intercom Signaling mode.
4. Queue recall will bypass a busy station, and place the station at the bottom of the
queue list.
174
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
5. Queue recall will signal a station for 15 seconds, after which, the station is removed
from the queue; the queue is cancelled.
Programming
STATION
CO/IP Queuing (PGM 112-Button 5)
Related Features

Outside Line Access
Hardware
175
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.62
Issue 1.0
Personal Groups
Description
A Personal Group consisting of your master station and group member stations (maximum 32
including your master station) can be configured by the system Administrator. When your master
station receives a call all members also receive the call and when placing a call the master
station number, access and dialing restrictions are used. Each member can still receive call to the
member station number.
Certain attributes of the master station can also be delivered to member stations, if configured,
including:
 Master Wake-Up will send the Wake-Up alarm set at the master station to all station
members.
 Master Call Forward will forward member calls as well.
 Master DND activates DND at the master and all member stations.
 Linked Option
− When ‘On’, the members of the Personal Group act as a Linked pair station of
the master station number. When one station of the group is busy all are busy;
Linked stations will receive the 'linked pair in-use' display.
− When ‘Off’, The members receive calls for the master employing Call Coverage,
attributes of the master (Wake-Up, Call Forward and DND) can be enabled for
the members, the LCD of member stations display outgoing call information for
the master, each member maintains separate calling capabilities and the master
will be busy only when all members are busy.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. Unlike the ‘Linked Pair stations, the stations in Personal Group with the Linked option
enabled maintain a separate station database and station number
Programming
SYSTEM
Personal Group Assignment (PGM 260)
Personal Group Attributes (PGM 261)
Related Features

SMDR

Call Coverage

Wake-Up

Message Wait/Call Back

Linked Station Pairs
Hardware
176
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.63
Issue 1.0
Pre-Defined & Custom Text Display Messages
Description
You can select a text message that will display in the LCD of iPECS IP and LDP Phones when
they call you.. When you activate Text Display Messages, incoming intercom calls will signal with
muted Ring in-place of normal ring and the LCD of the calling user displays the message you
selected.
There are ten Pre-defined messages (01-10), ten system-wide Custom messages and one user
defined Custom message that you can enter. Your Custom message, the user defined message,
is message number 00, messages 01 to 10 are the Pre-defined messages and messages 11 to
20 are the system-wide messages. Several of the ten Pre-defined messages allow for auxiliary
information such as a time, date or number.
System level Custom Messages are entered from the Attendant or Administrator’s phone or via
the Web Admin. Your Custom Message is entered from your phone, the Attendant or the
Administrator.
As a default, when Text Display Message is active, your phone is effectively in DND to internal
callers. The system can be configured to deliver ring to your phone by disabling the Message
DND attribute for your phone.
The iPECS IP and LDP Phone may have a Flex button defined for {DISPLAY MESSAGE} button
and the button may include the message code to act as a {ONE-TOUCH DISPLAY MESSAGE}
button.
The Pre-defined messages are:
Message 01
LUNCH RETURN AT HH:MM
Message 02
ON VACATION
RETURN AT DATE DD:MM
Message 03
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT TIME HH:MM
Message 04
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN AT DATE DD:MM
Message 05
OUT OF OFFICE
RETURN UNKNOWN
177
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Message 06
CALL (enter up to 17 digits)
Message 07
IN OFFICE STA xxxx
Message 08
IN MEETING
RETURN AT TIME hh:mm
Message 09
AT HOME
Message 10
AT BRANCH OFFICE
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button for Display Messages
{DISPLAY MESSAGE} button:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “51” + [HOLD/SAVE]
{ONE-TOUCH DISPLAY MESSAGE} button:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “51” + message number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate Display Message
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “51”, the Display Message code.
3. To view available messages, press [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button.
4. Dial the Message number (“00”-“20”).
5. Dial auxiliary input, as desired.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Or,
1. Press the {DISPLAY MESSAGE} button.
2. To view available messages, press [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button.
3. Dial the Message number (“00”-“20”).
4. Dial auxiliary input, as desired.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
178
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Or,
1. Press the {ONE-TOUCH DISPLAY MESSAGE} button.
2. Dial auxiliary input, as desired.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To cancel an active Display Message
1. Press the flashing [FWD] button.
To define the your Custom Text Message (00)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “52”, the Custom Message program code.
3. Enter the Message contents, up to 24 characters using two (2) dial pad digits for
each character.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, confirmation tone is received, your new Custom
Text Display Message is stored and the station returns to idle.
SLT
To activate a Display Message
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “51”, the Display Message code.
4. Dial Message number (“00”-“20”).
5. Dial auxiliary data as desired.
6. Momentarily press the hook-switch, confirmation tone is received.
To cancel an active Display Message
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “559”, the SLT Feature Cancel code.
To enter the User Custom Message (00)
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code.
3. Dial “52”, the Custom Message program code, confirmation is received.
4. Enter the Message contents, up to 24 characters.
5. Momentarily press the hook-switch, confirmation tone is received.
System Attendant
To activate Display Messages for other stations
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “051”, Attendant Display Message code.
3. Dial the station range, for a single station dial the same station number twice.
4. To view available messages, press [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button.
5. Dial Message number (“00”-“20”).
6. Dial auxiliary data as desired.
7. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
179
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
To cancel active Display Messages for other stations
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “052”, Attendant Display Message Cancel code.
3. Dial the station range, for a single station dial the same station number twice.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To enter a System-wide Custom Message
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “053”, the System-wide Custom Message program code.
3. Dial desired Message code (“11”-“20”).
4. Enter the Message contents, up to 24 characters.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, confirmation tone is received, the new Custom
Message is stored and the station returns to idle.
Conditions
1. Only the System Attendant or Administrator can assign the contents of Custom
Messages 11-20.
2. The alphanumeric characters are displayed as they are entered; refer to Station Speed
Dial for entry procedures.
3. Display Message is cancelled if you activate DND or Call Forward.
4. Custom Text Display Messages and Display Message status are stored in non-volatile
memory to protect against loss during power failure.
5. The calling station must be an iPECS IP or LDP Phone with display to receive the
message.
6. SLTs are notified of an active Display Message with stutter dial tone. The iPECS IP
and LDP Phones will have a flashing [FWD] button when Text Display Message is
active.
7. Activating Text Display Message does not affect normal operation of the station.
8. Pre-defined Messages 01 to 04 and 06 to 08 permit you to input auxiliary information
such as time, date or number.
9. The Attendant station can activate Text Display Messages for other stations. However,
the Text Display Message feature is not available to an Attendant.
Programming
Related Features

Silent Text Message

DND (Do Not Disturb)

Call Forward

Speed Dial
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone required to receive Display Messages
180
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.64
Issue 1.0
Prefix Dialing Table
Description
The Prefix Dialing Table supports several features. On analog CO Lines, the table is used to
determine the cost of the call. For ISDN Lines assigned Enblock dialing and SIP Trunks, Enblock
dialing can be supported so that you don’t need to wait for the inter-digit time-out to send digits as
a block to the ISDN or SIP service provider. Up to 500 Prefix numbers and associated entries are
available in the table.
When employed for calculating the cost of a call, the system will compare the outgoing digits
dialed with the Prefix Table entries (maximum 8 digits). If the first dialed digits match the entry,
the cost of the call is determined using the Prefix Dialing Table. The Call Charge timer assigned
in the table for the Line is used in-place of meter pulses along with the Cost per Meter Pulse
assigned in the system database. The cost is then calculated as:
(Call Duration/Call Charge Timer) * Cost per Meter Pulse.
When used for Enblock dialing, the first digits you dial are compared to the Prefix digits. If the
digits match, when you dial the maximum number of digits assigned, the number is immediately
sent to the service provider as a block. If there is no match or the maximum digits count is not
reached, the system will wait for the inter-digit time before sending the digits. For an ISDN Line, a
minimum number of digits can be defined. Even if the Prefix digits match, the call will not be
processed until the minimum number of digits is dialed.
Each Line is assigned a Table Id which must match the Prefix dialing Table entry to be
considered for the specific Line.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. For ISDN Enblock dialing, ISDN messages will include the Type of Number,
Numbering plan type and sending complete messages, if assigned in the matching
Prefix Dialing Table entry.
Programming
ISDN LINE DATA
Prefix Dialing Table (PGM 206)
CO LINE DATA
Prefix Table ID (PGM 142-Button 20)
Related Features
Hardware
181
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.65
Issue 1.0
Remote Control from Mobile Phone
Description
In addition to the call features available to your Mobile phone, you can control certain settings
through your Mobile phone. The Mobile has access to the Remote Control menu shown below.
1: Activate Mobile extension
2: Deactivate Mobile extension
3: Unconditional Forward to VM group
4: Cancel Fwd to VM group
5: ACD Agent Off-Duty
6: ACD Agent On-Duty
7: Callback to Mobile extension
A System announcement can be recorded and configured to play when you enter the Remote
Mobile Extension Code. The announcement can be used to list the Remote Control Menu.
Operation
Mobile Phone
To use the Remote Control Menu
1. Call your system DID number.
2. Upon answer, enter “580”, the Remote Mobile Extension Control code.
3. Dial the desired menu, dial tone is returned as confirmation.
Conditions
1. For proper operation, your phone must be allowed to Program the Mobile Extension
parameters, permitted Call Forward and access to the integrated Voice Mail must be
enabled.
2. Selecting ACD Agent Off-Duty will place you Off-duty with Reason code 1.
3. If you select Call Back from the Remote Menu, the call will be disconnected after the
confirmation tone then the system calls the mobile extension.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
STATION
TABLES
Remote MEX Control (PGM109-Button 17)
Call Forward (PGM 111-Button 2)
VSF Access (PGM 113 Button 2)
Mobile PGM Authority (PGM 236-Button 1)
Announce (PGM 236-Button 13)
Related Features


Call Forward
Mobile Extension
Hardware
182
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.66
Issue 1.0
Ringing Line Preference
Description
When Ringing Line Preference is enabled, you answer incoming calls by lifting the handset or
pressing the [SPEAKER] button. You may select a Line before lifting the handset or pressing the
[SPEAKER] button, which will override Ringing Line Preference and connect you to the Line you
selected.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To answer a call while the station is ringing
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
Conditions
1. When multiple calls are ringing at the station, a priority defines the order in which calls
are answered. The default priority is: Transfer > recalls > incoming calls > queued calls.
2. Intercom calls are always given the lowest answering priority.
3. Ringing Line Preference overrides Prime Line assignment.
4. SLTs operate only in the RLP mode; when ringing, lifting the handset connects the
SLT to the ringing call.
Programming
STATION
Auto Speaker Select (PGM111-Button 1)
Ringing Line Preference (PGM 112-Button 7)
CO/IP
CO Ring Assignments (PGM 144)
SYSTEM
Ring Line Preference Priority (PGM 173)
Related Features

Prime Line Immediately/Delayed

Automatic Speaker Select
Hardware
183
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.67
Issue 1.0
Speed Dial
2.67.1
Display Security
Description
Station and System Speed Dial numbers may be programmed so that the telephone number
digits are not displayed on the LCD of iPECS IP and LDP Phones when the Speed Dial is
selected.
Operation
To assign Display Security to a Speed Dial number
1. Dial “*” as the first digit of the Speed Dial number.
Conditions
1. The number is displayed when programming the Speed Dial number.
2. Display Security does not affect the SMDR output.
3. Display Security is provided on all outside calls including calls that are transferred or
recall.
4. An “*” in any digit position other than the first, will activate Pulse to Tone Switchover.
Programming
Related Features

Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover

Speed Dial
Hardware
184
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.67.2
Issue 1.0
Speed Dial Pause Insertion
Description
A pause dialing command may be inserted in a Station or System Speed Dial number. When
encountered, the system will stop dialing the Speed Dial number for the assigned “pause”
duration. You can insert multiple pauses into a Speed Dial number. The pause feature is often
used to allow external network equipment time to connect and deliver dial-tone.
Operation
System
Pause operation is automatic when encountered; see Station or System Speed Dial for pause
entry
Conditions
1. The timed pause is used only with analog CO Lines.
Programming
SYSTEM
Pause Timer (PGM 181-Button 10)
Related Features

Station Speed Dial

System Speed Dial
Hardware
185
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.67.3
Issue 1.0
Station Speed Dial
Description
You can store commonly dialed numbers for easy access using Station Speed Dial. With the
eMG80, your Station has access to 100 Speed Dial numbers each stored in a “bin”. Each Speed
Dial number can be up to 23 digits in length and may include special instruction codes.
Special instruction codes available are:
‘*’ as 1st digit
Activate Display Security, do not display number.
‘*’ not 1st digit
Switch from Pulse to DTMF dialing
[DND]
Insert a Flash command
st
[DND] as 1 digit
Switch to {Keypad Facility}
Flash as 1st digit
Activate dial tone detect.
[MESSAGE/CALLBACK]
Insert pause dialing command..
Your iPECS IP and LDP Phone may have a Flex button assigned for One-Touch access to a
specific Speed Dial number. In addition, you may assign a telephone number directly to a Flex
button on your iPECS IP and LDP Phone. In this case, the telephone number is allocated to the
highest numbered Station Speed Dial bin you have available.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {STATION SPEED DIAL} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [SPEED] + Station Speed Dial bin number +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To dial using a Station Speed Dial with a [SPEED] button
1. Lift handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the desired bin number (00-99).
To program a Station Speed Dial number using the [SPEED] button
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the Speed Dial bin number (00-99).
4. Press select a Line button or dial a Line access code.
5. Dial the number to be stored.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
7. If desired, enter a name, see alphanumeric entry chart below.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
iPECS IP Phones with 3-Soft buttons
To dial using a Station Speed Dial using an LIP 8000 series phones with soft buttons
1. Press the [DIR] soft button.
2. Press the [SPEED] soft button.
3. Dial the desired bin number (00-99).
186
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
To program a Station Speed Dial number using an LIP-8000 series phones with soft buttons
1. Press the [DIR] soft button.
2. Press the [SPEED] soft button.
3. Press the [ADD] soft button.
4. Dial the Speed Dial bin number (00-99).
5. Press Line button or dial the Line access code.
6. Dial the number to be stored.
7. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
8. If desired, enter a name, see alphanumeric entry chart below.
9. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
SLT
To dial using a Station Speed Dial
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial ‘558’, the SLT Speed Dial access code.
3. Dial the desired bin number (00-99).
To program a Station Speed Dial number
1. Dial 561, the SLT Programming code.
2. Dial 555, the SLT Speed Dial access code.
3. Dial the Speed Dial bin number (00-99).
4. Dial the Line access code.
5. Dial the number to be stored.
6. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
7. If desired, enter a name, see alphanumeric entry chart below.
8. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
9. Alphanumeric characters may be entered to name the Speed Dial number using the
chart below.
ALPHANUMERIC DIAL-PAD ENTRIES
1
4
7
*
Q – 11
Z – 12
. – 13
1 – 10
G – 41
H - 42
I - 43
4 - 40
P - 71
R - 72
S - 73
Q - 7*
7 - 70
Blank - *1
: - *2
, - *3
2
5
8
0
187
A - 21
B - 22
C - 23
2 - 20
J - 51
K - 52
L - 53
5 - 50
T - 81
U - 82
V - 83
8 - 80
3
0-00
#
6
9
D - 31
E - 32
F - 33
3 - 30
M - 61
N - 62
O - 63
6 - 60
W - 91
X - 92
Y - 93
Z - 9#
9 - 90
#
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Conditions
1. Accessing an empty Speed Dial bin will return error tone.
2. A Speed Dial number uses a specific Line/or Line from a Group assigned in the Speed
Dial bin. If the assigned line is busy, a line from the same group will be selected. If all
lines in the group are busy, the user may queue for the next available line.
3. All Speed Dial numbers are stored in memory protected from power loss.
4. For iPECS IP and LDP phones, a call placed with Speed Dial will appear under the
Flex button assigned for the Line, Line Group, or the general Line appearance Loop
button, as appropriate for the station Flex button configuration.
5. You may pre-select a Line for a Speed Dial number, overriding the Line assignment in
the Speed Dial bin.
6. A name can be entered for a Speed Dial number to permit access from the Dial-byName directory.
7. If a Speed Dial number contains a “Dial Tone Detect” command, Flash as the first entry,
and dial tone detect is enabled for the Line, the system must detect dial tone before
dialing the Speed Dial number.
Programming
SYSTEM
CO Dial Tone Detect (PGM 160-Button 3)
Related Features

CO Line Flash

Dial-by-Name

Display Security

Keypad Facility

LNR (Last Number Redial)

Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover

Save Number Redial (SNR)

Speed Dial Pause Insertion

System Speed Dial

Flex Button Direct Speed Dial Assignment
Hardware
188
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.67.4
Issue 1.0
System Speed Dial
Description
Commonly dialed numbers can be stored by the System Attendant or by the Administrator in Web
Admin for easy access by stations allowed use of System Speed Dial bins. With eMG80, up to
3000 System Speed Dial numbers are available. Each Speed Dial number can be up to 23
characters in length and may include special instruction codes.
Special instruction codes available are:
‘*’ as 1st digit
Activate Display Security.
Flash as 1st digit
Activate dial tone detect.
[DND]
Insert a Flash command.
‘*’ not 1st digit
Switch from Pulse to DTMF dialing.
[MESSAGE/CALLBACK]
Insert a pause dialing command.
You may assign a Flex button of your iPECS IP or LDP Phone for One-Touch access to a
specific System Speed Dial bin.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {SYSTEM SPEED DIAL} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [SPEED] + System Speed Dial bin number +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To dial using a System Speed Dial using a [SPEED] button
1. Lift handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the desired bin number (2000-4999)
To dial a System Speed Dial number using an LIP-8000 series phone with soft buttons
1. Press the [DIR] soft button.
2. Press the [SPEED] soft button.
3. Dial the desired bin number (2000-4999)
SLT
To dial using a System Speed Dial
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial “558”, the SLT Speed Dial access code.
3. Dial the desired bin number (2000-4999)
189
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Attendant
To program a System Speed Dial number
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial the Speed Dial bin number (2000-4999)
4. Press the Line button or dial the Line access code.
5. Dial the number to be stored.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
7. If desired, enter a name, see alphanumeric entry chart under Station Speed Dial.
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To enter a Station Speed Dial number using an LIP-8000 series phone with soft buttons
1. Press the [DIR] soft button.
2. Press the [SPEED] soft button.
3. Press the [ADD] soft button
4. Dial the Speed Dial bin number(2000-4999)
5. Press the {LINE} button or dial the Line access code.
6. Dial the number to be stored.
7. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
8. If desired, enter a name, see alphanumeric entry chart under Station Speed Dial.
9. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. Accessing an empty Speed Dial bin will return error tone.
2. A Speed Dial number uses a specific Line/or Line from a group assigned in the Speed
Dial bin. If the assigned Line is busy, a Line from the same group will be selected. If all
Lines in the group are busy, the user may queue for the next available Line.
3. All Speed Dial numbers are stored in memory protected from power loss.
4. For iPECS IP and LDP phones, a call placed with Speed Dial will appear under the
Flex button assigned for the Line, Line Group, or the general Line appearance [LOOP]
button, as appropriate for the station Flex button configuration.
5. The user may pre-select an outside Line for a Speed Dial number, overriding the
assignment in the Speed Dial bin.
6. A name can be entered for a Speed Dial number to permit access from the Dial-byName directory.
7. If a Speed Dial number contains a “Dial Tone Detect” command (Flash as the first
entry) and dial tone detect is enabled for the Line, the system must detect dial tone
before dialing the Speed Dial number.
Programming
STATION
Speed Dial Access (PGM 112-Button 8)
190
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
SYSTEM
CO Dial Tone Detect (PGM 160-Button 3)
TABLES
System Speed Zone (PGM 232)
Related Features

CO Line Flash

Dial-by-Name

Display Security

Keypad Facility

LNR (Last Number Redial)

Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover

Save Number Redial (SNR)

Speed Dial Pause Insertion

System Speed Dial

System Speed Zone (Groups)
Hardware
191
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.67.5
Issue 1.0
System Speed Zone (Groups)
Description
System Speed Dial bins can be divided into zones or groups. iPECS systems have 10 zones
available. To access a Speed Dial bin assigned to a zone, the station must be allowed access to
the Speed Dial Zone.
Each zone can be assigned to apply COS (Class of Service) dialing restrictions to the Speed Dial
numbers in the zone. When assigned, the system will apply the Station and Line COS (Class of
Service) to calls using Speed Dial numbers in the zone.
Operation
Refer to System Speed Dial for operation.
Conditions
1. The conditions of System Speed Dial apply to System Speed Dial numbers assigned
to a zone.
2. A station not assigned access to a zone will receive error tone when trying to access a
System Speed Dial number in the zone.
3. The COS (Class of Service) is applied to the Speed Dial number based on the active
service mode, Day/Timed or Night.
Programming
STATION
Speed Dial Access (PGM 112-Button 8)
TABLES
System Speed Zone (PGM 232)
Related Features

System Speed Dial

Class of Service
Hardware
192
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.68
Issue 1.0
Station Call Coverage
Description
The Call Coverage feature permits your iPECS IP or LDP Phone to receive ring and answer calls
directed to a covered station. This feature is generally employed to allow a Secretarial answering
position to cover calls to other stations. When a covered station rings, the {CALL COVERAGE}
button LED will flash and the covering station may receive ring (immediate or delayed) for the call.
The covering station can answer the call using the {CALL COVERAGE} button, terminating ring
at other stations. Once answered, the LED of {CALL COVERAGE} buttons for the station at
other covering stations will extinguish.
Operation of this feature requires a {CALL COVERAGE} button at the covering iPECS IP or LDP
Phone and the covered station must activate call coverage. A station can have multiple Call
Coverage buttons each covering a different station and multiple stations can have a Call
Coverage button for a given station.
Call Coverage has several options, as below that are configured in the system database.

Call Coverage On Busy

Call Coverage Through Mobile

Call Coverage Wake-Up call

Call Coverage Ring and Delay Ring
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {CALL COVERAGE} button at the covering station
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “67” + covered Station number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate Call Coverage at the covered station
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “141”, the Call Coverage code.
3. Dial “1” to enable or “0” to disable Call Coverage.
To assign ring for a {CALL COVERAGE} button
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “142”, the Call Coverage Ring code.
3. Dial the delay in ring cycles (“0”-“9”).
4. When a covered station receives a call, the covering station will receive the following
display:
CALL FOR STA xxxx
FROM yyyy time
193
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Conditions
1. An iPECS IP or LDP Phone user may cover for an SLT or other stations. However,
since a Flex button is required, an SLT cannot provide coverage for other stations.
2. When off-hook or in DND, the covering station will only receive a visual indication of
the call from the LED of the {CALL COVERAGE} button and display, no off-hook ring
is provided.
3. The {CALL COVERAGE} button will provide an appearance for Lines that do not
appear on the covering station except for Private Lines. To cover for Private Lines, the
covering station must have an appearance and be allowed access to the Private Line.
4. Call Coverage attributes can be assigned either by the covered station user or in the
system database.
5. A station cannot provide call coverage for a station to which it is linked.
Programming
STATION
Call Coverage Enable (PGM 111-Button 12)
Call Coverage Delay Ring (PGM 111-Button 13)
Call Coverage On Busy (Web PGM 111, OFF/ON)
Call Coverage Through Mobile Ext (Web 111-113 , OFF/ON)
Call Coverage On Busy Range (Web 111-113, External Call
Only/ External and Internal Call)
Call Coverage Delay Ring Method (Web 111-113, by
Originator/by Member)
Call Coverage For Wakeup Ring (Web 111-113, OFF/ON)
Call Coverage Ring Type on Member (Web 111-113,
Silence/Normal Ring)
Related Features
Hardware
194
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.69
Issue 1.0
Station Groups
Description
Stations can be grouped for incoming call routing and Call Pick-up purposes. Ten types of
groups can be defined:

Circular

Terminal

ACD

Ring

Pick-Up

External Voice Mail

Integrated Voice Mail

Feature Server UMS Group

Net VM (Centralized External VM)

Unified Communication Solution Server
Circular Station Group
In Circular Hunt, calls to a station in the group will go to the station, if unavailable or unanswered
in the hunt no answer time; the call will be directed to the next station defined in the group. The
call will continue to hunt until each station in the group has been tried. The call remains at the last
station or passes to a designated overflow station or group.
A Circular Station Group can be assigned with a pilot number (the Station Group Number) so that
calls to the pilot number will hunt. In this case, the call will be directed to the first station in the
group and, if needed, hunt through each station in the group until reaching the last station. The
call may remain at the last station, passed to an overflow destination or sent to a voice mailbox.
Terminal Station Group
Calls to a station in a Terminal Station Group that encounter an unavailable or unanswered status
will be routed through the hunt process. The call will proceed to the next listed station in the group
until reaching the last listed station in the group. The call may remain at the last station or be
routed to an Overflow destination.
A Terminal Hunt Group can be assigned with a pilot number (the Station Group number) so that
calls to the pilot number will hunt.
195
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
ACD Station Group
Calls can be sent to an ACD group by dialing the Station Group Number or assigning outside
Lines to ring directly to the Station Group. Calls are directed to the station in the group that has
been idle for the longest continuous time, Uniform Call Distribution. If all stations are busy or
unavailable when the call is received, the call may be routed to an alternate location or may
continue to wait (queue) for an available station in the group. After queuing to the group, the caller
may be routed to an overflow destination, which can be a Station, Station Group or Voice Mailbox.
An ACD supervisor can be assigned to monitor the group and act to oversee operations of the
group. The ACD Supervisor can print group statistics and activate alternate routing as well as
assist agents.
Ring Station Group
A call to any station in the Group will cause all stations in the group to ring and any station in the
group may answer the call. If the call remains unanswered beyond the Overflow timer, the call is
sent to the Overflow destination, which can be a Station, Station Group or Voice Mailbox.
A Ring Group station can receive indication of Ring Group call while busy on another call in the
form of Muted Ring. The call can be answered and Automatic Hold is supported.
Multiple calls can be received by a Station Ring Group and can be serviced in any order.
External AA/VM Station Group
This group is assigned to support an external Auto Attendant Voice Mail system that employs
SLT ports to interface to the iPECS. An External AA/VM group is assigned for either circular or
terminal hunt. The External AA/VM may employ either in-band signaling over the audio channel
or SMDI protocol with a signaling connection to the system RS-232 channel.
Pick-Up Station Group
A station can be assigned to a Call Pick-Up group and then may pick-up (answer) calls to other
stations in the group employing the system’s Group Call Pick-Up feature.
Integrated AA/VM Group
Incoming calls can be directed to one of 70 user-recorded System announcements, which may
request further routing instructions from the user in the form of caller dialed digits. These digits
are employed to route the caller as defined in the system CCR (Caller Controlled Routing) Tables.
The integrated AA/VM Group Voice Mail application receives calls forwarded or recalling from a
station. Such calls will receive the user’s pre-recorded greeting and may leave voice messages.
The user may call the integrated AA/VM Group to review and manage the integrated Voice Mail
application.
196
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Feature Server UMS Group
The Feature Server is a PC based TAPI application with high-end Auto Attendant, Voice Mail and
Unified Messaging Service (Voice/Fax and e-mail). The iPECS Feature Server receives calls,
plays announcements, stores voice messages and forwards them as wave file attachments to the
user’s e-mail. The application also receives Faxes and forwards them as attachments to e-mail.
The Text-to-Speech option permits listening to e-mails as well as voice mails.
Net VM
This group is defined to support a Centralized Voice Mail system for a networked environment. At
supported systems, the group is used to handle the AA/VM requirements from the central iPECS.
The Net VM group may be an external VM system or the iPECS Feature Server.
UCS Group
This group is defined to support the Unified Communication Solution available with the iPECS
systems.
Group Announcements
Station Group routing can be augmented with System announcements recorded in the integrated
AA/VM memory. Callers are routed to one of several user-recorded System announcements. The
system answers the call and plays the defined 1st announcement to the caller. The
announcement may provide the caller with routing options for Caller Controlled Routing. The 1st
announcement may be “Guaranteed” meaning it will play in full before routing the call. A 2nd
announcement can be provided to the caller should queue timers expire.
Operation
Conditions
1. The eMG80 supports 40 Station Hunt Groups with up to 70 members for each group.
2. Station Group calls are not routed to member stations that are in DND.
3. When a member of a Circular, Terminal, ACD or Ring Group activates Call Forward,
calls to the group may still route to the member based on the Member Forward option.
4. A call transferred to a Station Group will follow the routing for the group and will not
initiate the Transfer Recall process.
5. Calls to a Station Group receive either ring-back tone or MOH while queued to the
group.
6. Calls, which are not answered in the Overflow time, are routed to the defined Overflow
destination, station, group, etc. If no Overflow destination is defined, the call is dropped
after expiration of the Overflow timer.
7. One of the 70 System announcements may be assigned as the Overflow destination.
These announcements can have a corresponding Caller Controlled Routing table
allowing the caller to enter digits for further routing.
197
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Programming
STATION GROUPS
Station Group Assignment (PGM 190)
Station Group Attributes (PGM 191)
Pickup Group Assignment (PGM 192)
Related Features

Automatic Hold

Automatic Call Distribution

External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Group Call Pick-Up

MOH (Music-On-Hold)

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware
198
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.70
Issue 1.0
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
2.70.1
Call Cost Display
Description
Each SMDR call record includes a “Cost” field, which is a calculated estimate for the cost of the
call. The call cost updates in real-time and displays in the LCD of iPECS IP and LDP Phones in
place of the call duration.
The cost is determined by:

Fixed charge per “Call Meter Pulse”,

ISDN Advice of Charge or

Estimated cost updated based on Elapsed Call Timer and assigned costing.
The technique selected to determine cost is based on the type of facility (analog CO, ISDN, or
VoIP), services provided by the carrier and the system database.
Analog CO
Where “Call Metering Pulse” service is available from the carrier, the system will apply the
“SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse” and the “SMDR Decimal” to the Call Metering received to estimate
the call cost.
When no “Metering Type” is selected, the system call duration is used with the cost/pulse and
decimal values to estimate the cost of the call. The cost is updated periodically using the
“Elapsed Call Timer” duration.
ISDN
ISDN providers may support “Advice of Charge” information in the ISDN Facility Message. If
assigned, the system will employ this information to display and output the call cost.
VoIP
For VoIP calls, the system employs the call duration, cost/pulse and decimal values to establish
the call cost estimate. The cost is updated periodically at intervals of the “Elapsed Call Timer”.
Operation
System
Call cost is estimated automatically and output to iPECS IP and LDP Phone displays and the
SMDR RS-232 port
Conditions
1. The call cost display begins after the “SMDR Start Timer” expires, if enabled, or at
receipt of the first Call Meter Pulse.
199
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2. Once connected to the system, the call duration includes the total time the call is
connected including periods when the call is on hold, in queue, etc.
3. To enable Call Cost Display, the “SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse” and “SMDR Decimal”
must be assigned. When not assigned, the call duration is provided by the system.
Programming
CO/IP
Metering Unit (PGM 142-Button 3)
SYSTEM
SMDR Cost per Unit Pulse (PGM 177-Button 10)
SMDR Decimal Location (PGM 177-Button 11)
SMDR Start Timer (PGM 177-Button 12)
Elapsed Call Timer (PGM 180-Button 19)
Related Features

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Lost Call Recording

Traffic Analysis

Outside Call Warning Tone Timer
Hardware

RS-323 device to capture SMDR
200
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.70.2
Issue 1.0
Lost Call Recording
Description
Incoming calls where the caller hangs up before answer or while in a hold state are considered
Abandoned or Lost calls. Special SMDR call records are provided for lost calls in real-time, as
they occur, and a summary Lost Call count report is available on demand.
The real-time Lost Call records provide details on the called party, when and how long the call
rang or was on hold before being abandoned, etc. Description of the record details is provided in
the following charts. As noted in the charts, the dialed number field indicates the type of call and
the ring or hold duration before the call was abandoned. The first character in the NUM I field is
the status of the call when abandoned:
R
normal ring to a station,
G
ring to a station group and
H
call placed in a hold state, including Transfer hold.
STA
CO
TIME
START
DIAL/CLI/CPN
NUM-1
EXT
31
00:00
14/05/02 15:45
R RING 01:35

ACCOUNT DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
Incoming call on CO Line 31 received on May 14, 2002 at 3:45 pm, rang the
assigned stations for 1 minute and 35 seconds.
STA
CO
TIME
START
DIAL/CLI/CPN
NUM-1
101
31
00:00
14/05/02 16:45
R RING 02:03

COST
COST
ACCOUNT DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
Station 101 rang for an incoming call on CO Line 31 on May 14, 2002 at 4:45 pm,
rang for 2 minutes and 3 seconds.
STA
CO
TIME
START
DIAL/CLI/CPN
NUM-1
101
02
00:00
15/05/02 09:35
R 100 RING
COST
ACCOUNT DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
00:49

Incoming call on CO Line 02 on May 15, 2002 at 9:35 am forward from station 101 to
station 100 and ring for 49 seconds.
201
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
STA
CO
TIME
START
DIAL/CLI/CPN
NUM-1
104
05
00:00
16/05/02 11:06
G401 RING
Issue 1.0
COST
ACCOUNT DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
01:32

Incoming call on CO Line 05 on May 16, 2002 at 11:06 am routed to station 104 of
Station Group 401 and ring for 1 minute and 49 seconds.
STA
CO
TIME
401
17
00:00

START
DIAL/CLI/CPN
NUM-1
Incoming call on CO Line 17 on May 16, 2002 at 2:03 pm routed to Station Group
401 and ring for 39 seconds.
CO
TIME
START
DIAL/CLI/CPN
NUM-1
100
01
03:32
16/05/02 15:30
H100 03:02
COST
ACCOUNT DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
Call on CO Line 1 on May 16, 2002 at 3:30 pm placed on hold by station 100 for 3
minutes and 2 seconds had total duration of 3 minutes and 32 seconds.
STA
CO
TIME
129
23
00:45

ACCOUNT DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
16/05/02 14:03 G401 RING 00:39
STA

COST
START
DIAL/CLI/CPN
NUM-1
COST
ACCOUNT DIAL/CLI/CPN
CODE
NUM II
18/05/02 08:40 H100 RING 00:33
Call on CO Line 23 on May, 18, 2002 at 8:40 am was transferred by station 100 to
station 129 was on hold for 33 seconds.
The output for the Lost Call summary count report is shown in the figure below:
Lost call count start time: 05/01/02 09:31
Current time 26/04/02 16:32
Total Lost call count until now: 121
202
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Operation
System Attendant
To print the summary Lost Call Count report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0115”, the Lost Call Count report code.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To reset the Lost Call summary Count
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0116”, the Lost Call Count Reset code.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. When the Lost Call Count is reset, the SMDR port will provide a “count reset” message.
2. Individual Lost Call records are only available in real-time and not on-demand.
3. “Print Incoming Calls” and “Print Lost Calls” must be enabled in the SMDR Attributes
for the system to output real-time Lost Call records and for the Lost Call Count
summary report.
4. The fields of a Lost Call Record are the same as a normal SMDR Call Record.
Programming
SYSTEM
SMDR Attributes (PGM 177)
Related Features

Call Cost Display

SMDR Call Records

Traffic Analysis
Hardware

RS-323 device to capture SMDR
203
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.70.3
Issue 1.0
SMDR Call Records
Description
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) provides detailed information on incoming and
outgoing calls. Assignable options in the system database permit recording of all external calls, all
external outgoing calls or toll calls, calls that exceed a fixed duration and intercom calls. Call
records are output either upon completion of the call (real-time) or in response to a request from
the System Attendant. SMDR may be sent periodically via e-mail to a defined e-mail address.
The SMDR record output for external calls is as shown in the figure below. There are two flexible
fields, Field I and Field II. Each Field is defined to show Ring duration, CLI (Caller Id) or CPN
(Called Party Number).
NO
STA
CO
TIME
XXXX
SSSS
BBB
DD:DD
DIAL/CLI/CPN
START
COST
NUM-1
FF/FF/FF HCCCCCCCCCC
sssss
EE:EE
CCCCCCCC
ACCOUNT
CODE
Aaaaaaaa
aaaa
DIAL/CLI/CPN DC
NUM II
Hccccccccccc
ccccccc
The various fields or items for a Call Record are:
NO
SMDR record number, optional output, (PGM 177-Button 23)
STA
3 or 4 digit station number
CO
2 or 3 digit CO Line number
Time
Call duration in minutes and seconds
Start
Date and time call was placed/received
NUM I
Flex Field I, for outgoing call displays dialed number, for incoming call
displays Ring duration, CLI or CPN (PGM 177-Button 20)
Cost
Cost of Call
Account Code
Account code entered for call
NUM II
Flex Field II for incoming call, displays Ring duration, CLI or CPN or
blank, (PGM 177-Button 23)
DC
Disconnect Cause, optional output (PGM 177-Button 24-5), with value:
01~7F: Follow cause value of Q.931 specification,
81: Disconnected, toll restricted
84/85: Disconnected, disconnect supervision
0: Other
The SMDR record output for internal calls is as shown in the figure and explained in the chart
below.
---- Site Name :
STA
-------
CO
-------
TIME
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------DIALED
ACCOUNT
CPN
START
COST
NUMBER
CODE
NUMBER
-------
---------------------
--------------
100
00:00:01
06/11/08 10:53
E100
105
00:00:00
06/11/08 14:13
S103
110
00:00:10
06/11/08 11:05
E Conf Rm 1
120
00:00:03
06/11/08 11:11
P123
204
--------------
--------------
--------------
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
STA
DIALED
Issue 1.0
Meaning
1) Station 100 called station 101 and station 101 answered.
2) In a conference, station 100 was a conference master, station 101
was a conference member.
100
E101
105
S103
Station 105 sent an internal SMS to station 103.
110
E Conf Rm 1
Station 110 was the member of conference room 1.
120
P123
Station 120 paged station 123.
Operation
System
For real-time SMDR, records are output after completion of the call as shown in the figures
above
System Attendant
To print SMDR records
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0111”, the SMDR print code.
3. Enter the desired station range.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To delete stored records
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0112”, the SMDR delete code.
3. Enter the desired station range.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To abort SMDR printing
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0114”, the SMDR abort code.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. For SMDR, if the first dialed digit(s) match the programmed LD (Long Distance) code
or the number of dialed digits exceeds the LD digit count, the call is considered an LD
call. When behind a PBX, LD determination is made only if a PBX Trunk Access code
is dialed as the first digit(s).
2. Except for DISA calls, the duration of ring for an incoming call is provided in the Dialed
number field.
3. A header, including the assigned “Customer Site Id” is output after two blank lines and
is repeated every 66th line.
4. The SMDR output is a simple ASCII stream of up to 80 characters per line.
5. When enabled, SMDR call record timing begins after the “SMDR Start Timer” expires
and ends at call completion.
205
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
6. For security, if an Authorization code is entered as the Account code, the call record
will show “STA-P” and the station number, or “SYS-P” and the Authorization code
index number in place of the Account code.
7. For incoming calls, the “NUM I” and “NUM II” fields will display the assigned data item
– Ring Service time, CLI, or CPN. For outgoing calls, the NUM I field will always
display the dialed number, user or system.
Programming
SYSTEM
SMDR Attributes (PGM 177)
Field I (PGM 177-Button 20)
Field II (PGM 177-Button 22)
Print Serial No (PGM 177-Button 23)
SMDR DISC Cause (PGM 177-Button 24-5)
SMDR ICM SAVE (PGM177-Button 24-3)
SMDR ICM PRINT (PGM177-Button 24-4)
Related Features

Call Cost Display

Lost Call Recording

Traffic Analysis

Authorization Codes (Password)
Hardware

RS-323 device to capture SMDR
206
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.71
Issue 1.0
System Administration
2.71.1
Keyset Administration
Description
The system database can be accessed and modified with the keypad and Flex buttons of an
iPECS IP or LDP Phone. The display of the Phone is employed to view items in the iPECS
database. You may be required to enter a password for access to Admin. Based on the Multilevel password, you will have access to specified system database program codes in the Web
Admin.
For detailed information on database administration and maintenance, refer to the iPECS eMG80
Administration &Programming Manual.
Operation
Operation is detailed in the iPECS eMG80 Administration and Programming Manual.
Conditions
1. Only stations assigned with Admin access can enter and change the system database
items. As a default, all iPECS IP and LDP Phones can access the database.
2. The Keyset has access to most of the system database. However, certain
characteristics can be modified through Web Admin.
Programming
STATION
Admin Access (PGM 113-Button 1)
SYSTEM
Admin Access Authority (Web only)
System Password (PGM 162)
Related Features

Web Administration

Multi-Level Admin Access
Hardware
207
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.71.2
Issue 1.0
Multi-Level Admin Access
Description
Access to the Web Admin database is password protected. Up to three (3) levels of access to the
database can be established by assigning a different password to each level. The Maintenance
level has access to the entire database, all maintenance routines and defines the Admin Access
Authority of the two remaining passwords. The User password can only access the defined
database items and cannot access the Station Program pages. The Admin password has access
to the defined database items as well as Station Program pages. In Web Admin, a user of the
Maintenance password establishes the Admin Program Codes and Web pages available to each
password level.
Operation
Detailed operation of Admin access and assigning access authority for each level is given in the
iPECS eMG80 Admin & Maintenance Manual.
Conditions
1. Admin Access Authority is defined only in the Web Admin; it cannot be defined when
using Keyset Admin.
2. Admin Access Authority applies to all Admin access whether accessed via an iPECS
IP or LDP Phone, ISDN, or IP channel.
Programming
STATION
Admin Access (PGM 113-Button 1)
SYSTEM
Admin Access Authority (Web only)
System Password (PGM 162)
Related Features

Keyset Administration

Web Administration
Hardware
208
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.71.3
Issue 1.0
Web Administration
Description
The system database is accessed and modified via an iPECS IP or LDP Phone, the LAN
interface or an ISDN BRI/PRI line. Both the LAN and ISDN access the system’s Web server,
which delivers the database as a set of Web pages to the user’s Web browser. Under the proper
conditions, both also allow for remote access to the system database.
For remote access with the LAN interface, the system must be assigned a remotely accessible IP
address. The IP address should be fixed either as a public IP address or through a NAPT server
with port forwarding. The browser should be pointed to the system's IP address and the TCP port
assigned in the system database.
For the ISDN BRI/PRI, a PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) connection can be established between a
standard ISDN modem and the iPECS BRI/PRI board. The connection can be set-up over a
normal or DID BRI/PRI line. The system negotiates access using 2 User Ids and matching
passwords assigned in the database. In addition, for DID access the Called Party number must
match the assigned system PPP destination. Once a connection is established over the BRI/PRI,
the user’s Web browser can be opened and pointed to the system’s IP address and assigned port
for access to the database.
When accessed, the system will deliver the iPECS Admin and Maintenance Web page. From this
page, selecting Admin & Maintenance will return the login page where the user must enter a
password that matches an assigned password. Based on the password entered, the user is
permitted access to specified system program codes.
For detailed information on database administration and maintenance, refer to the iPECS
Administration & Programming Manual.
Operation
Operation is detailed in the iPECS eMG80 Administration and Programming Manual.
Conditions
1. For Web Admin, the password can be encrypted using the Ericsson-LG Java Virtual
Encryption plug-in. A Java Virtual Machine (MS or Sun) must be installed in the user’s
PC to support password encryption.
2. If Web admin login fails five consecutive (5) times within 1-minute, then login is blocked
for a ten (10) minute period and a “blocked access” log is stored in Http Admin Log.
Programming
NUMBERING PLAN
SYSTEM
System IP Address Plan (PGM Code 102)
Web Server TCP Port (PGM 161-Button 14)
WEB Password Encryption (PGM 161-Button 15)
Admin Access Authority (Web only)
209
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
ISDN/ICLID 1 BRI/PRI PPP Web Admin Attributes (PGM 205)
Web Login ID Usage (PGM 160-Btn24-Btn12)
System Password (PGM 162)
Related Features

Keyset Administration

Multi-Level Admin Access
Hardware
2.71.4
Web User Manual
Description
The iPECS User Guide is available on-line as part of the iPECS Web services. The iPECS main
Web page permits access to the Web User guide. The guide is an html document, which can be
modified by replacing the HTML ROM image in the system with an external ROM image in
accordance with the appropriate Ericsson-LG R & D STI.
Operation
Operation is detailed in the iPECS eMG80 Admin and Maintenance Manual.
Conditions
1. Access to the User Guide is not password protected.
2. To support local languages, the HTML ROM image of a translated Web User guide
may be loaded into system memory.
Programming
Related Features

Web Administration
Hardware
210
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.72
Issue 1.0
System Alarm Notification Control
Description
The system has several fault alarms that can be enabled or disabled. When enabled, a Station
within each Zone can be assigned to receive a notification of the alarm event. Alarms that can be
enabled are:

Emergency call placed

Digital (BRI or E1/PRI) Line fault

SIP Trunk/Extension registration fault.
Assigned stations receive the fault Alarm Signal, either a single tone burst repeated at 1-minute
intervals or a continuous tone. The Alarm Signal may be terminated at the phone by dialing the
Alarm Stop code or, if assigned, pressing the {ALARM STOP} button. To rearm the Alarm
function, the alarm condition must be cleared and the Alarm signal terminated.
When enabled, the Emergency call or fault event causes an alarm ring at the Station. The
Station can terminate the fault Alarm notification
Operation
System
At detection of fault or Emergency Call, the Alarm signal is sent to assigned stations.
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as an {ALARM STOP} button to terminate the Alarm Signal:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “565” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To terminate an Alarm Signal, while idle:
1. Dial the Flex Numbering Plan code “565”, confirmation tone is received and the
Alarm Signal is terminated. If the alarm condition is cleared, the system will
automatically rearm the alarm monitoring.
Or,
Press the {ALARM STOP} button.
Conditions
1. The station must terminate the Alarm signal at their phone. However, a Main
Attendant can terminate the Alarm signal at the System Attendant.
2. When no station is assigned to receive an Alarm, the System Attendant will receive the
notification.
3. For Digital Line and SIP registration faults, the station in the Zone associated with first
Line of the BRI/E1/PRI interface or SIP channel receives the alarm signal.
211
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4. The notification process for Emergency calls follows the Zone from which the call was
made and the System Attendant. The notified station can review the history of
Emergency calls only from the Zone. The System Attendant can review Emergency
Call history for all Zones.
Programming
SYSTEM
Emergency Call Notify (PGM 163-Button 5)
DCOB Fault Notify (PGM163-Button 6)
SIP Registration Fault Notify (PGM163-Button 7)
ZONE DATA
Emergency Call Notify Station (PGM 439-Web only)
DCOB Fault Notify Station (PGM 439-Web only)
SIP Registration Fault Notify Station (PGM 439-Web only)
Related Features

Emergency Call

Emergency Call Attendant Alert

SIP Service
Hardware
212
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.73
Issue 1.0
System Networking
2.73.1
Distributed Control Network
Description
In the Distributed Control Network, each iPECS system maintains control over the devices
registered to it. The networked systems communicate employing QSig over ISDN Lines or H.450
over IP Lines for basic networking capabilities and the proprietary iPECS protocol for the
advanced networking features. QSIG employs ISDN PRI channels only with support for ESTI
standards ETS 300-237/238/256/257/260/261/361/362/363/364.
As a member of the network, you will have access to resources of other systems in the network
such as outside Lines, Stations and Paging. A Network Numbering Plan determines the system
call routing; your dialed digits are compared with the Numbering Plan Table for routing. Station to
station calling, Call Transfers, Conferencing, Call Back, Call Waiting/Camp-on, Call Forward, and
DND operation are transparent to the users although conditions noted below may apply.
In addition, other features and functions as detailed in the following sections are available to you
as part of the distributed network environment.
Operation
Operation of Distributed Networking is automatic when configured
Conditions
1. To use the networking features, the software lock-key installation is required. Two
types of lock-keys relate to the networking protocols. One is for QSIG based
networking protocol, and the other is for VoIP based networking. To obtain a lock-key,
contact your local Ericsson-LG representative with the system serial number.
2. Each station must have a unique station number of up to eight (8) digits, which is
based on their local system Station Numbering Plan.
Station to Station Network Call
1. The LCD will display the caller’s Name if Calling Name Identification Presentation
(CNIP) is enabled in the Networking parameters and the caller’s Name is assigned in
their eMG80 database.
2. If no idle path is available over the Network, you will hear error tone.
3. Station to Station Network calls always signal in the Tone ring mode and are not
subject to Intercom Caller Controlled ICM Signaling.
4. If a network failure occurs, the system will place an outside call using the Alternate
Speed Dial bin assigned in the Network Numbering Plan that corresponds to the called
user.
5. Station to Station Network calls are subject to the CO Call Restriction Timer.
213
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Call Transfer, Networked Station
1. There are two kinds of standard transfer methods in QSIG and H.450; Transfer by join
and Transfer by rerouting. The main difference is how control of the connecting path
between transferring and transferred station is handled. In case of Transfer by join, an
additional connecting path will be needed to transfer the call to another station. In case
of Transfer by rerouting, a new connecting path is used to transfer the call and old
connecting path of transferring station will be cleared.
2. The transfer will be canceled if you press the flashing {LINE} or the [TRANS/PGM]
button.
3. A call transferred over the network is not subject to Transfer Hold recall back to the
transferring station. However, if the remote system does not respond in the Network
Fault Recall time, you will receive recall for the transferred call.
4. If no idle path is available over the Network, you will receive error tone.
5. The receiving station must be idle, if you attempt to complete a transfer to a network
station which is busy, you will receive error tone.
Network Call Back (Call Completion)
1. A station can leave or have only one callback message, and a new request cancels the
previous Call Back activating a new Call Back request with the busy station.
2. When you call a networked station, if the station is in DND or does not answer, you will
not be able to leave a voice message using the [Message/Call Back] button. In this
case you can leave a voice message only if the called station forwards calls to the
Voice Mail.
3. When you receive Call Back ring, the system dedicates a network path for your call.
You must answer your Call Back ring prior to the expiration of the Network Fault Recall
Timer, the call will be cancelled.
Network Call Offer (Call Waiting/Camp-on)
1. Call Offer is only applied to a station that is busy on a call.
2. If the called station is in a conference or paging, call offer is not available.
Conference
1. Multi-line conference time is not applied on 3 party conference of networking.
2. If any station in the network conference hangs up during the conference, the net
conference will be cancelled and the network path will be cleared.
3. SIP phones cannot initiate a Network Conference.
4. When SIP phone sends an Invite to non-IP phone, the message will be rejected. When
a non-IP phone invites a SIP phone, the normal call setup messages are sent to the
ISP phone instead of Invite Setup message.
Call Forward
1. System does not check the status of diverted-to station that is in DND, CFW or Empty.
DND
1. When a station is in DND mode, the [NET DSS] of DND station will flash if BLF manager
is activated.
214
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Paging
1. The Network Page code must be programmed in the Network Numbering Plan Table
(PGM 324) in the caller’s system.
2. The Network Page code and page destination must be programmed in the Network
Page Table (PGM 325) in the called system.
3. Network Page destination can be Internal, External, or All Call Page.
4. You will receive error tone if there is no idle networking path or if the page destination
is invalid.
5. When employing Network Page, the speakerphone of an iPECS IP or LDP Phone can
be used.
Message Wait
1. When you receive a call from a station in networked system, the caller can leave a
Station Message Wait or Voice Mail message using the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK]
button. In addition, because the network path is considered an outside Line, your
iPECS IP or LDP Phone will receive a CLI Message Wait.
Programming
SYSTEM
Networking Basic Attribute (PGM 320)
Networking CO Line Attribute (PGM 322)
Network Numbering Plan Table (PGM 324)
Network Feature Code Table (PGM 325)
Network CNIP/CONP Enable (PGM 320-Button 3 & 4)
Related Features
Hardware
215
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.73.1.1 BLF Presentation
Description
When systems are networked, the status of stations in one system can be displayed at stations of
other systems in the network. The LED of a {Net DSS} button provides the BLF (idle or busy)
indication for the assigned station. When only two systems are networked, BLF status is provided
directly between the two systems with each serving as the others BLF Manager for the other.
When more than two systems are in a network, the Ericsson-LG BLF Manager application
provides the BLF status across the network. BLF Manager is a Windows® application that
communicates with systems on the network as the BLF Gatekeeper. Networked systems send
regular updates of station status to the BLF Manager. Periodically, the BLF Manager sends a
UDP multi-cast message to all systems on the network. The BLF Manager PC can reside in any
location that has IP access to all systems in the network to receive and send both UDP and TCP
packets.
Operation
Operation of the BLF Manager is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. The BLF Manager GateKeeper is installed as a central function of all systems in a
network and must be able to communicate using UDP and TCP over an IP network
with the other networked systems.
2. The system can provide Net DSS BLF status for all stations.
3. The BLF Manager provides BLF for stations only, status for Lines is not provided
over the network; CO BLF is not supported.
4. The LED of a {Net DSS} button indicates BLF status of busy (LED On), idle (LED
Off) or DND (LED flashing). Ring signals at a station, including recalls, are not
registered across the network and will display as idle.
5. Each system updates the station status to the BLF Manager at intervals of the BLF
status duration.
6. If the BLF Manager is not available on the network, BLF services can be activated
between only two Systems. In this case, employ the Network Numbering Plan to
configure IP address of the networked KSU LAN port as the Destination MPB IP
address. Do not assign an address for the BLF Manager in the Networking
Supplementary Attributes.
Programming
SYSTEM
TCP/UDP Port Assign for BLF (PGM 321-Button 2/3)
BLF Manager IP Address (PGM 321-Button 4)
Duration of BLF Status (PGM 321-Button 5)
DEST SYSTEM IP Address (PGM 324-Button 6)
DEST SYSTEM Port number (PGM 324-Button 7)
Related Features
Hardware

Windows PC running the BLF Manager application
216
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.73.1.2 (CAS) Attendant Call
Description
When you place an Attendant call (dial “0”) from a station in any networked system, the call may
be routed to a Centralized Attendant. The local System Attendant activates Attendant DND,
which routes local Attendant calls to the Central Attendant. The Centralized Attendant must have
a {Net DSS} button for the remote Attendant to receive the calls.
Operation
Local Attendant iPECS IP or LDP Phone
To assign [ATD DND] button:
[TRANS/PGM] + {Flex Button} + [TRANS/PGM] + “83” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To route local Attendant calls to the Central Attendants:
1. Press the {ATD DND} button.
Centralized Attendant iPECS IP or LDP Phone
To answer a remote Attendant call:
1. Answer the call as normal, the {NET DSS} button for the remote Attendant flashes.
Conditions
1. Only DID/DISA calls which are assigned to route only to the Attendant destination are
routed to the Centralized Attendant.
2. The Centralized Attendant can be assigned as a Main Attendant in a networked
system. Also, CO lines may be assigned to ring the Centralized Attendant.
3. A System Attendant cannot be assigned a {NET DSS} button and thus should not be a
Centralized Attendant.
Programming
STATION
Attendant DND Button (PGM 115 – STN PGM 83)
SYSTEM
Attendant Assign (PGM 164)
DID/DISA Destination (PGM 167)
CO Ring Assignment (PGM 144)
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
217
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.73.1.3 Centralized Voice Mail
Description
An external Voice Mail may be attached to a system in a network to provide centralized Voice
Mail services to the stations of all systems in the network. Calls are passed to this central VM
over the network to the Network VM Hunt Group assigned of the central iPECS system. The
Station Group number must be assigned in the Network Numbering Plan code of each networked
system to deliver calls to the central VM properly.
Operation
Refer to the External Voice Mail function in the system features.
Conditions
1. The centralized VM must be configured in the central system to which it is attached as
a Network VM. The Voice Mail Dialing table and other characteristics of the Network
VM are established in the central system.
2. The destination must be defined as part of the network Numbering Plan configuration
for each system that will use the centralized VM except for the central system.
Programming
SYSTEM
Network Numbering Plan Table (PGM 324-Button 6)
Station Groups (PGM 190) – Ext AA/VM Group
Related Features
Hardware
218
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.73.1.4 CO Transit-In
Description
When a DID call is received by a networked system, the system will attempt normal DID call
routing. The ICLID table is examined, followed by the MSN table, then the defined DID number
conversion is completed. The system does a look-up in the Flexible DID Table to identify the
destination. If the number is an extension in a networked system, the system routes the call to the
destination over the appropriate network connection with CLI provided to the called station.
Operation
Operation of Distributed Networking is automatic when configured
Conditions
1. CO Transit-In calls are not subject to recall or time restrictions at the originating system.
2. If no path is available over the network, the caller will receive busy tone.
3. The system, which originally received the call, will generate two SMDR records for the
call, the original incoming call and the transit-call to the destination station.
Programming
SYSTEM
Networking Basic Attribute (PGM 320)
Networking CO Line Attribute (PGM 322)
Network Numbering Plan Table (PGM 324)
Network CNIP/CONP Enable (PGM 320-Button 3 & 4)
Related Features
Hardware
219
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
2.73.1.5 CO Transit-Out
Description
CO Transit-Out increases efficiency of Lines and reduces call costs by routing outgoing calls to
the nearest appropriate point in a network of systems. At one system you can dial the appropriate
Line access code for Lines in the remote system. Codes are assigned in the Network Numbering
Plan at both systems and digit repeating passes the dialed digits to the remote system.
When you dial the code, the local system compares the digits with appropriate local Numbering
Plan codes then to the Network Numbering Plan codes to determine routing. When the number is
found in the Network Numbering Plan table, the call is routed to the designated networked system.
Any digits received are sent to the remote system for proper routing.
Operation
Operation of Distributed Networking is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. To use CO Transit-Out, the networked system user must dial the CO transit-out code;
the CO Transit-Out service is not activated by pressing a CO Line button.
2. The Station COS of the networked system is applied for toll restriction.
3. For CO Transit-Out, any numbering sequence code can be assigned in the Network
Routing Table – Network Numbering Plan (PGM 324). If a conflict exists between the
System and Network Numbering Plans, the System Numbering Plan has priority.
4. The terminating PSTN lines must be assigned as Networked PSTN CO lines in the
terminating system.
5. For proper operation of CO Transit-Out, the Network CO Line type and System Usage
must be assigned as PSTN.
6. While not recommended, a call may be routed to the terminating system through an
ancillary system when a direct network connection is not deployed between the
originating and terminating systems.
7. When enabled in the Network Routing Table – Numbering Plan, you must enter a valid
Station or System Authorization code for access. The associated COS is implemented
for the call.
8. The system, which terminates the call, will display two SMDR records for the call, the
original incoming call from the station number and the transit-out call.
9. The station receives busy tone when a networking path is not available during transitout.
10. In the main system, the attendant must have the CO access authority about the public
connection of figure.
Programming
SYSTEM
Networking CO Line Attribute (PGM 322-Button 4)
Network Numbering Plan Table (PGM 324)
Networking Basic Attribute (PGM 320)
Related Features
Hardware
220
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.74
Issue 1.0
Traffic Analysis
Description
The iPECS monitors, stores and periodically or upon request outputs various traffic statistics
covering system resources. The output from the system can be used to:

Monitor and evaluate system performance

Observe usage trends and recommend possible corrective actions,

Determine possible trunk problems, i.e. blocking level too high, and/or

Recommend system upgrades.
Attendants enable Periodic Reporting. Once enabled, the system continues to monitor and output
the requested report until Periodic Report is disabled. On-demand reports selected by the System
Attendant are output only upon request. The Traffic Report is sent to the defined system RS-232
or TCP port.
System resources covered by Traffic Reports are:

Attendant Traffic Report

Call Summary Report

Hourly Call Report

H/W Unit Usage Summary Report

CO Summary Report

Hourly CO Report
Summary Traffic Reports cover one of five Analysis periods selected at time of print:
1. Today’s peak activity hour (within 24 hours)
2. Yesterday’s peak activity hour (24 hours prior to Today’s activity)
3. Last hour activity
4. Today’s total activity
5. Yesterday’s total activity
Operation
System Attendant
To print the All Periodic Traffic Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0122”, the All Periodic report code.
3. Dial 4 digits (HH – HH).
4. Select Analysis Period (‘1’-‘5’).
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
221
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
To cancel the periodic All Summary Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0123”, the cancel All Summary report code.
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To print a traffic report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the report code, “0121 & 0124” – “0129”.
0121 All Summary Traffic Reports
0124 Attendant Traffic Report
0125 Call Summary Report
0126 Hourly Call Report
0127 Hardware Usage Summary Report
0128 CO Summary Report
0129 Hourly CO Report
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The Print All Summary Traffic Reports generates the Attendant, Call Summary and CO
Summary Traffic Reports.
Programming
SYSTEM
RS-232 Port Settings (PGM 174)
Print Port Selections (PGM 175)
Related Features

SMDR Call Records
Hardware

device to capture reports
222
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.74.1
Issue 1.0
Traffic Analysis, Attendant
Description
The Attendant Traffic Report covers operational statistics for the Attendants. The report outputs
periodically or the Attendant requests output of the report for a defined Analysis period. The
following is a sample report and description of the report fields.
Site Name : abc co
Report Type : Attendant Traffic Report- Today Peak
Date : 06/05/02 08:34
====================================================================================
ATD Meas
----------------------Calls-----------------------------------------Time--------------- Speed ATD
No
Hour
Total
Ans
Abdn
H
Abd
Held
Avail
Talk
Held Noans Ans
Type
100
13:00
104
82
22
3
0
18
10:12 14:21 01:23 00:52 00:23
Sys
101
13:00
90
72
15
1
0
11
12:43 30:12 00:54 00:23 00:21 Main
Field
Description
ATD No
Attendant Station Number
Meas Hour
(Measurement Hour) Hour data accumulation began
Calls Total
Total number of calls, except group & recalls, routed to the Attendant
Calls Ans
(Calls Answered) Calls answered during the Analysis period
Calls Abdn
(Calls Abandoned) Calls abandoned before answer by the Attendant,
does not include calls abandoned while on hold.
Call H-Abdn
(Calls Abandoned from Hold) Calls abandoned while on hold
Calls Held
Number of calls placed on hold by the Attendant
Time Avail
(Time Available) Time attendant was available to handle new calls
Time Talk
Total time the Attendant was active on calls
Time Held
Time Attendant had calls on hold
Time NoAns
(Time No Answer) Average time calls were ringing or in queue for
attendant before abandoned
Speed Ans
(Speed of Answer) Average time calls rang before answer by Attendant
ATD type
(Attendant Type) System or Main
Operation
System Attendant
To print the Attendant Traffic Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0124”, the Attendant Traffic report code.
223
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3. Select Analysis Period (‘1’-‘5’).
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The Peak Hour is the hour when the system has the highest total call volume.
Programming
SYSTEM
RS-232 Port Settings (PGM 174)
Print Port Selections (PGM 175)
Related Features

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

ACD Statistics Report
Hardware

device to capture reports
224
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.74.2
Issue 1.0
Traffic Analysis, Call Reports
Description
Call activity statistics are provided in the Hourly Call and Call Summary Reports.
Hourly Call Report
The Hourly Call Report covers hourly-completed call activity for the selected Analysis period. The
report indicates the number of completed calls for each hour during the Analysis period as shown
below.
Site Name : abc co
Report Type : Attendant Traffic Report- Today Peak
Date : 06/05/02 08:35
====================================================================================
Anal Hour
# Calls Completed
15:00
0
…..
0
…..
05:00
211
04:00
543
Totals Calls
754
Operation
System Attendant
To print the Hourly Call Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0126”, the Hourly Call report code.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM
RS-232 Port Settings (PGM 174)
Print Port Selections (PGM 175)
Related Features

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

ACD Statistics Report
Hardware

device to capture reports
225
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.74.3
Issue 1.0
Traffic Analysis, H/W Usage
Description
The Hardware Usage report provides statistics for the system’s special Hardware resources such
as the Voice Mail as shown in the following sample report.
Site Name : abc co
Report Type : Hardware Usage Report- Today Peak
Date : 06/05/02 08:34
====================================================================================
Unit
Num
Anal
Total
Total
Type
Unit
Hour
Req
Denied
VSF
4
09:00
19
0
Operation
System Attendant
To print the Hardware Usage Summary Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “0127”, the H/W Usage Summary report code.
3. Select Analysis Period (‘1’-‘5’).
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM
RS-232 Port Settings (PGM 174)
Print Port Selections (PGM 175)
Related Features

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

ACD Statistics Report
Hardware

device to capture reports
226
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.74.4
Issue 1.0
Traffic Analysis, Line Reports
Description
The CO Traffic Summary and Hourly reports provide statistics on a summary or hourly basis for
all Line Group activity. The following provides a sample report and description of the major fields
in the report.
Site Name : abc co
Report Type : CO Group Summary Report- Today Peak
Date : 09/08/02 08:34
====================================================================================
Peak Hour for All CO 11:00
Grp
Num
Anal
Total
Total
Inc
Out
Grp
%
%
No
COs
Hour
Usage
Seize
Seize
Seize
Ovl
ACB
FAO
1
16
10:00
9
6
4
2
0
0
0
20
1
10:00
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
Field
Description
Grp No.
Line Group number
Anal Hour
(Analysis hour) hour during the analysis period with peak usage.
Total Usage
Total number of call attempts on Lines in the Group
Total Seize
Total number of times Lines in the group were used for any call
Inc Seize
(Incoming Seizures) Total number of incoming calls answered for Lines
in the group.
Out Seize
(Outgoing Seizures) Total number of outgoing calls attempted on Lines in
the group.
ACB
(All COs Busy) Percentage of the time that all Lines in the group were
simultaneously busy.
FAO
(Failed Attempts Outgoing) Percentage of outgoing calls offered to the
Lines in the group that were denied due to All Trunks Busy condition.
Operation
System Attendant
To print the CO Traffic Summary Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial ‘0128’, the CO Traffic Summary report code.
3. Select Analysis Period (‘1’-‘5’).
227
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To print the CO Hourly Traffic Report
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial ‘0129’, the CO Hourly Traffic report code.
3. Dial CO Group number.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM
RS-232 Port Settings (PGM 174)
Print Port Selections (PGM 175)
Related Features

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

ACD Statistics Report
Hardware

device to capture reports
228
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.75
Issue 1.0
System Scenario Call Routing
Description
In addition to other routing, the system can be configured to route incoming calls based on
scenarios. Scenarios can activate automatically or a group of scenarios can be activated
manually by the Attendant. Scenarios include characteristics such as date and time, Line, Called
and calling number, Tenancy group, etc. Scenario routing has priority over other routing
destinations. For example, if Line 1 is assigned to ring at station 100 but the Caller Id and other
characteristics match a scenario that routes to a System announcement, the call routes to the
announcement.
Scenario characteristics include:
 Caller ID
 Called Number
 Days and time (Start Day and End Day, weeks, start time and end time)
 Destination (Type and Value)
 Scenario Priority
 Scenario State
 Scenario Voice Mail box
 Scenario COS (Class of Service)
 Scenario DISA Active or Not
 Scenario Tenancy Group number
 Scenario Zone
 Scenario Start CO and End CO
 Scenario Group: this is used for scenario group by attendant
 Zone Holiday
Conditions
Operation
Attendant
To activate a Scenario Group
1. Press DND in system attendant.
2. Dial or select item 5.
3. Dial the Scenario Group number.
4. Press [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Programming
SYSTEM
System Call Routing (PGM251-Web only)
Station ICM Group ( PGM 125 )
CO tenancy group (PGM 141-B10)
Related Features

Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
Hardware
229
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.76
Issue 1.0
Universal Night Answer (UNA)
Description
UNA allows you to be alerted over an external loud bell and answer defined outside calls by
dialing the UNA code. While primarily intended for alternate answering during the Night service
mode, UNA will also function in all service modes. Calls will appear on an appropriate {LINE}, a
{POOL} or {LOOP} button. An External Control Contact can be assigned to activate an external
Loud Bell to alert users of incoming calls.
The iPECS IP and LDP Phones may be assigned a Flex button as a {UNA} button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {UNA} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “567” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To access an incoming UNA call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “567”, the UNA feature code, the oldest UNA call is connected.
Or,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the {UNA} button; the oldest UNA call is connected.
SLT
To access an incoming UNA call
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “567”, the UNA feature code, the oldest UNA call is connected.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM
Universal Night Answer (PGM 141-Button 7)
Related Features

LBC (Loud Bell Control)
Hardware
230
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.77
Issue 1.0
Wake-Up Alarm, Enhanced
Description
If permitted in the system database, you can set up to five (5) Wake-up or alerting time. When a
time is reached, the system will signal your station with an audible and visual signal. The alerting
for each of the 5 Wake-up alarms will repeat based on the type selected when you assign the
alarm.
The alarms will repeat as follows:
Repeat Type
Repeating
1
Alarm activates one time at the assigned date and time
2
Alarm repeats daily Monday through Friday
3
Alarm will repeat daily, Monday through Saturday
4
Alarm will repeat daily
Operation
Attendant
To register a Wake-Up alarm
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “044”, the Attendant Set Wake-Up code.
3. Dial the station range to be alerted. If a single station is to receive the alarm, enter “*”
as the second station number.
4. Dial the desired 2-digit hour (24-hour mode), then 2-digit minute for alerting.
5. Enter Repeating type, “1” to “4”.
6. For the one-time alarm (repeating type 1), enter the date for the alarm as 2 digits for
year, month and day of the month.
7. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To erase Wake-Up
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “045”, the Attendant Erase Wake-up code.
3. Dial the desired station range, for a single station, enter an “*” as the second station
number.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
231
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To register wake-up time alarm from a Station, perform the following steps:
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “41”, the code for setting the Wake-up Alarm.
3. Enter the Wake-up alarm index number, “1 to 5”.
4. Dial the desired 2-digit hour (24-hour mode), then 2-digit minute for alerting.
5. Enter Repeating type, “1” to “4”.
6. For the one-time alarm (repeating type 1), enter the date for the alarm as 2 digits for
year, month and day of the month.
7. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To erase a wake-up time from a Station, perform the following steps:
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “42”.
3. Enter Wake-Up alarm index number, “1” to “5”.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To stop the alarm notification
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
SLT
To register Wake-Up
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code, confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial “41”, the set Wake-up code.
4. Dial the 2-digit hour and 2-digit minute for alerting.
5. Enter Repeating type, “1” to “4”.
6. For the one-time alarm (repeating type 1), enter the date for the alarm as 2 digits for
year, month and day of the month.
7. Hook-flash, conformation tone is provided.
To stop the alarm notification
1. Lift the handset.
To erase Wake-Up
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code, confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial “42”, the erase Wake-up code.
4. Enter Wake-Up alarm index number, “1” to “5”.
5. Hook-flash, a conformation tone is provided.
232
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Conditions
1. When registering or erasing an Alarm, iPECS IP and LDP phones can use the [VOL
UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons to scroll between the Wake-up alarms and “#” can be used
to scroll through the repeating types.
2. The iPECS IP and LDP phones will display an asterisk near the time to indicate a
Wake-up alarm is set for the current day.
3. If you have all five Wake-up Alarms set, the Attendant cannot set a Wake-up alarm for
you. When the Attendant sets an alarm you it is assigned to the lowest Wake-up Alarm
index number (1-5) available for the station. If no Alarm index is available, the
Attendant setting is ignored
4. When the Attendant erases the Wake-up alarm, all five alarm indices are erased.
5. Changing the Wake-up alarms from standard to enhanced, will cancel and erase all
active Wake-up alarms.
6. For the one time alarm, the year can be set from 2000 to 2031.
Programming
STATION
Wake Up Announcement (PGM 114-Button 24-6)
SYSTEM
Enhanced Wake-Up Usage (PGM 161-Button 24-23)
Related Features

Wake-up Alarm, Standard
Hardware
233
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.78
Issue 1.0
Wake-up Alarm, Standard
Description
The standard Wake-up Alarm feature allows you or an Attendant to set a Wake-up alarm or
desired time to be alerted. When the time is reached, the system will signal your station with an
audible and visual signal.
Operation
Attendant
To register a Wake-Up Alarm
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “044”, the Attendant Set Wake Up code.
3. Dial the desired station range, for a single station, enter an “*” in place of the second
station number.
4. Dial the 2-digit hour and 2-digit minute for alerting.
5. For a daily (repeating alarm), dial “#”.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To erase Wake-Up
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “045”, the Attendant Erase Wake-up code.
3. Dial the desired station range, for a single station, enter an “*” in place of the second
station number.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To register Wake-Up
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “41”, the Set Wake-up code.
3. Dial the 2-digit hour and 2-digit minute for alerting.
4. For a daily (repeating alarm), dial “#”.
5. Press [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To stop the alarm notification
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
To erase Wake-Up
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “42”, the Erase Wake-up code.
234
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
SLT
To register Wake-Up
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code, confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial “41”, the set Wake-up code.
4. Dial the 2-digit hour and 2-digit minute for alerting.
5. For a daily (repeating alarm), dial “#”.
6. Hook flash, conformation tone is provided.
To stop the alarm notification
1. Lift the handset.
To erase Wake-Up
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code, confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial “42”, the erase Wake-up code.
4. Hook flash, a conformation tone is provided.
Conditions
1. In cases where a remote device is installed, the time display in the remote terminal is
adjusted by the Device Zone assignment. Thus, the Wake-up alarm time is based on
the time displayed on the phone and not the system time.
2. When receiving a Wake up signal, lifting the handset will return MOH.
3. The Wake-Up alarm signal is the station ring signal with a 30 seconds On and 90
seconds Off cycle 3 times. If no action is taken by you to terminate the alarm, the
Attendant is notified with a display of the station number that did not respond.
4. Time must be entered in the Military 24-hour format (hh:mm).
5. The daily alarm will reset and repeat each day until erased (cancelled). The One-time
alarm will reset and cancel automatically.
6. A System announcement can be recorded and assigned to play when the user
responds to the wake up alarm.
Programming
STATION
Wake Up Announcement (PGM 114-Button 24-6)
Related Features

Enhanced Wake-up Alarm
Hardware
235
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.79
Issue 1.0
Web Call Back
Description
The Station User Web portal incorporates a Web Call Back feature. In the portal, you may be
permitted to request the system to establish a telephone call between two telephone numbers.
The call is subject to the dialing restrictions of the station number associated with the portal
access. An SMDR record is generated with the station number that accessed the portal
identified.
Operation
To activate web call back:
1. Access your Station Web portal and select the Call Back menu (Set Enable in PGM
111 Common Attributes -> Routing attributes -> Web Call Back Service).
2. Enter the “to” and “from” telephone numbers.
3. Press Call button. The page will update to indicate success or failure of the call.
Conditions
1. Web Call Back must be enabled in your Station’s attribute assignments.
2. You will receive an error message if any of the following occur:
 Call Back is disabled
 The outgoing call is restricted due to your COS
 No outside Line is available or
Programming
STATION DATA
Web Call Back Service (PGM 113-Button 24-11)
Related Features
Hardware
236
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.80
Issue 1.0
Zone Management
2.80.1
Holiday Assignment
Description
The Administrator can assign Holiday Zones (up to 40) and Vacation Zones (up to 5 for each
Zone). Devices in a Zone follow the holiday and vacation assignments of the zone. When the
date of a Zone is set to Holiday or Vacation, the Zone will operate in the programmed ring mode.
Operation
Operation of Zone Holiday Assignment is automatic when programmed.
Conditions
1. When the Tenancy group Ring mode for Flexible DID Conversion (PGM 231) is
programmed, the priority is higher than the Zone Holiday Assignment.
2. Zone Holiday Assignment has a higher priority than the Attendant ring mode.
3. It is recommended to use the same zone for each outside Line and Station of a
Tenancy group.
Programming
SYSTEM
Zone Holiday Assignment (PGM 444)
Related Features
Hardware
237
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.80.2
Issue 1.0
Inter Zone Connection Limit
Description
To maintain voice quality, it may be necessary to limit the number of connected inter-Zone calls
for a Zone so the available bandwidth is used effectively. Two parameters define the inter-Zone
connection limits; the Zone maximum inter-zone connections and the maximum inter zone
connections between Zones. As a default, no limit other than the system capacity is applied to the
Inter Zone Connections.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. If maximum Inter-Zone call limit is set to 0, calls for the Zone are not limited.
1. When a Zone reaches the defined maximum Inter-Zone calls, you will receive error
tone and the display “INTER CONN LIMIT OVER” when attempting an outside call.
2. An Inter-Zone call is determined when the call connection is made. If an incoming call
is answered that places the Zone over the limit, the call is dropped and you receive
error tone.
3. Emergency calls are counted as an outgoing outside call however, the Emergency call
is always allowed.
4. If Two-way recording is active and the recording connection places the Zone over the
limit, the call is not recorded.
Programming
ZONE DATA
Zone Attributes (PGM 439-Web only)
Inter Zone Attributes (PGM 441-Web only)
Related Features
Hardware
238
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.80.3
Issue 1.0
Remote Devices
Description
Remote devices, in particular those not reachable by the system, are managed by grouping
devices with similar characteristics in a Zone. Placing devices into Zones simplifies management
allowing definition of common characteristics to the devices within the zone. Zone attributes
include:

Nation code

Language

Page area

Time-zone, GMT or system

Holiday ring modes

RTP relay

RTP Relay group.
Operation
Zone operation is automatic once configured.
Conditions
1. Zone attributes which may affect ringing, such as Holiday and Vacation settings, have
lower priority than other ring assignments such as Tenancy group ring mode
established for DID lines.
2. Zone Attributes do not provide adjustment of time for DST.
3. It is recommended to assign outside Lines and stations of a Tenant group in the same
Device Zone.
4. Wake-up time is based on the time displayed in the station’s LCD.
Programming
ZONE DATA
Device Zone Number (PGM436-Web only)
Device Zone Attributes (PGM 437-Web Only)
Zone Access & Page Relay (PGM 438-Web only)
Zone Attributes (PGM 439-Web only)
Zone RTP Relay Group (PGM 440-Web only)
Inter-zone Attributes (PGM 441-Web only)
Zone Holiday Assignment (PGM 444)
Related Features
Hardware
239
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
2.80.4
Issue 1.0
Zone Outgoing Call Connection Limit
Description
Every system has a limited number of outside Lines shared between all system users.. The
number of outside Lines often is less than the number of other users. When all the Lines are in
use, you may receive an All Trunks busy signal indicating no outside Lines are available.
To minimize this situation, outgoing outside calls from devices in a Zone can be limited from 1 to
the maximum outside Line capacity of the system. As a default, the number of outgoing calls for
each Zone is not limited.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic based on zone maximum outgoing CO call number.
Conditions
1. If maximum outgoing outside calls is set to “0”, outgoing calls for the Zone are not
limited.
2. When a Zone reaches the defined maximum outgoing calls, you will receive error tone
and the display “OUTGOING CALL LIMIT OVER” when attempting an outside call.
3. Calls placed from a device in a Zone to a Networked system are considered outgoing
outside calls for the Zone and will be limited by the outgoing call limit defined for the
Zone.
4. Emergency calls are counted as an outgoing outside call however, the Emergency call
is always allowed.
Programming
ZONE DATA
Zone Attributes (PGM 439-Web only)
Related Features
Hardware
240
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3. INTERCOM
3.1 Barge In
Description
Barge in permits authorized extensions to intrude into other existing outside or intercom calls.
When you intrude on an existing call, a Conference is established with you (the supervisor) and
the parties on the existing call.
Barge-in from your phone is assigned for one of three operating modes:
(0) – Barge in is disabled
(1) – Barge in Monitor mode, the intruding station can listen only
(2) – Barge in Speech mode, the intruding station hears the conversation and may join
and may join the conversation to speak to the other parties.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones w/3-soft buttons
To Barge-in in the Monitor mode
1. Call the busy station and receive busy tone.
2. Press the [MONITOR] soft button. You will need to use the right Navigation button
to display the Monitor selection
3. Warning tone is sent to the connected parties and you are connected to the call in a
“listen-only”, monitor mode.
To Barge-in in the Speech mode
1. If Barge-in type 2 is assigned, press the [JOIN] soft button to join the conversation.
The parties receive intrusion tone and you connect to the call.
2. Caller can join the conversation. The others hear “Intrusion Tone”.
3. To terminate the call and return the all parties to idle, press the [DROP] soft button.
To exit Barge-in
4. Hang-up the phone.
Conditions
1. This feature is only supported for iPECS IP and LDP Phone models with 3 soft buttons.
2. This feature is only available for active calls; you cannot barge in on a ringing or held
call.
3. The Barge-In supervisor phone display will indicate the Id of the connected parties
prior to the Barge-in operation.
241
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Programming
STATION
Barge In Mode (PGM 113 Button 24-7)
Related Features

Intrusion
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phones w/3-soft buttons
242
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3.2 Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF)
Description
You can assign Flex buttons on iPECS IP and LDP Phones, or DSS Consoles to provide onebutton calling to another station and the button LED indicates the status of the station. The
{DSS/BLF} button can also be used for one-button transfer. The LED will illuminate when the
station is busy and flash when receiving a call. In addition, the DSS/BLF button will flash when
the associated station calls you.
Operation
To assign a Flex button for {DSS/BLF}
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Station number + [HOLD/SAVE]
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
Operation of this feature is automatic for assigned Flex buttons.
Conditions
1. A station receiving ICM ringing is considered busy and the associated DSS/BLF LED
on all other stations will flash at 30 ipm.
2. A station receiving ICM ringing will receive visual indication by a flashing LED of the
Flex button associated with the calling station.
3. When a station receives a Camp-On the LED of a DSS/BLF button associated with the
calling station will flash.
4. The station is considered busy when in use, receiving ICM Ring at an iPECS IP or LDP
Phone, or receiving any ring at an SLT.
Programming
Related Features

Intercom Call (ICM Call)

Station User Programming & Codes
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
243
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3.3 Intercom (ICM) Call
Description
A non-blocking ICM is available to all stations in the system. You may place an intercom call to
other stations in the system by dialing applicable digits as defined in the Station Numbering Plan.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To place an intercom call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive ICM dial tone.
2. Dial station number or press the {DSS/BLF} button.
3. For ring-back tone, await answer or, for Intercom splash-tone, speak and await
answer.
SLT
To place an intercom call
1. Lift the handset to receive ICM dial tone.
2. Dial the station number.
3. For ring-back tone, await answer or, for Intercom splash-tone, speak and await
answer.
Conditions
1. Intercom dial tone will time-out if action is not taken within Dial-Tone Time or if the time
between digits exceeds the Inter-digit Timer. Error tone is received should a time-out
occur.
2. ICM Dial tone is removed after dialing the first digit.
3. If the called station is busy, Intercom Busy tone is provided for the Busy Tone time (7
seconds) then, error tone is sent by the system. You may disconnect from the call or
activate a feature such as Message Wait/Callback prior to the time-out.
4. With your iPECS IP and LDP Phone, you can place consecutive Intercom calls without
the need to regain ICM dial tone (no need to hang-up) between calls; simply presses
another {DSS/BLF} button.
5. An Intercom call to a station in the HF answerback or Voice Announce mode (H or P
Intercom Signaling Mode) is not considered answered unless the called user lifts the
handset or presses the [SPEAKER] button (goes off-hook).
Programming
STATION
SYSTEM
Prime Line (PGM 113-Button 7)
ICM Dial Tone Timer (PGM 181-Button 6)
Inter Digit Timer (PGM 181-Button 7)
Related Features

Intercom Signaling Mode

Speakerphone
Hardware
244
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3.4 Intercom Call Hold
Description
While on an active Intercom (ICM) call, using an iPECS IP or LDP Phone you can place the call
on hold. The held station will receive the assigned Music-on-Hold. The call is placed on Exclusive
Hold and recalls you after expiration of the Exclusive Hold Recall Timer.
An [ICM] button must be assigned to the iPECS IP or LDP Phone.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign an [ICM] button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “87” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To place an active ICM call on hold
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, the [ICM] button LED will flash at the exclusive
hold rate. ICM dial tone is received.
To retrieve the held ICM call
1. Press the [ICM] button or the {DSS/BLF} button associated with the held station,
the [ICM] button LED illuminate and the ICM call connected.
Conditions
1. Only one Intercom call may be placed on hold at a station.
Programming
Related Features

MOH (Music-On-Hold)

Intercom Call (ICM Call)

Exclusive Hold

Hold Recall
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
245
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3.5 Intercom Caller Controlled Signaling
Description
You can change the signaling mode of an Intercom (ICM) call from Tone ring to Voice announce
or Voice announce to Tone ring.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To change the ICM Signaling mode;
1. Place your intercom call as normal.
2. Dial “#”, the ICM Signaling mode will change from Voice announce to Tone ring or
Tone ring to Voice announce.
SLT
To change the ICM Signaling mode;
1. Place your intercom call as normal.
2. Dial “#”, ICM Signaling mode will change from Voice announce to Tone ring or Tone
ring to Voice announce.
Conditions
1. The ICM Signaling mode cannot be changed when an Intercom call is placed to a
Linked Pair station. Such intercom calls always employ Tone signaling.
2. If the signaling mode is changed, the call is not subject to Call Forward, No Answer.
3. The signaling mode for a specific Intercom call can only be changed once and cannot
be changed back to the original signaling mode.
4. Changing the signaling mode does not affect privacy at the called station.
Programming
STATION
Caller Controlled ICM Signaling (PGM 111-Button 15)
Related Features

Intercom Signaling Mode

Linked Station Pairs
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone to receive Voice announced calls
246
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3.6 Intercom Lock-Out
Description
If you take no action after going off-hook for the Dial Tone timer or fail to dial an additional digit
within the Inter-digit timer, you will receive error tone for 30 seconds and be placed out-of-service
(locked-out). The LED of associated {DSS/BLF} buttons as well as the station’s [ICM] button, if
configured, flutter rapidly to indicate the out-of-service state.
For iPECS IP & LDP Phone users, if the [SPEAKER] is used, the station will receive error tone
for 30 second and then automatically return to idle and will not “Lock-out”.
Operation
System
Operation of Intercom Lockout is automatic based on the Dial Tone & Inter-digit timers.
Conditions
1. If the station is assigned Howler Tone, error tone is presented for 30 seconds followed
by 30 seconds of Howler tone followed by lockout and silence.
Programming
STATION
Howler Tone (PGM 111-Button 5)
SYSTEM
ICM Dial Tone Timer (PGM 181-Button 6)
Inter Digit Timer (PGM 181-Button 7)
Related Features

Intercom Call (ICM Call)
Hardware
247
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3.7 Intercom Step Call
Description
When busy tone is received on a dialed Intercom call, you may place a call to another station by
dialing the last digit of the station number. The system replaces the last digit of the previously
dialed busy station with the dialed digit and places an Intercom call to the new station number.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate step call, while receiving busy on a dialed Intercom call;
1. Dial a digit other than the last digit of the busy station’s intercom number.
Conditions
1. If the user dials the last digit of the busy station, Camp-On will be activated.
2. After receiving busy tone, if the user takes no action for the Busy Tone timer, 7
seconds, the system will start the Intercom Lockout procedure.
Programming
Related Features

Intercom Lock-Out

Intercom Call (ICM Call)
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
248
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3.8 Intercom Tenancy Group
Description
Stations in the iPECS are assigned to an Intercom Tenancy Group, group 01 ~ 15. Stations in a
group are allowed or denied the ability to place intercom calls to stations in other groups on a
group-by-group basis.
Each Intercom Tenancy Group is assigned an Attendant station. All dial “0” calls from a station in
the group are routed to the assigned Attendant. In addition, the assigned Attendant can control
the Day/Night service mode for stations in the group switching from Day to Night mode.
Each group is assigned a separate Auto Ring Mode Table (Weekly Time Table) to change the
Ring and COS (Class of Service) mode automatically during the day and night service mode. In
addition, DID calls to the system can be routed to a specified Tenancy group. By defining the
group as the destination in the Flexible DID Conversion table calls will follow the Tenancy Group
Auto Ring Mode table (Weekly Time Table).
Operation
System
Operation of Intercom Tenancy Groups is automatic when programmed.
Conditions
1. Intercom calls from a station to a denied access Intercom Tenancy Group will return
error tone.
2. Intercom Tenancy does not affect the Station Numbering Plan in the system. All
stations in the system must have different station numbers even if they are assigned to
different Intercom Tenancy groups.
3. The Attendant of a Tenancy Group can be any station in the system and it is not
affected by Tenancy Group access.
4. When the Attendant of an Intercom Tenancy Group sets Day/Night/Timed mode, it will
affect only the assigned Tenancy Group.
5. Calls to and from outside Lines are not affect by Intercom Tenancy however; calls
cannot be transferred between groups if access is not allowed between the groups.
6. Intercom Tenancy Group 00 is the default or unassigned group.
7. Outside Lines can be configure for use by a specific Tenancy group only, stations in
other tenancy groups are not able to access the Line.
Programming
STATION
ICM Group Number (PGM 111-Button 17)
ICM Tenancy Group (PGM 125)
CO LINE
Tenancy Group (PGM141-Button 10)
249
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
TABLES
Flexible DID Conversion Table (PGM 231)
Weekly Time Table (PGM 233)
Related Features

Intercom Call (ICM Call)

Outside Line Ring Assignment

Flexible Numbering Plan

Call Transfer

Auto Service Mode Control
Hardware
250
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3.9 Intercom Transfer
Description
You can transfer an active Intercom call to other stations in the iPECS system. Intercom calls can
be transferred after announcing the call (screened) or without announcing the call (unscreened).
The Intercom station is placed on Exclusive Hold. The Transfer Recall Timer is initiated and, if
this timer expires before the Intercom call is answered, the call will recall your station until
answered or abandoned.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To perform a Screened ICM transfer, while on an ICM call
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the station to receive call.
3. At answer or Splash tone, announce call.
4. Hang-up, return to idle.
Or,
1. Press the {DSS/BLF} button for the desired station.
2. At answer or Splash tone, announce call.
3. Hang-up, return to idle.
While on an Intercom call, Unscreened call transfer
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial Station to receive call.
3. Hang-up, return to idle.
Or,
1. Press the {DSS/BLF} button for the desired station.
2. Hang-up, return to idle.
SLT
To perform a Screened transfer of an active Intercom call
1. Momentarily depress the Hook-switch.
2. Dial Station to receive call.
3. At answer or Splash tone, announce call.
4. Hang-up, return to idle.
251
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
While on an Intercom call, Unscreened call transfer
1. Momentarily depress the Hook-switch.
2. Dial Station to receive call.
3. Hang-up, return to idle.
Conditions
1. The [ICM] button, if configured, provides an appearance for the transferred station.
The LED indicates status and pressing the button connects to the station.
2. If the receiving station is busy, the transferring station may camp the call on to the busy
station, see Camp-On.
3. A station in DND or out-of-service cannot receive a transfer, and such attempts will
result in error tone.
Programming
Related Features

Exclusive Hold

Hold Recall

Call Waiting/Camp-On

DND (Do Not Disturb)

Call Transfer
Hardware
252
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.10
3.10.1
Issue 1.0
Message Wait/Call Back
CLI Message Wait
Description
When your iPECS IP or LDP Phone with display receives an external call with Calling Line
Identification (CLI) and the call is abandoned (disconnects before answer), the system will
generate a CLI Message Wait (missed call) log with the Caller Identification, date and time. You
may access this CLI log with the [Message/Call Back] button to review and, if desired, return the
call.
You may assign a {CLI MESSAGE WAIT} button with direct access to the CLI Message Wait list.
The button LED flashes at 30 ipm to indicate a CLI Message Wait.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {CLI MESSAGE WAIT} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + 32 + [HOLD/SAVE]
To review CLI Messages
1. Press the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button, the LCD shows a summary of all types
of messages waiting.
2.
ST CL VS
VM FS
001 001
006
005
MS
001 004
3. Dial ‘2’ to select CLI message shown as CL in the LCD. The LCD displays the first
CLI message details including the Caller Id, time and number of missed calls from
the caller.
4. Use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons to scroll through the missed call list.
5551122323
21/11 09:10 CNT: 2
Or
5. Press the {CLI MESSAGE WAIT} button, the first CLI message is displayed.
6. Press the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button to scroll through the CLI Messages.
5551122323
21/11 09:10 CNT: 2
253
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
To delete the current CLI Message
1. Press the “*” button, the next CLI message is displayed.
To delete all CLI Messages
1. Press the [SPEED] button.
2. Press the “*” button twice.
To return a call to the current CLI Message
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The total number of Message Wait indications in queue for the system is 1000. Should
the message Wait buffer fill, the buffer full message, as below will be output over the
RS-232 port.
2. “Warning: Message Wait Buffer Full.”
3. The CLI Message Wait display includes the date, time, message count and caller Id.
The count is the number of attempts by a specific calling party with the time and date
from the most recent attempt.
4. The CLI Message Wait status is stored in non-volatile memory to protect against power
loss.
5. When an outside call is assigned to ring multiple stations, or a group, CLI Message
Wait is not provided.
6. When an outside call with CLI is routed to an ACD/Terminal/Circular station group, the
CLI Message Wait will be provided to the last station notified of the call before the call
was abandoned.
7. Once a call is answered by a station in the system, CLI Message Wait is no longer
available i.e.; transferred calls do not provide CLI Message Wait.
8. A CLI Message Wait indication is left at the originally called station even if the call is
forwarded to another station.
9. While idle, the user may toggle between CLI number and CLI name, if available, by
pressing the [TRANS/PGM] button.
10. The CLI and called station number will be shown in the SMDR record as an
abandoned or lost call.
11. For ISDN calls, the CLI Message Wait will display and dial the number as shown in the
Table below, modified based on assignments in PGM 200 for:
Incoming Prefix Code
My Area Code
My Prefix Area Code
International Access Code
254
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Inc Prefix
Area
Code
Country
Code
Access
Code
No
0343
82
00
No
0343
82
00
No
0345
82
00
Yes
0343
82
00
Yes
0343
82
00
Yes
0343
82
00
Received Caller
ID
Display
National:
0343 50-7951
National:
0343 50-7951
National:
0343 50-7951
National:
0343 50-7951
National:
0343 50-7951
International:
492 888 7777
507951
507951
0343 507951
507951
0343 507951
00492 8887777
Programming
STATION
CLIP Display (PGM 114-Button 1)
CLI Message Wait (PGM 114-Button 10)
SYSTEM
Incoming Prefix Code Insertion (PGM 143-Button 12)
International Access Code (PGM 143-Button 14)
My Area Code (PGM 143-Button 15)
My Prefix Area Code (PGM 143-Button 16)
Related Features

Station Message Wait/Call Back

ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network)
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone with display
255
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.10.2
Issue 1.0
Message Wait Reminder Tone
Description
In addition to the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button LED, the iPECS IP and LDP Phones can be
sent a tone as a periodic reminder to you of message waits in queue. This tone is sent to the
station only while idle and is heard over the speaker.
Operation
System
Reminder tone is sent to stations automatically when assigned.
Conditions
1. The interval between tones can be 00 to 60 minutes. A setting of 00 disables the
reminder tone.
2. The reminder tone will continue until all messages have been retrieved.
3. A busy station or station in DND will not receive the Message Wait Reminder tone.
4. An SLT will receive stutter dial-tone when the handset is lifted to indicate messages
are waiting.
Programming
SYSTEM
Message Reminder Tone Timer (PGM 181-Button 8)
Related Features

Station Message Wait/Call Back
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
256
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.10.3
Issue 1.0
Short Message Service (SMS)
Description
The Short Message Service (SMS) provides the ability to send and receive text messages to and
from iPECS IP and LDP Phones equipped with a display as well as the Phontage, UCS Client
and WLAN Phone. The text is comprised of words, numbers, or an alphanumeric combination.
Each short message can be up to 100 characters in length when Latin alphabets are used.
You send and receive messages from your iPECS IP or LDP Phone or the Station Portal of the
iPECS system Web Home Page. For operation using the Station Portal Web page, see your
System Administrator.
Operation
To assign a Flex button as a {SMS SEND} button;
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “36” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To resend an existing SMS message;
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “36”, the SMS send code.
SMS SENDING MODE
RESEND-(1) EDIT-(2)
3. Dial “1” to resend a message.
DIAL STA DEST(XXX-XXX)
SKIP-(*)
4. Dial the desired station range to receive the message or “*” to use the displayed
station range.
STA 100-124
SEND-(SAVE) CANCEL-(#)
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to send the message or “#” to cancel.
To send a new message
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “36”, the SMS send code.
SMS SENDING MODE
RESEND-(1) EDIT-(2)
3. Dial “2” to send a new message.
DIAL STA DEST(XXX-XXX)
257
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4. Dial the desired station range to receive the message.
STA 100-124
SEND-(SAVE) CANCEL_(#)
5. Dial the message using two digits for each character as shown in the table below,
use the [REDIAL] button to delete a character.
1
4
7
Q – 11
2
A - 21
3
B - 22
E - 32
. – 13
C - 23
F - 33
1 – 10
2 - 20
3 - 30
G – 41
5
J - 51
6
M - 61
H - 42
K - 52
N - 62
I - 43
L - 53
O - 63
4 - 40
5 - 50
6 - 60
P - 71
8
T - 81
9
W - 91
R - 72
U - 82
X - 92
S - 73
V - 83
Y - 93
Q - 7*
8 - 80
Z - 9#
7 - 70
*
D - 31
Z – 12
Blank - *1
9 - 90
0
0-00
#
#
: - *2
, - *3
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to send and store the message or “#” to cancel.
To retrieve SMS Messages:
1. Press [MSG] or [CALL BACK] button. The message contents summary will be
shown as below.
ST CL VS VM FS MS
001 001 005 006 001 004
2. Dial “6” to select MS, SMS message wait.
“1” => ST: Station Message wait,
“2” => CL: CLI Message wait
“3” => VS: Integrated Voice message wait
“4” => VM: external Voice Mail
“5” => FS: Feature server
“6” => MS: SMS message wait.
The display shows the first line of received SMS messages.
MESSAGE: [0] EMERGENCY CONFER
[1] LETS GO TO LUNCH
258
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3. Use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] to scroll through messages.
MESSAGE: [2] WE HAVE A MEETING A
[3] CONFERENCE AT 9 AM
4. Dial the message number (“01”~“10”) to view the entire message, use the [VOL
UP]/[VOL DOWN] to view each line of the message.
MESSAGE:> WE HAVE A MEETING AT
>7PM IF YOU CAN NOT MAKE IT
To delete SMS messages
1. Dial “#”.
DELETE MESSAGE?
YES : 1 NO : 2 ALL:3
2. Dial “1” to delete the current message, “2” to return to idle or “3” to delete all
received SMS messages.
Conditions
3. The system can store up to 10 received SMS messages and 1 sent SMS message
for a station.
4. Once the received message storage capacity is reached, additional incoming SMS
messages are ignored.
5. For operation with the Phontage, WLAN Phone or UCS Client, refer to the
respective User Guide.
Programming
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone w/Display

iPECS Phontage

iPECS WLAN Phone

iPECS UCS Client
259
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.10.4
Issue 1.0
Station Message Wait/Call Back
Description
When a called station does not answer or is in DND, you can activate a Station Message Wait
indication to request a Call Back. A station may receive a Message Wait from any number of
other stations in the system. The station receiving the Message Wait can return the calls using
the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button.
When a busy station is called, you may request to be placed in a queue to receive a Call Back.
When the called station returns to idle, the system notifies you with Callback ring. When you
answer, the previously busy station is called.
When a Message is waiting, the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button LED of iPECS IP or LDP
Phones flashes and, for properly equipped SLTs, the MW Lamp will flash.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To leave a Message Wait, while receiving ring back tone or no response on a call announce
1. Press the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button, confirmation tone received.
2. Hang up, Message Wait activated.
To leave a Message Wait, while receiving DND tone
1. Press the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button, confirmation tone received.
2. Hang-up, Message Wait activated.
To leave a Call Back (queue for a station), while receiving busy
1. Press the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button, the user receives confirmation tone.
2. Hang up, return to idle.
To respond to a Call back recall, when the busy station is available the system calls back,
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Previously busy station is called.
To retrieve Station Messages Waiting
1. Press [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button, the message contents summary as below
or the Station Messages Waiting list will display.
ST CL VS VM FS MS
001 001 005 006 001 004
2. Dial “1” to select ST (Station Message Wait)
“1” => ST: Station Message Wait,
“2” => CL: CLI Message Wait
“3” => VS: Integrated VM Message Wait
“4” => VM: external Voice Mail
260
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
“5” => FS: Feature server
“6” => MS: SMS message wait.
3. Press the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] button to scroll through the Station Messages.
MSG : 100
To return a call for the current Station Message
1. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To delete the first Message Wait from the list
1. Press the “*” button, the list is updated removing the message from the list.
To delete all waiting Messages
1. Press the [SPEED] button.
2. Press the “*” button twice.
SLT
To leave a Message Wait, while receiving ring back tone or no response on a call announce
1. Momentarily press the hook switch.
2. Dial “556”, the Message Wait/Call Back code.
3. Hang up, Message Wait is activated.
To leave a Message Wait, while receiving DND tone
1. Momentarily press the hook switch.
2. Dial “556”, the Message Wait/Call Back code.
3. Hang up, Message Wait activated.
To retrieve a Station Message Wait;
1. Dial “557”, the Message Wait/Call Back Answer code.
To leave a Call Back (queue for a station), while receiving busy
1. Momentarily press the hook switch.
2. Dial “556”, the Message Wait/Call Back code.
3. Hang up, Call Back is activated.
To respond to a Call back recall, when the busy station is available the system calls back,
1. Lift the handset.
2. Previously busy station is called.
Conditions
1. A Message Wait/Call Back return call will always ring at the receiving station overriding
the Intercom signaling mode selected.
2. A station can leave only one callback request.
3. The [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button LED will continue to flash until all Message Wait
and Call Back requests, including Voice Mails, have been serviced.
261
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4. If a station is attempting to leave a message and the system Message Wait queue is
full, the station will receive ICM busy tone.
5. A Message Wait remainder tone can be enabled to remind the user of messages
waiting.
6. A station in Call Forward can leave a message wait.
7. A Message Wait indication is left at the originally called station even if the call is
forwarded.
8. A user of an iPECS IP or LDP Phone with Display may call back to stations that left
messages in any desired order, or the normal (“oldest first”) order.
9. Placing an Intercom call to a station will cancel any existing Message Wait from that
station.
Programming
SYSTEM
Message Reminder Tone Timer (PGM 181-Button 8)
Related Features

Message Wait Reminder Tone

CLI Message Wait
Hardware
262
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.11
3.11.1
Issue 1.0
Paging
Internal/External & All Call Page
Description
If your station is permitted to access page facilities, you can connect and transmit voice
announcements to any or all of the systems Internal/External Page zones. Stations are grouped
into “zones” to receive pages to the zone. Stations not assigned to any zone will not receive
pages including All Call pages.
A page warning tone, if assigned, will be provided to the Page Zone(s) prior to the audio
connection. You may continue the page announcement for the specified Page Time-out after
which you will be disconnected and the Page Zone(s) returned to idle.
The default Page Zone dial codes are as follows:
Internal Page Zones
301~335
Internal All Call Page
543
External Page Zones
545
External All Call Page
548
All Call Page
*549
Flexible buttons of iPECS IP and LDP Phones may be assigned to access a Page Zone as a
{PAGE ZONE} button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {PAGE ZONE} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + Page Zone number + [HOLD/SAVE]
To make a page,
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the desired paging code or press a {PAGE ZONE} button.
3. If assigned, after the Page Warning Tone, make announcement.
4. Replace the handset to return to idle.
To queue for a page when busy is received.
1. Press the [MESSAGE/CALL BACK] button.
2. Replace the handset returning to idle.
263
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
SLT
To make a page,
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the desired paging code.
3. If assigned, after the Page Warning Tone, make announcement.
4. Replace the handset, to return to idle.
To queue for a page when busy tone is received:
1. Dial “556”, the Call Back code.
2. Replace the handset returning to idle.
Conditions
1. Stations, which are denied access to paging, will receive error tone when any Page
Access code is dialed.
2. Stations dialing a Page Code will be queued when any of the other Internal or External
Page zones are busy.
3. DTMF signals from stations are transmitted through the systems External Page port
after access.
4. If an iPECS IP or LDP Phone user attempts to page using the speakerphone, preselection will be activated and the display shows "LIFT THE HANDSET TO PAGE".
5. Stations in DND or busy will not receive Page announcements.
6. Stations, which are not included in any Internal Page Zone, will not receive any page,
including All Call.
7. For external paging, an external amplifier and speaker(s) are required.
8. The systems External Control Contacts may be assigned to activate when External
Page is accessed. The contact can be used to activate the External page equipment.
9. A station is permitted only one Page Zone queue request at a time. If a station
attempts another Page Zone queue, only the later queue request is honored.
10. When a busy Page Zone becomes idle, the system will select the oldest page queue,
and signal the appropriate station. The signaled station will have an audible ring
indicating the queue callback. The audible ringing will be a distinctive signal. The All
Page Zone, while signaling a queued station, is considered busy. In addition, the All
Page Zone is considered busy when any page zone is active.
11. The queue recall is always in the tone ring mode regardless of the station’s ICM
signaling mode.
12. The Call Back ring signals the station for 15 seconds, after which, the queue is
canceled and the next station in the queue is signaled.
13. If the waiting station is busy, and the Page zone becomes available the next idle
station in the Page Queue list is signaled and the busy waiting station is placed at the
bottom of Page Queue list. If there is no other available queued station in the Page
Queue, the Page Queue for the busy station is canceled.
14. When the waiting station goes to idle, and both a “Page Queue” and “CO Call back
Queue” exist, the Page Queue is given priority.
264
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Programming
STATION
Page Access (PGM 111-Button 7)
Internal Page Zone Access (PGM 118)
SYSTEM
Privacy Warning Tone (PGM 161-Button 4)
External Control Contacts (PGM 168)
Paging Timeout Timer (PGM 181-Button 9)
Related Features

Meet Me Page Answer
Hardware

External Amplifier & Speakers
265
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.11.2
Issue 1.0
Meet Me Page
Description
During a Page, you may request another user respond to the Page and “Meet” you by dialing the
Meet-Me code. When the party dials the Meet-Me code, the page is terminated and an intercom
call is connected between you and the party.
Flexible buttons of iPECS IP and LDP Phones may be assigned as a {MEET ME} button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {MEET ME} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “544” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To answer a page with Meet Me Page
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Dial “544”, the Meet Me Page code or press the {MEET-ME} button.
SLT
To answer a page with Meet Me Page
1. Lift the handset to receive intercom dial tone.
2. Dial “544”, the Meet Me Page code.
Conditions
1. A Meet Me Page must be answered within the Page Time-out timer.
2. A station may answer a Meet Me Page from any station regardless of pickup or paging
group assignments and page access permission.
3. The paging party must remain off-hook until the paged party answers the Meet Me
request. The initiator may press the Mute button to eliminate transmitting audio over
the page circuit while waiting for the party to answer.
Programming
SYSTEM
Paging Timeout (PGM 181-Button 9)
Related Features

Internal/External & All Call Page
Hardware
266
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.11.3
Issue 1.0
SOS Paging
Description
A System announcement can be recorded and then used a page announcement. A Flex button of
an iPECS IP or LDP phone is required.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button as a {SOS Page} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “Page code” + System announcement number +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To activate SOS paging:
1. Press the assigned {SOS Paging} flexible button.
Condition
1. This feature can be only activated by pressing assigned flexible button in idle state.
2. The System announcement for SOS Paging can be recorded only from an Attendant
station.
3. Paging zones includes Internal, External and All Call page zones.
4. SOS paging is not restricted by the Paging timer. The entire SOS paging
announcement will play over the Page zones until complete even if the Paging time out
expires.
Programming
STATION
Page Access (PGM 111-Button 7)
SYSTEM
Paging Timeout Timer (PGM 181-Button 9)
Related Features

Internal/External & All Call Page

Integrated Voice Mail
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
267
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
3.12
Issue 1.0
Push to Talk Paging
Description
Each iPECS IP, LDP and WLAN Phone can be assigned as a member of one or more of the
system’s nine Push-To-Talk (PTT) page groups. As such a user, you may login or log-out of any
one or all of the PTT groups to which your station is assigned. Once logged in, you may place or
receive one-way page announcements to/from other users who are logged in to the same PTT
group. To place a PTT page announcement, the user must press and hold the {PTT} Flex button.
An Attendant may log other stations in and out of PTT groups.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {PTT} Flex button;
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “99” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To log-in to a PTT group;
1. Dial “#0”, the PTT Log-in/out code.
2. Dial the desired PTT group number (“1”~“9” and “0” for all groups).
To log-out of the PTT group(s);
1. Dial “#0”, the PTT Log-in/out code.
2. Dial “*”.
To place a page to the active PTT group;
1. Press and hold the {PTT} Flex button.
2. After confirmation tone, make your page announcement.
Attendant
To log other stations in to a PTT group;
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “077”, the Attendant PTT log-in/out code.
3. Dial the desired station range, for a single station dial the station number and ‘*’.
4. Dial the PTT group number (“1”~“9” and “0” for all groups).
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To log other stations out of a PTT group;
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “077”, the Attendant PTT log-in/out code.
3. Dial the desired station range, for a single station dial the station number and ‘*’.
4. Dial “*”.
268
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. Conditions associated with Internal/External & All Call Page apply to Push-to-Talk
paging.
2. To access PTT paging, the station must be permitted access to system paging and
assigned to one or more PTT groups..
3. If allowed access to all PTT groups, a station may log-into all groups (PTT group 0) to
place announcements to all groups simultaneously and receive announcements from
any group.
4. A station can only login to PTT groups to which it is assigned access.
5. The station must have a {PTT} to place or receive PTT announcements. As a default,
the iPECS WLAN phone is assigned a PTT button.
6. The station may be assigned and logged in to the default active PTT group in the
system database.
Programming
NUMBERING
PTT Log-in/out (PGM 109-Button 4)
STATION
Page Access (PGM 111-Button 7)
Default Active PTT Group (PGM 111-Button 16)
PTT Group Access (PGM 119)
Related Features

Internal/External & All Call Page
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone

iPECS WLAN

iPECS Phontage

iPECS UCS Client
269
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4. OUTSIDE (CO/IP) LINES
4.1 Auto Fault Detection and Recovery
Description
If the system detects a Line fault on a PRI Line or SIP Trunk, the Line/Trunk is placed in an OutOf-Service state and temporarily placed it in the unused Line group. Upon recovery the system
will automatically return the Line to in-service.
Operation
System
Operation of Fault Detection and Recovery is automatic.
Conditions
1. The “Unused” Line Group contains Lines that are not used or are temporally blocked.
2. This feature is only available for PRI Lines and SIP trunks.
Programming
CO/IP
CO/IP Line Group (PGM 141-Button 1)
Related Features

Outside Line Groups
Hardware
270
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4.2 Caller ID Mode
Description
The Caller ID signals for analog CO Lines varies from region to region. To support these
differences, each analog CO Line is assigned the type of Caller Id signal provided from the CO
Line. The Caller Id signal type can be configured as:

FSK

DTAS FSK

DTMF

Russia-CID
Operation
Operation of this feature is either automatic (when programmed) or by Web Admin.
Conditions
Programming
CO/IP
CO Additional Attribute - CID setting (PGM 148)
Related Features
Hardware
271
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4.3 CO Line Flash
Description
Analog CO Lines recognize a brief open or ground connection, “Flash”, as a request for new dial
tone. When used behind a PBX, a Flash is often used to activate a PBX feature or call transfer.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flash Flex button:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “94” + [HOLD/SAVE]
While connected to an analog CO line
1. Press the [FLASH] button, the system generates a flash on the analog CO line.
SLT
While connected to an analog CO line
1. Momentarily depress the Hook-switch.
2. Dial “551”, the Flash feature code, the system generates a Flash on the analog CO
Line.
Conditions
1. Stations may Flash on an analog CO Line defined for PABX operation and will
experience COS (Class of Service) dialing restrictions after a PABX Trunk access
code is dialed.
2. During a Flash, the LED for the Line button will remain lit.
3. A Flash may be stored as a part of a Station or System Speed Dial number.
4. While connected to an internal call or dial tone, activating Flash will return internal dial
tone.
5. While making a Page Announcement, activating Flash will terminate the Page
Announcement and return internal dial tone.
6. The Flash function is not available on ISDN and IP Line calls.
Programming
CO/IP
Flash Type (PGM 141-Button 6)
CO Flash Timer (PGM 142-Button 12)
Related Features

Station Speed Dial

System Speed Dial
Hardware
272
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4.4 CO Line Release Guard Time
Description
To assure that the service provider’s switching equipment has sufficient time to restore to the idle
condition, the system will hold analog CO Lines in a busy state after release of the Line. The time
between the disconnect and when the system changes the CO Line status from busy to idle is the
CO Line Release Guard time.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM
CO Release Guard Timer (PGM 180-Button 16)
Related Features
Hardware
273
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4.5 CO Line Ring Detect
Description
The system incorporates timers for Ring-on and Ring-off durations to assure proper alerting.
When the duration of the ring signal exceeds the Ring-on timer, alerting will start. When the ring
is not present for a period exceeding the Ring-off timer, alerting will stop. This allows the system
Ring cycle detection to be matched to various PBX and carrier systems.
Operation
System
Operation of Ring detect is automatic.
Conditions
1. Ring On and Ring Off are assigned on a system basis.
2. The CO Ring Detect is applied to analog CO Lines only.
Programming
SYSTEM
CO Ring OFF Timer (PGM 180-Button 17)
CO Ring ON Timer (PGM 180-Button 18)
Related Features
Hardware
274
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4.6 Dial Pulse Signaling
Description
An analog CO Line can be configured to send dial pulse signals to the central office. If
programmed as a pulse CO line, the system will send open loop pulses at 10 pps with the
assigned break/make ratio.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed.
Conditions
1. The break/make ratio is system programmable as 60/40 or 66/33.
2. You can change the signaling from pulse to DTMF by dialing ‘*’ while on a Line
assigned for pulse signaling.
Programming
CO/IP
CO Line Signal Type (PGM 141-Button 5)
SYSTEM
Pulse Dial (Break/Make) Ratio (PGM 176)
Pause Timer (PGM 181-Button 10)
Related Features

Dial Pulse to Tone Switchover

DTMF Signal Sending
Hardware
275
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4.7 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Description
A carrier service, known as Direct Inward Dial (DID), sends digits to the system so that the call
may be routed directly to a specific station or system facility. Digits sent to the system are
generally the last digits (3 or 4) dialed by the caller.
After collecting the digits from the carrier, iPECS converts the digits employing one of three DID
digit conversion Types:

Type 0 - collect incoming digits based on the programmed digit count and convert the
digits according to the DID conversion pattern, resulting in the DID destination
number.

Type 1 - use the incoming DID digits as the destination number without converting.

Type 2 - Use the result of DID conversion Type 0 as an index to the Flexible DID
Conversion Table and use the table information to route the call.
Operation
System
Operation of DID is automatic once configured
Conditions
1. If ICLID routing is assigned for the Line, the received Caller Id is compared to the
ICLID Table for routing first. If Caller Id does not match an entry in the ICLID Table, the
normal DID call processes are used.
2. DID calls that encounter a busy signal, are not answered in the DID/DISA No Answer
Timer, or are received at a vacant or invalid number are routed to the Attendant, a tone,
Station group, or System announcement. When the Attendant receives such calls, the
call is appropriately identified in the Attendant iPECS IP or LDP Phone display.
3. For a station that is part of a non-pilot Station Hunt group, DID calls will follow the
group hunt process if the Station is busy or does not answer the call. DID calls are
subject to Group Call Pick-up and Directed Call Pick-up.
4. If a System announcement is defined as the destination in the Flexible DID Conversion
Table, a Caller Controlled Routing Table for the announcement can be defined. iPECS
can be configured to drop (disconnect) the call after playing the recorded
announcement.
Programming
SIP
SIP User ID Attributes (PGM 126-Web only)
CO/IP
CO Service Type (PGM140)
ISDN DID Remove the Number of Digit (PGM 143-Button 5)
276
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
DID Conversion Type (PGM 145-Button 2)
SYSTEM
DID/DISA Busy Destination (PGM 167-Button 1)
DID/DISA Error Destination (PGM 167-Button 2)
DID/DISA No Answer Timer (PGM 181-Button 2)
TABLES
Customer Call Routing Tables (PGM 228)
Flexible DID Conversion Table (PGM 231)
Related Features

Integrated Auto Attendant

Directed Call Pick-Up

Group Call Pick-Up

IP Trunking

IP Address Dialing
Hardware

IP, BRI or PRI Line
277
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4.8 DID Line Digit Conversion
Description
When you place an outside call the digits you dial are compared with the Digit Conversion Table.
If a match is found, the digits are converted as defined in the table. Within the table are 15 subtables with up to 200 entries of up to sixteen digits for each sub-table.
Different conversion can be assigned for the same dialed number based on the system service
mode and LCR configuration. Conversion can also be limited to outside calls from a station or an
outside Line. The latter may be used in networked environments where a system in the network
employs Lines from another system to place a call.
Operation
Digit Conversion is applied automatically according to programming.
Conditions
1. Each CO line can have a Digit Conversion Tables.
2. There are two (2) special entries for configuring digit conversion:
− X: Mask Digit, any digit is accepted
− F: Ignore Digit
Programming
SYSTEM
Digit conversion Table (PGM 270)
Related Features
Hardware
278
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
4.9 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Description
Each outside Line may be assigned for DISA service, which allows an incoming caller to gain
access to the system resources and/or features. The iPECS will answer the outside call and
provide intercom dial tone or route to a System announcement where Caller Controlled Routing
may be defined. The DISA caller may then access the desired resource using dial codes.
If an Authorization Code is required for DISA access, when the system answers the incoming
DISA call, DND Warning tone is provided to indicate an Authorization Code must be entered.
Operation
System
Incoming call subject to DISA service
1. Recognize incoming call.
2. Answer call and connect caller to Intercom dial tone or System announcement.
3. Process call based on received digits/programming.
DISA Caller
To access the system’s resources from an external party
1. Place call to DISA facility of the system.
2. At receipt of dial tone/announcement, dial as desired. If DND Warning tone is
received, enter an Authorization Code to receive dial tone.
Conditions
1. Each outside Line is separately assigned for DISA operation during Day, Night and/or
Timed system operation mode. DISA operation is active only when the system is in the
assigned operating mode(s).
2. DISA callers can be routed to a System Attendant announcement in place of Intercom
dial tone. The announcement can be associated with a CCR Table or assigned to
disconnect after playback.
3. A DISA caller can be required to enter an Authorization Code to access the system’s
external outgoing resources, facilities or features. If required, the caller is permitted to
retry entry of a valid Authorization Code based on the DISA Retry count. Continued
failure results in disconnect.
4. DISA callers are subject to COS (Class of Service) dialing restrictions. If Authorization
Codes are required and the code entered matches a Station Authorization Code, the
station’s COS (Class of Service) will apply. Otherwise, the assigned DISA COS (Class
of Service) will apply. In both cases, the Line COS (Class of Service) for the outgoing
Line will be active.
5. The system will disconnect an outgoing DISA call if the Unsupervised Conference
279
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
timer expires or disconnect supervision is received. A disconnect warning tone is
provided 15 seconds prior to disconnect.
6. If a DISA caller encounters a system All Lines Busy, busy tone is received for 5
seconds before ICM Dial tone is again presented and the DISA caller may try another
call.
7. LEDs associated with the DISA Line appearance will provide normal status indications
at all stations except the Attendants. The LED for the Line at an Attendant will flutter at
240 ipm when busy.
8. An iPECS IP or LDP Phone user can only receive a DISA call with an available DISA
Line appearance button.
Programming
CO/IP
DISA Account Code (PGM 142-Button 5)
DISA CO Access (PGM 142-Button 11)
DISA Attributes (PGM 146)
SYSTEM
DISA Retry Counter (PGM 160-Button 5)
DISA COS (Class of Service) Assignment (PGM 166)
DID/DISA Busy Destination (PGM 167-Button 1)
DID/DISA Error Destination (PGM 167-Button 2)
DID/DISA No Answer Timer (PGM 181-Button 2)
Unsupervised Conference Timer (PGM 182-Button 5)
TABLES
CCR Audio Text Tables (PGM 228)
Weekly Time Table (PGM 233)
Related Features

Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode

Dialing Restrictions

Authorization Codes (Password)

Unsupervised Conference

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Auto Service Mode Control
Hardware
280
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.10
Issue 1.0
DTMF Signaling
Description
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) signals are used with Lines assigned for DTMF signaling.
The duration of the DTMF signal can be adjusted from 40 to 990 milliseconds.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic when programmed.
Conditions
1. The system mutes your voice transmission to reduce interference while sending DTMF
tones.
Programming
CO/IP
CO Line Signal Type (PGM 141-Button 5)
SYSTEM
Inter Digit Timer (PGM 181-Button 7)
DTMF Duration Timer (PGM 182-Button 9)
Related Features

Dial Pulse Signaling
Hardware
281
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.11
Issue 1.0
IP Address Dialing
Description
If allowed, you can place calls using an IP path. The system accepts user dialed digits as the IP
address for the called party. When dialing an IP call, the asterisk, “*”, is used as the “dot” between
bytes of the IP address.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To place an IP Call
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the {IP Line Group} button or dial IP Group access code.
3. Dial “xxx * xxx * xxx * xxx”, use “*” as the dot in the IP address.
4. Press “#” to complete dialing.
SLT
To place an IP Call
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial the IP Group access code.
3. Dial ‘xxx “*” xxx “*” xxx “*” xxx‘, use “*” as the dot in the IP address.
4. Press “#” to complete dialing.
Conditions
Programming
STATION
CO/IP Group Access (PGM 117)
Direct IP Call (PGM 122-Button 1)
Related Features
Hardware

IP Line
282
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.12
IP Trunking
4.12.1
H.323 v4 Service
Issue 1.0
Description
When assigned to support H.323 protocol, VoIP channels provide protocol conversion between
H.323 v4 and the iPECS protocol. This permits the VoIP channel to connect to external H.323
networks or terminals and to support H.323v4 supplementary services. In addition, H.323 VoIP
channels can register with an external H.323 GateKeeper to support Gatekeeper call routing.
Supplementary services are supported employing H.450.1 ~ H.450.12 standards, which define
the following supplementary services:
 H.450.1
 H.450.2
 H.450.3
 H.450.4
 H.450.5
 H.450.6
 H.450.7
 H.450.8
 H.450.9
 H.450.10
 H.450.11
 H.450.12
Operation
System
Operation of H.323 Service is automatic
Conditions
Programming
STATION
BOARD
CO/IP
Station IP Attributes (PGM 122)
H.323 VoIP Attributes (PGM 130)
CO/IP Line Group (PGM 141-Button 1)
CO VoIP Mode (PGM 141-Button 11)
Related Features

System Networking

SIP Trunk Service
Hardware

IP Line
283
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.12.2
Issue 1.0
SIP Trunk Service
Description
When assigned to support SIP (Session Initiation Protocol), VoIP channels provide protocol
conversion between SIP and the iPECS protocol. This permits the VoIP channel to connect to
external SIP networks for call services. In addition, to the IETF RFC-3261 Session Initiation
protocol draft standard, iPECS VoIP channels support other SIP related RFCs including:
RFC-2617
HTTP Authentication, Basic & Digest
RFC-3515
Refer Method
RFC-3264
Offer/Answer Model
RFC-3265
SIP Basic Call Flow Examples
RFC-3891
SIP “Replaces” Header
Using the SIP database assignments, the system will register and authenticate with the SIP proxy
server permitting the system to interoperate employing SIP to establish, manage and terminate
real-time voice sessions with external parties.
Operation
System
Operation of SIP Service is automatic
Conditions
Programming
STATION
SIP User ID Table (PGM111-Button 19)
Station IP Attributes (PGM 122)
SIP
SIP User ID Attributes (PGM 126-Web only)
BOARD
SIP Attributes (PGM 133, Web only)
CO/IP
CO/IP Line Group (PGM 141-Button 1)
CO VoIP Mode (PGM 141-Button 11)
Related Features

System Networking

H.323 v4 Service
Hardware

SIP Trunk
284
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.13
Issue 1.0
IP WAN Dialing after Answer
Description
The iPECS system permits sending and receiving DTMF signals after connecting to an external
VoIP party. The DTMF signal can be DTMF tone, Text String, or DTMF protocol based on the
system programming.
Operation
System
Operation is automatic based on the system database.
Conditions
1. The connected VoIP party must transmit DTMF digits in the mode selected in the
system database otherwise; the DTMF digits will not be recognized.
Programming
Related Features
Hardware

IP Line
285
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.14
Issue 1.0
ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network)
Description
The iPECS system supports both BRI (Basic Rate Interface) and PRI (Primary Rate Interface)
ISDN circuits. The ETSI 30B+2D channel configuration is supported through switches on the
PRIU Interface board to select E1 digital Line operation or PRI ISDN operation.
4.14.1
Calling/Called Party Identification
Description
The iPECS system receives calling party identification in the ISDN call Set-up message, CLIPCalling Line Identification Presentation. The answering party identification, which may be different
from the called party, is received in the ISDN connect message, COLP-Connected Line
Identification Presentation. When provided, the LCD of iPECS IP and LDP Phones displays the
identification, which is included in call records.
iPECS IP and LDP Phone display:
LINE RINGING
CLI 03438502821
The system will also compare the Calling Line Identification to the Speed Dial bins. If a match
exists, the Name of the Speed Dial bin may be displayed in place of the number.
For an incoming call, the received identification may be sent to the selected serial port for output.
The output will appear as below:
Output at ring start:
AA : BBBBBBBBCCC
Output at ring stop (abandoned)
AA : BBBBBBBBCCC : DDDDDDDDD(EEE)
Output at answer
AA : BBBBBBBBCCC : DDDDDDDDD(EEE) -> FFF
Where:

AA – ISDN CO line number

BB…B –Calling/Connected Line Identification received

CCC – Called station

DD…D – Speed Dial name

EEE – Speed Dial bin number

FFF – Answering station
286
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
The system will send calling and answering party identification in the appropriate messages to the
ISDN based on the database. Identification messages may be restricted, not reported, to the farend user. Calling Line Identification Restriction and Connected Line Identification Restriction may
be enabled in the system database or you may activate restrictions with a {CLIR} and {COLR}
Flex buttons.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To program {CLIR} button,
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “81” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To program {COLR} button,
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “82” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate CLIR or COLR, before placing or answering an ISDN call
1. Press the {CLIR} or {COLR} Flex button.
Conditions
1. This feature may not be available in the specific ISDN service area or may be a
subscription service.
Programming
STATION
CLIP LCD Display (PGM 114-Button 1)
COLP LCD Display (PGM 114-Button 2)
CO/IP
COLP Table Index (PGM 143-Button 1)
Type of Calling Number (PGM 143-Button 4)
ISDN/ICLID
CLIP Print to Serial Port (PGM 200-Button 2)
Related Features
Hardware

ISDN Line
287
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.14.2
Issue 1.0
ISDN AOC (Advice of Charge)
Description
When ISDN Advice of Charge service is provided from the ISDN, the iPECS system will deliver
charge information for display in the LCD of iPECS IP and LDP Phones and include the AOC in
SMDR records. AOC is implemented in accordance with ETSI ISDN AOC Specifications.
Operation
System
ETSI standard AOC operation is automatic.
Conditions
1. AOC information, which is implemented based on ETSI AOC standard, can be sent
during call set-up (AOC-S), during the call (AOC-D) or at the end of call (AOC-E).
2. This feature may not be available in the specific ISDN service area or may be a
subscription service.
Programming
SYSTEM
SMDR attributes (PGM 177)
CO/IP
Advice of Charge Type (PGM 143-Button 9)
Related Features

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Call Cost Display
Hardware

ISDN Line
288
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.14.3
Issue 1.0
Keypad Facility
Description
The ISDN Keypad Facility Information Element (IE) may enable the user to activate certain ISDN
services (e.g. Off-Net Forward). To access this facility, the station must be enabled and have a
{KEYPAD FACILITY} Flex button. When activated, the digits dialed by a user are sent in the
Keypad Facility IE instead of the Called Party Number IE.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To program {KEYPAD FACILITY} button;
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “89” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate the keypad facility while on an ISDN line
1. Press the {KEYPAD FACILITY} button.
2. Dial desired digits; other actions disable the Keypad facility feature.
Conditions
1. This feature can be activated or deactivated only after an ISDN Line is seized.
2. Once activated, the system will continue to send dialed digits as Keypad Facility IE
messages regardless of other ISDN messages. Thus, in the connected mode, DTMF
tones are not sent to the connected party, only the keypad message is sent.
3. If a Speed Dial bin includes the [MESSAGE/CALLBACK] button as the first entry, the
remaining digits in the Speed Dial number are sent in a Keypad Facility IE.
4. This feature may not be available in the specific ISDN or may be a subscription service.
5. The system can handle only a single Call Reference; services that require handling of
two simultaneous Call References, cannot be supported.
Programming
STATION
Flex Button Assignment (PGM 115)
Related Features

Station Speed Dial

System Speed Dial
Hardware


iPECS IP or LDP Phone
ISDN Line
289
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.14.4
Issue 1.0
Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN)
Description
Up to eight (8) Subscriber Numbers (telephone numbers) can be served by a Basic Rate
Interface allowing Direct-Dial-In call delivery. This “Sub-Address” information is included as digits
in the Called Party Number Information Element.
When the MSN or Sub-address information is received, the system references the MSN Table for
an index to the Flexible DID Table, which determines call routing. If no index to Flexible DID
Table is assigned then the call routes to all stations that have an idle {MSN} button corresponding
to the MSN Telephone Number received or to a button for the outside Line. If none is available,
the call routes employing the DID/DISA Destination (PGM 167).
The system will use the MSN number when a call is received using an MSN button on ISDN or
SIP Lines.
Operation
System
Operation of the MSN feature is automatic when configured.
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To program an {MSN} button;
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “85” + “#” ’+ MSN digits + [HOLD/SAVE]
Conditions
1. If the Called Party Number from the ISDN does not match an MSN Table entry, the
received digits are treated as defined for DID calls to determine an index to the Flexible
DID Table.
2. The MSN Table employs the outside Line entry as a quick look-up reference. If the
Line number is programmed in the MSN Table, then only those entries with the Line
number are searched, otherwise the entire MSN Table is searched for a match to the
Called Party Number.
3. When assigning an {MSN} button the “MSN digits” should match one of the MSN
Table entries. To assign an MSN button on the phone, the MSN number must exist in
the system MSN Table.
4. An MSN loop button is overwritten by an individual CO line button, if it is exist. On the
other hand, an MSN loop button is not overwritten by CO Group button.
5. Multiple duplicate {MSN LOOP} buttons can be assigned on an iPECS IP or LDP
Phone.
6. If enabled in SMDR, the MSN number is output as the Account code for outgoing calls
employing an MSN button.
7. MSN Call Wait can be assigned to deliver the call to a busy station. If not assigned, the
call is routed using the DID/DISA Destination (PGM 167) or is disconnected.
290
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Programming
STATION
MSN Wait (PGM 114-Button 12)
Flexible Button Assignment (PGM 115)
CO/IP
CO/IP Attributes III (PGM 143)
ISDN/ICLID
ISDN Attributes (PGM 200)
MSN Table Attributes (PGM 202)
System
Print MSN on SMDR (PGM 177-Button 21)
Related Features

Direct Inward Dial (DID)
Hardware

ISDN or SIP Line
291
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.15
Issue 1.0
ISDN Supplementary Services
In many cases, the ISDN service provider offers enhanced services, to which a user may
subscribe. The iPECS system allows access to these ISDN “Supplementary Services”
implemented under the ETSI regime as described below.
4.15.1
ISDN Call Deflection
Description
When the ISDN Supplementary Service “Call Deflection” is supported, you can forward incoming
calls on the ISDN line directly through the ISDN without the need to establish a connection
through the system.
When Call Deflection is used, the system sends a call-deflection request message with the
telephone number to receive the call to the ISDN. The ISDN then sends incoming calls to the
desired telephone number. In this case, the system does not set-up a Line to Line (Unsupervised
Conference) connection for the call.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate ISDN Call Deflection to an external number
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive dial tone.
2. Press the [FWD] button.
3. Dial Forward condition (“1”~“4”, “#”)
4. Press [SPEED] button and desired bin number.
5. Replace the handset to return to idle.
To deactivate ISDN Call Deflection
1. Press flashing [FWD] button, Call Forward will deactivate and the [FWD] button
LED is off.
Conditions
1. The ISDN must support the Call Deflection Supplementary Service as defined by the
ETS300-202/206/207 standard protocol.
2. ISDN lines that support Call Deflection must be assigned in the system database.
Programming
CO/IP
ISDN-SS CD/CR (PGM 143-Button 7)
Related Features

ISDN Supplementary Services
Hardware


ISDN Line
iPECS IP or LDP Phone
292
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.15.2
Issue 1.0
ISDN Malicious Call ID Request
Description
When the ISDN supports the Malicious Caller Id supplementary service, iPECS can request the
Calling Line ID (CLID) from the ISDN. The CLID is saved and output in the SMDR call record.
Malicious Caller Id is activated during an ISDN call and requires a {MCID REQUEST} Flex button
to access the feature.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To program an {MCID REQUEST} button;
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “*0” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To request MCID, while on an incoming ISDN call
1. Press the {MCID REQUEST} button; the CLID is output in the SMDR.
Conditions
1. The ISDN must support the Malicious Caller Id Supplementary Service as defined by
the EN300-130 standard protocol.
2. If the MCID request is successful, the SMDR call record will include the CLID returned
from the ISDN and the characters “MT”. If the request fails, the characters “MF” are
included in the record.
3. If the system is programmed to save SMDR records, the MCID is stored in the system
memory as part of the call record.
Programming
CO/IP
MCID Request (PGM 109-Button 1)
SYSTEM
SMDR Save (PGM 177-Button 1)
Related Features

ISDN Supplementary Services

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Hardware

ISDN Line

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
293
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.16
Issue 1.0
Line Monitor
Description
When a Line is configured in the system and the system determines that the service provider
connection is lost, the Line is placed in an Out-of-Service condition. In this state, the Line cannot
be employed for an outgoing call but incoming calls operate normally.
Operation
Operation of this feature is either automatic (when programmed) or by Web Admin.
Conditions
Programming
CO/IP
Line Monitoring (PGM148-Button 12)
Related Features
Hardware
294
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.17
Issue 1.0
Multiple Calling Line Ids
Description
Using an ISDN Line, sending your Id (telephone number) to the other party is referred to as
Calling Line Id Presentation (CLIP) or Connected Line ID Presentation. When you place or
receive a call, the system constructs your Id and sends the information to the service provider.
The Id consists of the Area Code + COLP/CLIP Table value + a Station CLI.
There are five Station CLIs associated with your station and each ISDN Line is assigned to use
one of the five. The five CLIs are identified as “Station CLI 1” through “Station CLI 5”. As a default,
the “Station CLI 1” is your station number. Each of the five Station CLIs can be assigned up to 16
digits.
In addition to the Station CLI, each Line is assigned a COLP/CLIP Table entry number (00~50).
The corresponding Table value is a digit string of up to ten (10) digits. Also, each ISDN Line is
assigned an Area code.
Note if the COLP/CLIP Table entry is set at 50, the “Station CLI 1” is always used and the Area
code and Table value are not added to the “Station CLI 1”. That is only the “Station CL 1” is used
as your Id.
Operation
Operation of this feature is automatic as configured.
Conditions
1. Your station can be assigned to restrict sending an Id for the call.
2. Your station can be configured to replace your Station CLI with the Station CLI of the
Attendant.
3. As a default, the Line is assigned to use the Station CLI (Station CLI 1) and ISDN
Lines use the COLP/CLIP Table entry 50 or “Station CLI” in the Web Admin.
4. The ISDN Line can be assigned to use different Table entries for the COLP and CLIP
values.
5. For Transit calls additional options are available to employ the CLI of the original
forwarding party.
6. The LCD of the station can display the CLI or COL Id if CLIP and COLP Display is
enabled.
7. Multiple Calling Line Ids applies to SIP trunks when the “From Id is assigned to use the
Extension CLI.
Programming
STATION
CO/IP
Station CLI 1 (PGM 114-Button 6)
Station CLI 2 (PGM 114-Button 24-1)
Station CLI 3 (PGM 114-Button 24-2)
Station CLI 4 (PGM 114-Button 24-3)
Station CLI 5 (PGM 114-Button 24-4)
CLI Type (PGM 143-Button 24-1)
COLP Table Index (PGM 143-Button 1)
CLIP Table Index (PGM 143-Button 2)
Related Features
Hardware
295
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.18
Issue 1.0
Outside Line Groups
Description
The outside Lines, in the system can be placed together into groups for assigning access by
stations and common access dial codes as well as to separate the type of Line (analog, digital or
IP). There are 20 Line groups in the eMG80.
Unused Lines are assigned to Group 21 in the eMG80. Private Lines are assigned to Group 00.
Operation
Conditions
1. Unused outside Lines must be assigned to the appropriate group so that stations do
not accidentally access these lines.
2. Outside Lines in Groups 01 through 20 can be accessed individually by dialing the
code “88” and the Line number.
3. An outside Line in Group 00 can be accessed only with a Flex button assigned to the
Line.
4. The system will select an outside Line from a group based on the Round Robin or Last
Choice method as configured in the system database.
Programming
STATION
CO PGM (PGM 112-Button 6)
CO/IP
CO/IP Group (PGM 141-Button 1)
SYSTEM
CO Line Choice (PGM 160-Button 4)
Related Features
Hardware
296
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.19
Issue 1.0
Outside Line Preset Forward
Description
Each outside Line can be assigned a Ring-No-Answer Preset Forward destination. An incoming
call on the Line will be routed to the defined Forward destination. At expiration of the Preset
Forward timer, the call forwards to the defined Preset Forward destination, which is an index to
the ICLID Ring Assignment Table.
The destination can be a station or station group including an adjunct Voice Mail. When the call
forwards to an adjunct Voice Mail group, a predefined Voice Mail Id (VMID) is sent to the VM
system to identify the Mailbox to receive the call.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
1.
2.
3.
4.
Outside Line Preset Forward is disabled for calls initially routed to a station group.
Outside Line Preset Forward will override Call Forward No-Answer at a station.
Outside Line Preset Forward is disabled if the Preset Forward Timer is set to 0.
The outside Line Preset Forward destination cannot be the integrated Voice Mail group.
Programming
CO/IP
Preset Forward timer (PGM 147-Button 1)
Ring Table Index (PGM 147-Button 2)
VMID Number (PGM 147-Button 3)
ISDN & ICLID
ICLID Ring Assignment Table (PGM 204)
Related Features

Call Forward

ICLID Call Routing
Hardware
297
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.20
Issue 1.0
Outside Line Ring Assignment
Description
Each station in the system can be programmed to provide an audible signal when the system
detects an incoming call on specified Lines. Separate ring assignments are made for Day, Night
and Timed Ring operation mode. In addition, the audible signal at the station can be delayed by 1
to 9 ring cycles allowing other stations to answer the call first.
Operation
System
Operation of this feature is automatic.
Conditions
1. Separate assignments are made for stations to ring in the Day, Night and/or Timed
Ring mode.
2. A busy station receives muted ring or Call Waiting tones as appropriate for the station’s
Off-hook ring assignment.
3. The system Ring mode can be selected manually by the Attendant or automatically. In
the Automatic mode, Day/Night selection is determined based on the Automatic Ring
Mode Selection table.
4. The LCD of the Attendant station will display Night and Timed Ring Mode and the
[DND] button LED will flash.
5. If an outside Line is not assigned to ring at any station, incoming calls on the outside
line will ring the first available Attendant.
Programming
CO/IP
CO Ring Assignment (PGM 144)
TABLES
Weekly Time Table (PGM 233)
Related Features

Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode

Auto Service Mode Control

Off-Hook Signaling
Hardware
298
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.21
Issue 1.0
Private Line
Description
Your iPECS IP or LDP Phone can be assigned exclusive use of one or more outside Lines.
These “Private” lines are assigned to a special Line Group (group 00). To use a Line from this
group, your phone must be assigned a Flex button for the outside Line appearance.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To place an outgoing Private line call
1. Press the {LINE} button assigned as the Private line, dial tone is received from the
Line.
2. Dial the desired number.
To answer an incoming Private line call
1. Press the flashing {LINE} button.
Conditions
1. Private lines will not recall to the Attendant station.
2. Private lines are not subject to Call Pick-Up except by an assigned Secretary with an
appearance of the Private line.
3. When put on hold, a Private line will recall the user after the appropriate Hold timer.
The user will receive recall for the Hold Recall time, and, if still unanswered, the user
will continue to receive recall for the Attendant Recall time. If the call remains
unanswered, at expiration of the Attendant Recall time, the call will be disconnected
and the Private line returned to idle.
4. A Private line will follow Call Forwarding only if the receiving station has an appearance
({LINE} button) for the Private line. However, calls on a Private line can be forward to
the Voice Mail permitting a voice mail to be recorded.
5. IP channels cannot be assigned as Private lines.
Programming
STATION
Flex Button Assignment (PGM 115)
CO/IP
CO/IP Line Group (PGM 141-Button 1)
Related Features




Hold
Call Forward
Executive/Secretary Forward
Call Forward, Preset
Hardware

iPECS IP and LDP Phones
299
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
5. IPECS PHONE
5.1 Answering Machine Emulation
Description
When a call is sent to a Voice mailbox, the associated station can be assigned to notify you and
allow you to screen the call. Two methods of notification and call screening are provided, Ring or
Speaker mode.
In the Ring mode, you are notified by flashing of the AME (Answering Machine Emulation) Flex
button. You may press the Flex button to hear the caller as the voice message is stored. In the
Speaker mode, when the call is sent to the Voice Mailbox, the caller’s voice is automatically
broadcast over the speaker of your iPECS IP or LDP Phone.
You may terminate the screening leaving the caller in voice mail to record a message, talk with
the caller and record the conversation in the mailbox, or answer the call and disconnect the Voice
Mail.
Your iPECS IP or LDP Phone must be assigned with an AME Flex button for proper operation.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign an {AME} button:
Manual Mode:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “564” + “0” + [HOLD/SAVE]
Auto Mode
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “564” + “1” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To screen a call in the Manual mode;
1. Press the flashing {AME} button, the caller’s voice is broadcast over the station
speaker and stored in the Voice Mailbox.
To stop the voice broadcast and leave the caller in Voice Mail;
1. Press the illuminated [SPEAKER] button.
To talk with the caller and record the conversation in Voice Mail;
1. Press the illuminated [MUTE] button.
To answer the call and cancel the voice message;
1. Press the illuminated {AME} button, the caller is connected and the Voice Mail
disconnected.
300
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Conditions
1. AME is supported only on iPECS IP and LDP Phones and an {AME} Flex button must
be assigned on the phone.
2. If you answer a call using the {AME} button, the caller is connected in the normal
manner, the Voice Mail is disconnected and, with the integrated Voice Mail, any
message recorded by the caller is not stored.
Programming
NUMBERING
AME Feature (PGM 109-Button 2)
Related Features

External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
301
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
5.2 Auto Called Number Redial (ACNR)
Description
This feature allows you to request and have the system retry a busy or no answer external call
until the call is connected or the feature is cancelled.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate ACNR while receiving busy, no answer
1. Press the [REDIAL] button.
2. Hang-up handset, or press [SPEAKER].
To cancel ACNR while idle
1. Press flashing [REDIAL] button.
To cancel ACNR during an ACNR attempt
1. Lift the handset or press the [MUTE] or flashing [REDIAL] button.
SLT Phone
To activate ACNR while receiving busy, no answer
1. Place the outside call as normal.
2. If the called party is busy or does not answer, press and release the hook-switch,
intercom dial tone should be heard.
3. Dial ‘58#’, the ACNR code.
4. Wait off-hook until the call is answered.
System
1. The system initiates the ACNR process, starting the ACNR Pause Timer.
2. At expiration of the timer, the system activates the station’s speakerphone with the
microphone in the mute mode.
3. The system attempts the previous call.
4. When the called party answers, the user may answer by lifting the handset or
pressing the [MUTE] button to communicate with called party.
Conditions
1. Four timers and a retry counter can be programmed.
ACNR Pause Time
Time allowed between ACNR attempts.
ACNR Delay Timer At expiration of Pause Timer, if no Line is available,
the system will wait for delay timer before attempting
302
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
to access a Line.
ACNR Tone Detect
After dialing, the system will abandon the attempt if
no tone or answer is detected within the Tone Detect
time.
ACNR Retry Count Count determines the number of times system will
attempt the call before ACNR is automatically
cancelled.
2. The call will be placed on the same outside Line as originally used. If the Line is busy,
an available Line in the same Line group will be seized.
3. The ACNR Retry Counter decrements by one when the system completes the dialed
number.
4. When the ACNR Pause Timer expires, if the station is in a busy state, the ACNR Delay
Timer is invoked.
5. Upon completion of dialing, the system will monitor the call for progress signals.
6. To preserve ACNR feature in activated state, SLT user does not go On-Hook.
7. While ACNR dialing or waiting state, if SLT user goes On-Hook, then SLT ACNR is
deactivated, automatically.
8. While ACNR is active for an SLT, the SLT user cannot receive or place a call.
Programming
SYSTEM
ACNR Delay Timer (PGM 180-Button 8)
ACNR Pause Timer (PGM 180-Button 9)
ACNR Retry Counter (PGM 180-Button 10)
ACNR Tone Detect Timer (PGM 180-Button 11)
NUMBERING
SLT ACNR Code (PGM 109-Button 19)
Related Features

LNR (Last Number Redial)

Speakerphone

Mute
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
303
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
5.3 Auto Release of [SPEAKER]
Description
After completion of certain features, the [SPEAKER] button turns off automatically, returning the
iPECS IP or LDP Phone to idle.
Operation
System
Auto Release of the [SPEAKER] button operation is automatic for supported features, see
conditions below.
Conditions
1. This feature applies to all User and Attendant Programming except Custom Message,
outside Line Disable and Version Display. Auto Release of [SPEAKER] button also
applies to features including Call Park, Call Back, Call Forward and Queuing.
2. If, during Station User Programming, erroneous data is entered, error tone is received
and the user must correct the error before the station will return to idle automatically.
Programming
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
304
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
5.4 Automatic Speaker Select
Description
The iPECS IP and LDP Phones programmed for Auto Speaker Select can access an outside
Line or an internal call by pressing the appropriate button without the need to lift the handset or
press the [SPEAKER] button. Audio from the call is sent to the speaker and the microphone is
active, as if you pressed the [SPEAKER] button to answer the call. This is useful if you are
receiving a call but want to place a call instead of answering the ringing call or if you multiple calls
ringing at your phone, you can select the call to answer.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To access an internal or external system resource;
1. Press a {FLEX} button for the Line or station.
Conditions
1. For iPECS IP and LDP Phones not equipped/assigned with speakerphone, the user
must lift the handset to be heard.
2. Paging while on the speakerphone will cause feedback from the paging equipment. If
Auto Speaker is enabled and a {PAGE ZONE} button is pressed, the display will show
"LIFT THE HANDSET". To complete the page, the user must lift the handset within the
predefined 5-second period or return to idle.
Programming
STATION
Auto Speaker Select (PGM 111-Button 1)
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
305
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
5.5 Background Music (BGM)
Description
The iPECS IP and LDP Phones can receive audio, generally music, from an internal or external
source while idle. Music from the source is received over the speaker and will be shut-off during
ringing, pages, or while the station is off-hook.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To Receive Background Music,
1. Press [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “73”, the BGM code.
3. Dial the two (2)-digit (00-10) BGM source.
00 – no BGM
01 – Music 1 (Internal)
02 – Music 2 (External)
03 – System Announcement MOH 1
04 – SLT MOH 1
05 – SLT MOH 2
06 – SLT MOH 3
07 – SLT MOH 4
08 – SLT MOH 5
09 – System Announcement MOH 2
10 – System Announcement MOH 3
4. Press [HOLD/SAVE] to save your selection.
Attendant
To Transmit BGM through an External Page Port from an Attendant
1. Press [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “074” or “075”, the Attendant Station Program code for External Page Port 1
and 2, respectively.
3. Dial the two (2)-digit (00-10) BGM source.
00 – no BGM
01 – Music 1 (Internal)
02 – Music 2 (External)
03 – System Announcement MOH 1
04 – SLT MOH 1
306
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
05 – SLT MOH 2
06 – SLT MOH 3
07 – SLT MOH 4
08 – SLT MOH 5
09 – System Announcement MOH 2
10 – System Announcement MOH 3
4. Press [HOLD/SAVE] to save your selection.
Conditions
1. The speaker volume is adjustable at the station by using the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN]
buttons.
2. BGM is delayed 1 second after a return to idle state.
3. Silence is provided if no BGM source is assigned.
4. For remote devices, BGM must be locally provided; BGM is not sent from the eMG80
system to remote devices.
5. System Announcement MOH 1 employs System announcement 001 and must be
recorded properly. System announcement MOH2 and MOH3 may use any unused
System announcement except for announcement 071 and 072. The announcement
number must be defined in the Music Sources program (PGM 171).
6. For SLT MOH, the SLT port must be connected properly and the station number of the
SLT port used for MOH must be assigned as the SLT MOH port.
Programming
SYSTEM
BGM Type (PGM 171-Button 1)
Internal MOH Type (PGM 171-Button 3)
Assign SLT MOH Port (PGM 171-Button 4)
VSF MOH2 (PGM 171-Button 5)
VSF MOH3 (PGM 171-Button 6)
Related Features

MOH (Music-On-Hold)

Internal/External & All Call Page
Hardware

An external music source properly connected to the KSU, refer to the iPECS eMG80
Hardwar Description and Installation Manual.
307
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
5.6 Call Log Display
Description
Using an iPECS IP Phone with 3-Soft buttons, you can view a log of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls on the display. A Flex button must be assigned as a {CALL LOG} button, which
allows easy access to the Call Log menu.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {CALL LOG} button:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “57” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To access the Call Log menu;
1. Press the {CALL LOG} button.
1. RECEIVED CALL
2. DIALED CALL
OK
2. Using the volume Up/Down keys, select the desired log (received, dialed, or missed).
123467890
24/07 14:51
BACK
DELETE
OK
Conditions
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP and LDP Phones with LCD
308
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
5.7 Call Profile Routing
Description
Call Profile Routing is an extension of the Station ICR feature. You can configure and assign up
to ten (10) scenarios to each of the three (3) Call Profiles. Then you can activate a Call Profile to
route your calls.
The system will attempt to route your incoming calls to the first destination that meets the
scenario. If the destination does not answer in the Profile Timer, the call routes to the next
destination.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To create a Call Profile Scenario:
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial “24”, the ICR menu code
Or Log in to the Station Web Portal.
2. Select the desired Scenario number (0 - 9).
3. Select the type of Caller ID (0 – 5):
 Type 0 – Station CID
 Type 1 - All Station
 Type 2 – CO CID
 Type 3 - All CO call
 Type 4 - All call
 Type 5 - N/A
4. Enter the Scenario Start and End Date (YYMMDD).
5. Select day-of-week using Flex button:
 Flex button 1 (MON) – Flex button 7 (SUN)
 Flex 8 button (Holiday)
6. Enter scenario Start Time and End time (HHMM).
7. Select Type of destination (0 – 6):
 Type 0 – Station
 Type 1 - Hunt group
 Type 2 - CO Line Number
 Type 3 - CO Group number
 Type 4 - CO Loop
 Type 5 - CO Transit
 Type 6 - N/A
8. Select Scenario Priority (0 to 9) (0: highest priority).
9. Select Forward From Net (0/1).
10. Select Call Profile Table Index (0-3).
309
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
11. Select Call Profile Timer (10–60 seconds).
To activate ICR Call Forward:
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive a dial tone.
2. Press the [FWD] button.
3. Dial the desired Call Forward code (0-4).
4. Dial “587”, the Station ICR code.
5. Replace the handset, return to idle.
To activate/deactivate a Profile from your phone:
1. Activate ICR Call Forward
2. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial “26”, the Call Profile menu
Or Log in to the Station Web portal.
3. Select the Call Profile Table desired (“0”: ICR or “1”-“3”: Call Profile 1-3).
To change Call Profile while away from your phone:
1. Call to iPECS System (DISA CO Line).
2. Dial “#” to access your Voice Mailbox.
3. Enter your Station Number and Authentication code.
4. Dial “7” to set call forward
5. Enter “1” to set Station Call forward.
6. Enter “Station ICR Code”.
7. Enter “Call Profile Number” (0: ICR Forward, 1-3: Call Profile 1-3).
Conditions
1. Call Profile Routing is available on digital and IP Lines only and is applied to outside
calls that are routed to your phone as a Transfer, DID or DISA call. Calls that are
assigned to Ring to your phone are not subject Call Profile Forward.
2. The conditions associated with Station ICR apply to Call Profile Routing.
3. It is recommended hunt group is set last call profile destination.
Programming
STATION
Call Forward (PGM 111-Button 2)
Station Call Forward No Answer Timer (PGM 123-Button 1)
SYSTEM
System Call Forward No Answer Timer (PGM 181-Button 1)
Related Features

Call Forward

Station ICR
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
310
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
5.8 DID Call Wait
Description
If you are busy on a call and you receive a DID call, the call will, as a default, follow the reroute
assignments for the DID call destination (PGM 167). The system can be configured to queue the
call to your station allowing you to end or hold your active call to answer the DID call. The DID call
will queue for the DID/DISA No-answer time then will route based on the reroute assignments.
DID Call Wait is defined in the system database or can be controlled by you with a DID Call Wait
Flex button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a {DID/DISA CALL WAIT} button:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “34” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate/deactivate DID call wait
1. Press the {DID/DISA CALL WAIT} button.
2. Dial activate/deactivate code, “1” or “0” respectively.
Conditions
1. Other routing such as Preset Call Forward applies to DID calls even if DID Call Wait is
active.
2. DID calls will follow the call routing defined in PGM 167 after the expiration of the
DID/DISA no answer timer.
3. An iPECS IP or LDP Phone must have an appearance button for the DID line.
4. Assigning the ICLID Timer, which enables ICLID routing, for a DID line, disables DID
Call Wait.
Programming
STATION
DID/DISA Wait (PGM 113-Button 9)
CO/IP LINE
ICLID Timer (PGM 142-Button 14)
SYSTEM
DID/DISA Destination (PGM 167)
DID/DISA No Answer Timer (PGM 181-Button 2)
Related Features

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Direct Inward Dial (DID)

ICLID Call Routing
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
311
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
5.9 DND – One-Time DND
Description
While on a call, if you wish not to be interrupted by another call, pressing the DND button will
activate One-time DND. For the duration of the active call your phone will be in DND. One-time
DND can be activated while you are on a call and receiving ring for a new call. In this case,
pressing the DND button will terminate the ringing and the call is routed based on the following
precedence:

Previous or active Call Forward busy.

Preset Call Forward busy.

Station Call Coverage.

Direct Transfer to Voice Mailbox.

Return busy signal and disconnect.
When you complete your active call, DND is cancelled and the [DND] LED is extinguished.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate One-Time DND while ringing
1. Press the [DND] button, the [DND] LED lights, station goes to DND state.
System
Deactivation
1. When the station returns to idle, DND is disabled and the [DND] LED extinguishes.
Conditions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Outside Line recalls will override One-Time DND.
Your station must be permitted to activate DND to activate One0time DND.
A station cannot reject a call from the Attendant using One-time DND.
One-time DND is not available to the Attendant.
One Time DND cancels existing Callback queues.
Programming
STATION
DND (PGM 111-Button 3)
Call Forward (PGM 111-Button 2)
Preset Call Forward (PGM 120)
Direct Transfer to Mail box (PGM 120-Button 6)
SYSTEM
System Call Forward No Answer Timer (PGM 181-Button 1)
312
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Related Features

Call Waiting/Camp-On

DND (Do Not Disturb)

Call Forward

Call Forward, Preset

Station Call Coverage
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
313
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.10
Issue 1.0
Flex Button Direct Speed Dial Assignment
Description
You may program a telephone number directly to a Flex button without the need to assign the
number to a Speed Dial bin. In this case, the system automatically allocates the telephone
number to the highest numbered unused Station Speed Dial bin.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a telephone number to a Flex button;
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Press the desired Flex button.
3. Press the [TEL NUM] soft button or, for iPECS 24D and 24DH phones, press the
[ICM] button.
4. Press the outside Line button or dial the Line access code.
5. Dial the telephone number.
6. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
7. Dial the name to be associated with the number (optional).
8. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To place a call to the assigned telephone number;
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the assigned Flex button.
Conditions
1. When a Flex button is assigned with a telephone number, the system will allocate the
number to the highest available Station Speed Dial bin. If no bin is available, you
receive error tone when attempting to assign the telephone number.
2. The telephone number may include any of the special Speed Dial instructions
([MESSAGE/CALLBACK], [FLASH], display security, etc.).
Programming
Related Features

Station Speed Dial
Hardware

iPECS IP and LDP Phone
314
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.11
Issue 1.0
Flexible LED Flash Rates
Description
The flash rates used with the various buttons on the iPECS IP and LDP Phones can be adjusted
on a system wide basis to meet your needs. Up to 35 different functions can be assigned any one
of 15 different flash rates.
Operation
System
System implements flash rates automatically based on database entries.
Conditions
1. Available Flash rates and functions, which can be assigned, are given in the iPECS
eMG80 Admin & Maintenance Manual.
Programming
SYSTEM
LED Flashing Rates (PGM 170-Button 1~35)
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
315
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.12
Issue 1.0
Group Listening
Description
The iPECS IP and LDP Phones have a built-in speaker. If allowed, you may employ the speaker
to monitor a call while using the handset to converse with the outside party. This enables a group
of people in the room to listen to both parties in the conversation.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
While on a call using the handset
1. Press the [SPEAKER] button, speaker activates, the speakerphone microphone will
be muted while the handset is off-hook.
Conditions
1. While using the speakerphone, lifting the handset will turn off the speakerphone. To
activate Group Listening, the [SPEAKER] button must be pressed while the handset is
off-hook.
2. With Group Listen active, pressing the [MUTE] button will mute the handset
microphone. The connected party is still heard over both the handset receiver and the
speaker.
3. If full speakerphone operation is desired and permitted with Group Listen active, simply
place the handset on-hook.
Programming
STATION
Group Listening (PGM 113-Button 3)
Related Features

Speakerphone

Mute
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
316
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.13
Issue 1.0
Intercom Signaling Mode
Description
You can set the signaling you receive when your iPECS IP and LDP Phone receives an incoming
ICM calls while the station is idle. There are three signaling modes available.
H - Call announce with Handsfree answerback:
When an ICM call is received, you hear a brief splash of tone followed by the caller’s voice. You
may respond to the caller without the need to “Lift the handset” or “press the [SPEAKER] button”.
P - Call announce with Privacy:
When an ICM call is received, you receive a brief splash of tone followed by the caller’s voice. To
respond you must lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
T - Tone ringing:
An ICM call will cause your iPECS IP or LDP Phone to provide audible ICM ring tone. You must
lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] to answer the call.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To change ICM Signaling Mode
1. Press [TRANS/PGM] button, the [SPEAKER] button LED lights steady.
2. Dial the Station User Program code “13”, confirmation tone is received.
3. Dial the desired ICM Signaling Mode code (“1” for H, “2” for T or “3” for P).
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. Message Wait, Callback, Call Forward and Attendant Override will ring in the tone
mode, regardless of ICM Signaling Mode you select.
2. The ICM signaling Mode Selection does not affect Page announcements.
3. The default ICM Signaling mode is Tone ring and the active mode is stored in batteryprotected memory.
4. An SLT always functions in the Tone ring mode.
Programming
Related Features






Intercom Call (ICM Call)
Paging
Message Wait/Call Back
Call Forward
DND Override
Intrusion
Hardware

• iPECS IP or LDP Phone
317
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.14
Issue 1.0
Microphone Mute
Description
You can turn off the microphone of your iPECS IP or LDP Phone, which will stop audio
transmission from the handset, speakerphone or headset microphone, “Mic Mute”.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To Mute the Microphone;
1. Press the [MUTE] button, the [MUTE] button LED is on and the microphone
(Handset, Speakerphone, Headset) is muted; the connected party receives silence.
To activate the microphone;
1. Press the illuminated [MUTE] button, the [MUTE] button LED is off, and the
microphone is activated, transmitting audio to the connected party.
Conditions
1. Changing from speakerphone to handset or vice versa during a mute condition will
returns the microphone to an active status; your voice is transmitted to the connected
party.
2. Returning to idle or placing another outside Line or intercom call will change the mute
status to its normal (active microphone) condition.
Programming
STATION
Headset Ring (PGM 111-Button 8)
Speakerphone/Headset Selection (PGM 111-Button 9)
Related Features

Speakerphone

Group Listening

Headset Compatibility
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
318
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.15
Issue 1.0
Off-Hook Signaling
Description
When you receive a call while you are on an active call, you will receive the assigned Off-hook
signals. For ICM calls, a Camp-On, Voice-Over Announcement or Off-hook ring signal may be
received. For outside calls, you will receive a muted ring or a single tone burst. This signal is
delivered to the iPECS IP or LDP Phone speaker. SLTs will only receive camp-on tones.
Operation
System
Operation of Off-hook ring signals is automatically controlled.
Conditions
1. While using the speakerphone, a Camp-On tone is provided over the speaker in place
of the assigned Off-hook ring Signal.
2. Activating DND or One-Time DND places the station in DND, terminating any Off-hook
signaling.
3. Off-hook ring signals terminate when the call forwards or is answered, or abandoned.
4. A station, which is receiving Off-hook ring signals, will receive normal ring upon return
to idle status.
Programming
CO/IP
CO Line Ring Assignment (PGM 144)
SYSTEM
Off-Hook Ring Type (PGM 161-Button 1)
Related Features

Call Waiting/Camp-On

Outside Line Ring Assignment

DND (Do Not Disturb)

DND – One-Time DND
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
319
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.16
Issue 1.0
On-Hook Dialing
Description
Using your iPECS IP or LDP Phones equipped with a Speakerphone, you can place as well as
receive calls while the handset is on-hook.
With Automatic Speaker Select, you need not press the speaker button to initiate a call, simply
dial the number or press a button to activate the Speakerphone is automatically.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate On-Hook Dialing
1. Place desired call (dial station ICM number, select a Line and dial, etc.) the
[SPEAKER] button LED lights and the call is processed.
Conditions
1. When you place a call in using On-hook dialing, you activate the Speakerphone and,
you must press the illuminated [SPEAKER] button to return to idle.
2. When the speakerphone is used, the microphone is active unless the [MUTE] button is
pressed and the [MUTE] button LED is On.
Programming
STATION
Auto Speaker Selection (PGM 111-Button 1)
Related Features

Mute

Speakerphone

Automatic Speaker Select

Headset Compatibility

Group Listening
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
320
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.17
Issue 1.0
Outside Line Name Display
Description
When you receive or place and outside call, the Line number is displayed in the LCD. If the Line
is assigned a name and Name display is enabled, the Line name is displayed instead of the
number.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To display the Line name
1. Press the {LINE} button, or dial a Line/Group access code, LCD displays the Line
name.
Conditions
1. Each outside Line is assigned a name of up to 12 characters in the system database.
Programming
CO/IP
CO Line Name Display (PGM 142-Button 1)
CO Line Name Assign (PGM 142-Button 2)
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone w/Display
321
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.18
Issue 1.0
Prime Line Immediate/Delayed
Description
When you go to an off-hook state, the system normally provides ICM dial tone. If desired, a
station can be assigned to access a different pre-assigned system resource (Prime Line). The
Prime Line can be any of the Idle Line Settings:

Seize an outside Line,

Call another station,

Activate a Flex button feature

Call to pre-assigned Hunt group

Call to pre-assigned station Speed

Call to pre-assigned system Speed
Prime Line access can be defined as immediate or delayed. When assigned immediate, upon an
off-hook event, the system provides access to the Prime Line. With Delayed Prime Line, you
receive normal Intercom dial tone for the Prime Line Delay timer and after the delay, the Prime
Line is accessed. This allows you to make a selection overriding the Prime Line.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To access the station’s Prime Line
1. Lift the handset or press [SPEAKER] button and take no action, Prime Line as
assigned will be accessed.
Conditions
1. Any of the station’s Flex buttons may be assigned as the Prime Line. When you lift the
handset or press the [SPEAKER] button, the system will act as if the Flex button had
pre-selected the button prior to going off-hook.
2. Selection of another Flex button or Feature button just prior to an off-hook event will
override the Prime Line assignment.
3. An SLT can be assigned an Idle Line Selection with a Speed Bin Number.
4. When Delayed Prime Line is set, you must wait, taking no action until the Prime Line is
accessed. You will receive ICM dial tone during this period and may dial any valid
numbering plan digit(s) or select a Flex button or feature button.
5. If the Prime Line Delay Timer is greater than Dial tone time-out, the Delayed Prime
Line will not activate. It will be necessary to reduce the delay timer or extend the Dial
tone time-out.
Programming
STATION
Prime Line setting (PGM 113-Button 7)
322
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Idle Line Selection (PGM 121)
SYSTEM
Prime Line Delay Timer (PGM 182-Button 6)
Related Features

Speakerphone

Intercom Call (ICM Call)

Station Flexible Buttons
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
323
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.19
Issue 1.0
Ring Tone Selection and Download
Description
You can select one of 14 Ring tones so that the iPECS IP Phone ring can be distinguished from
other nearby phones. Eight tones are stored in the iPECS IP Phone permanent memory. The first
four tones are fixed and the 5th through 8th Ring tone can be downloaded from a library of 10
tones stored in the system’s protected memory.
After downloading the tone from the system memory, it can be selected as the Differential Ring
Tone.
If using an LDP Phone, you can select one of 15 Ring tones stored in the phone.
Operation
iPECS IP Phone
To download a Ring Tone from the system memory:
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 15, Ring Tone Download code.
3. Dial the desired Ring tone location, “5”~“8”.
4. Dial digits “00” through “10” to hear the Ring Tones.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To select the downloaded Ring Tone:
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 11 for Intercom Ring tones, 12 for Line Ring tones.
3. Dial the digit (“5”~“8”) to select the Ring Tone.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
LDP Phone
To select the downloaded Ring Tone:
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial 11 for Intercom Ring tones, 12 for Line Ring tones.
3. Dial the digit (“1”~“15”) to select the Ring Tone.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The downloadable ring tone files are stored in system memory as *.wav files with a
maximum length of 4 seconds. These files can be replaced as desired using the Web
Upload function. Refer to the eMG80 Administration and Programming Manual for
details.
Programming
Related Features


Station User Programming & Codes
Differential Ring
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
324
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.20
Issue 1.0
Save Number Redial (SNR)
Description
The last dialed number on an outside call may be stored (up to 48 digits) in a buffer for future
redial. This number is saved in memory until you request a new number be stored. Numbers
dialed for subsequent calls do not affect the Save Number buffer.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To save a dialed number, after dialing the number on an outside call
1. After dialing and before hanging up, press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To save a dialed number using the LIP-8000/8000E series menu
1. After dialing and before hanging up, press the [RIGHT NAVIGATION] button.
2. Locate and press the [HOLD/SAVE] soft button.
To dial a saved number
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [SPEED] button.
3. Dial “#”.
To dial a saved number using the LIP-8000/8000E series menu
1. Press the [DIR] soft button.
2. Press the [SPEED] soft button.
3. Dial “#”.
Conditions
1. The saved number can be a maximum of 48 digits.
2. Dialing the saved number will automatically seize the outside Line that was used for
the original call. If the Line is busy, a Line from the same group will be selected and the
saved number dialed. If all Lines from the group are busy, you will receive the All Lines
busy tone and may queue.
3. If you press the [HOLD/SAVE] button after seizing a Line without dialing, the Save
Number Redial buffer will be erased.
4. If there is no {LINE} button, the call will be presented on a {POOL}, or {LOOP} button.
5. Save Number Redial is protected from power failure.
6. Manually dialing a Flash during an outside Line will cause only those digits after the
Flash to be stored and re-dialed as the Save Number Redial.
Programming
Related Features




Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
LNR (Last Number Redial)
CO Line Flash
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
325
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.21
Issue 1.0
Serial DSS/BLF Console
Description
The iPECS IP & LDP Phones can be connected to a DSS/BLF Console to provide additional
Flexible button for your use. This can be particularly useful for an Attendant or Secretarial
answering position.
The Console is attached to the phone through a serial cable connection and thus does not use
another station port on the system. There are three models of the Serial DSS/BLF Console:

LIP-8012DSS-12 button Console with paper button designation label

LIP-8012LSS-12 button Console with LCD for button designation label

LIP-8048DSS-48 button Console with paper button designation label

LIP-8040LSS-40 button Console with LCD with Triple color LED

LDP-7048DSS-48 button Console with paper button designation label

LDP-9048DSS-48 button Console with paper button designation label
The DSS models employ a paper label strip to designate the function of each button. The LSS
model employs an LCD to designate the button function. The designation for a button on the LSS
model employs standard designations such as STA xxx for a {DSS/BLF} button but can be
modified in the system database to meet your needs.
With some restrictions you may equip your phone with up to four (4) Serial Consoles. For
installation details refer to the eMG80 Hardware Description and Installation Manual.
Operation
iPECS IP Phone
Flex buttons on the Serial Console operate the same as the buttons on the phone
Conditions
1. The maximum number of Serial Consoles supported in an eMG80 system is 100 and
no more than 60 can be the LSS model.
2. The iPECS IP Phone model LIP-8004 does not support a Serial DSS/BLF Console.
3. The LIP-8048DSS must always be powered by external adaptor available from
Ericsson-LG.
4. An iPECS IP Phone can only provide power to two Serial Consoles, the remaining
Consoles must be powered by the external adaptor
5. Linked pair secondary station cannot have a Serial Console.
6. When configuring Flex buttons from the phone, the Serial Console Flex buttons are not
used, use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons to scroll. For example, when you press
the [VOL UP] button the Flex buttons on the phone will represent the first buttons on
the first Console. Note that even though a Console may have only 12 buttons, the
system allocates 48. When programming Flexible button labels for an LSS, the1st
326
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Console starts from button 49, the 2nd starts from button 97, the 3rd Console starts
from button 145, 4th starts from button 193.
7. As a default, the 48 button Console is assigned with button Map 1 to 4 depending on
the position of the Console. The 12 button Consoles are not assigned a map.
8. If DSS configuration is changed and the phone restarts, programmed DSS data is
initialized from the changed DSS.
9. While idle, the [VOL UP]/[VOL DWN] buttons control the contrast of the LCD of both
the iPECS IP Phone and the LSS model serial.
10. Your station must be enabled to employ a Serial Console, if not enabled, any
connected console will not function.
Programming
STATION
Serial DSS Usage (PGM 111 –Button 21)
Flex Button Assign (PGM 115)
Serial LSS Label Edit (PGM 129)
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP & LDP Phone with Serial DSS/BLF Console
327
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.22
Issue 1.0
Silent Text Message
Description
Silent Text Messaging is used to respond to a Voice Over call without disconnecting the existing
call. Silent Text Messages are sent by pressing a pre-programmed message button or the [DND]
button.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To program a {TEXT MESSAGE} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “51” + Display Message code (“00”-“20”)
+ [HOLD/SAVE]
To respond to an Off-Hook Voice Over call with a Text message
1. Upon receiving the announcement, press the desired {TEXT MESSAGE} or the
[DND] button, the text message is sent to the display of the calling party and the
OHVO call is terminated.
Conditions
1. Silent Text Messaging sends the DND display message, “STA IN DO NOT DISTURB”
displays in the LCD of the calling Station.
2. When Silent Text Messaging is used to respond to an OHVO call, the existing call will
not be disconnected.
3. When a SLT places the Voice Over call, the receiving station will receive the “NO
DISPLAY AVAILABLE” message and error tone to indicate Silent Text Messaging is
not available to the SLT.
Programming
STATION
Voice Over (PGM 113-Button 6)
Related Features

Call Waiting/Camp-On

Group Listening

Voice Over

Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages
Hardware

iPECS IP or & LDP Phone
328
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.23
Issue 1.0
Speakerphone
Description
Your iPECS IP or LDP Phone is equipped with speakerphone circuitry enabling the telephone to
be used hands-free in two-way conversations.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To activate the speakerphone
1. Press the [SPEAKER] button, [SPEAKER] LED lights steady.
To switch from Handset to Speakerphone
1. Press the [SPEAKER] button, [SPEAKER] LED lights steady.
2. Replace Handset, Speakerphone activated.
To terminate a speakerphone call
1. Press the [SPEAKER] button, [SPEAKER] LED extinguishes.
Conditions
1. If Automatic Speaker Select is enabled for the station, pressing a DSS, outside Line or
Speed Dial button will automatically activate the speakerphone.
2. The [MUTE] button LED indicates the status of the Microphone, when lit the
Microphone is inactive.
3. When Group Listen is enabled, pressing the [SPEAKER] button while using the
handset will send audio to both the Handset and Speaker. However, only the Handset
microphone is active. In order to activate the Speakerphone Microphone, the Handset
must be placed on-hook.
4. Each iPECS IP and LDP Phone equipped with Speakerphone is allowed/denied
Speakerphone operation in the system database.
5. When Headset operation is assigned for the station, the Speakerphone is disabled and
the [SPEAKER] button activates the Headset audio path instead of the speaker.
Programming
STATION
Headset Ring (PGM 111-Button 8)
Speakerphone/Headset (PGM 111-Button 9)
Related Features




Mute
Group Listening
Automatic Speaker Select
Headset Compatibility
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
329
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.24
Issue 1.0
Station Flexible Buttons
Description
The iPECS IP and LDP Phones incorporate a field of “Flex” buttons as well as the fixed feature
buttons. The Flex buttons are assigned in the system database to access features, functions and
resources of the system. Specifically, Flex buttons can be assigned as:

An Empty button has no system database assignment.

A {DSS/BLF} button places One-touch ICM call to a designated station and display
status of the station.

A Flex Numbering Plan button activates the feature associated with the assigned
digits from the Flexible Numbering Plan.

A Speed Dial bin button accesses and dials the number from the assigned Speed
Dial bin.

A Pool button accesses an outside Line from the Line group designated for outgoing
calls. A Pool button is used primarily to provide an outgoing call appearance when a
direct Line appearance is not available. It may be used as the last choice for an
incoming outside call. The Pool button LED provides the status for the duration of the
call only.

A Loop button provides an appearance for incoming any outside call when a direct
Line appearance button is not available. The Loop button LED provides the status for
the duration of the call only.

A Station User Program Code button, access or activate the special features
available with the Station User Program Codes, see section 5.26.

An outside Line Appearance button provides access to the individual Line assigned
to the Flex button. The Line button LED provides the status of the outside Line.
With the exception of Line buttons, you can be assign the feature or function of the button from
your iPECS IP or LDP Phone.. If allowed in the database, you can also assign or reassign Line
buttons.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Flex button at the station
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Press the desired Flex button.
3. Dial the digits from the Flexible Numbering Plan.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Or,
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Press the desired Flex button.
330
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
3. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
4. Dial the digits from the Station User Program Code or Fixed Number Plan.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
Conditions
1. The {LOOP} and {POOL} buttons provide a status indication for the call as long as the
station has supervisory control.
2. If there is no available {LINE}, {LOOP} or {POOL} button for a call, the station will not
ring for an incoming outside call; transfers to the station immediately recall the initiator
and recalls are routed directly to the Attendant.
3. A station may have multiple {LOOP} and {POOL} buttons.
4. When all outside Lines in a group are busy, any {POOL} buttons associate with the
group will show busy, otherwise, {POOL} buttons will only display the status of an
activate call.
5. {POOL} buttons will access a Line from the designated group using the Round Robin
or Last Used method as assigned in the database.
6. The priority for the appearance of an outside call transfer is first a direct Line
appearance ({LINE} button), if not available a {LOOP} appearance is employed, if not
available a {POOL} appearance is used. If there is no appearance available, the
transferring station recalls immediately.
7. Station User Program Codes are defined in section 5.25.
Programming
NUMBERING
Flexible Numbering Plan (PGM 105~109)
STATION
Flexible Button Assignment (PGM 115)
Related Features

Flexible Numbering Plan

Station User Programming & Codes
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
331
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.25
Issue 1.0
Station Individual Call Routing (ICR)
Description
Station ICR is an extension of Call Forward that permits you to establish scenarios to route your
incoming calls. Each of the ten scenarios defines rules to route incoming calls based on Time,
Day of week, Date and Caller ID to your desired destination. Each scenario is assigned a priority
of 0 to 9. When you receive an incoming call, the System will search the ICR scenarios, then
route the call according to the destination in the highest priority matching scenario. If no matches
are found the call normal routing assigned for the call.
Scenarios may be established from the Station Web portal, contact your Ericsson-LG
representative for details, or scenarios can be configured from an iPECS IP or LDP Phone.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To create a scenario:
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button and dial “24”, the ICR menu
Or Log in to the Station Web portal.
2. Select the desired Scenario (0 - 9).
3. Select the type of Caller ID (0 – 5):
 Type 0 – Station CID
 Type 1 - All Station
 Type 2 – CO CID
 Type 3 - All CO call
 Type 4 - All call
 Type 5 - N/A
4. Enter the Scenario Start and End Date (YYMMDD).
5. Select the Day-of-week using the Flex buttons:
 Flex button 1 is Monday – Flex button 7 is Sunday
 Flex 8 button is for holidays
6. Enter scenario Start and End time in 24-hour format (HHMM).
7. Select Type of destination (0 – 6):
 Type 0 – Station
 Type 1 - Hunt group
 Type 2 - CO Line Number
 Type 3 - CO Group number
 Type 4 - CO Loop
 Type 5 - CO Transit
 Type 6 - N/A
8. Enter the specific Station, Hunt group, Line number, etc.
332
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
9. Select Scenario Priority (0 to 9).
10. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button to store the scenario.
To activate ICR Call Forward:
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive a dial tone.
2. Press the [FWD] button.
3. Dial the desired Call Forward code (0-4).
4. Dial “587”, the Station ICR code.
5. Replace the handset, return to idle.
Conditions
1. Any station allowed access may define scenarios in the station’s Web portal.
2. The conditions as listed under Call Forward apply.
Programming
STATION
Call Forward (PGM 111-Button 2)
Station Call Forward No Answer Timer (PGM 123-Button 1)
SYSTEM
System Call Forward No Answer Timer (PGM 181-Button 1)
Related Features

Call Forward
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone
333
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.26
Issue 1.0
Station User Programming & Codes
Description
You can program an array of functions and features, access status information and assign special
features codes to Flex buttons of your iPECS IP or LDP Phone. The Station User Program Codes
used for these purposes are fixed as listed below.
Code
Description
Entries
10
Enblock Dial
11x
Intercom Differential Ring
1~8
12x
Outside Line Differential Ring
1~8
13
Station Answer Mode
1: H, 2: T, 3: P
14x
Call Coverage Attribute
1~2
15x
Station Ring Download
5~ 8 + 0~9
19
Ear Mic. Headset
21
Knock down Station COS (Class of Service)
22
Restore Station COS (Class of Service)
Auth code
23
Walking COS (Class of Service)
Auth code
24
ICR Scenario
Scenario Data
25
LIP Phone Statistics
Real-time Packet Monitoring
26
Call profile Table Index
0-3
31
Station Message Wait Retrieve
32
CLI/IP Message Wait Retrieve
33
Register Authorization Code
34
DID/DISA Call Wait
35
Choice Exec/Sec Message
36
SMS sending mode
37
Register Mobile Extension
Tel. number
38
Activate Mobile Extension
1 On, 0 Off
39
Register Mobile Ext CLI
Tel. number
30
VM Mobile notify
1 On, 0 Off
41
Set Wake-Up Time
Once/Permanent & Hour/Min
42
Erase Wake-Up Time
51
Custom/Pre-selected Message
00~20
52
Register Custom Message (00)
“Message”
53
Create Conference Room
Room number (1~9)
Auth Code
1 On, 0 Off
334
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Code
Description
Entries
54
Delete Conference Room
Room number (1~0)
55
Monitor conference group
Hunt group number
57
{Call Log Display} button
61
Headset/Speakerphone mode
0:H, 1:S
62
Select Headset Ring type
1:S, 2:H, 3:Both
67
{Call Coverage} button
71
LCD Display Mode
72
Sys version display
73
Select BGM source
(00~10)
74
User Name registration
“name”
75
Display Phone IP Address
76
Change IP Address (Dot:*)
77
Display MAC IP Address
78
Change Mode
79
Display Phone Version
7*
Display Key numbers
80
{RECORD} button
81
ISDN {CLIR} button
82
ISDN {COLR} button
83
{ACD DND} button
84
{ACCOUNT CODE} button
85
{LOOP} button
86
{INTRUSION} button
87
{ICM} button
88
{CAMP-ON} button
89
ISDN {KEYPAD FACILITY} button
8#
{OHVO} button
99
Push-To-Talk
*6
Set forced forward destination (Hunt)
*7
Enable/Disable forced forward (Hunt)
*8
Register Bluetooth device
*9
Bluetooth Usage
*0
Agent Login
**
Agent Logout
91
{Conference} button
Domestic/English
335
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Code
Description
92
{Callback} button
93
{DND} button
94
{Flash} button
95
{Mute} button
96
{Monitor} button
97
{Redial} button
98
{Call Forward} button
Issue 1.0
Entries
In addition, a Station User Program Menu display is provided by the iPECS IP and LDP Phone
display to assist you during programming the Station User Program Code features and functions.
The [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] buttons are used to scroll through the menu items and the dial pad
is used to enter a selection. The codes are also used to assign a function or feature to a Flex
button.
The Station User Program Menu displays are illustrated below.

First top-level Menu selection
[1] RING/NEWKEYSET
[2] COS

Under selection [1] Ring, select 1~5 as below
[1] STA RING TYPE
[2] CO RING TYPE
[3] ANSWER MODE
[4] CALL COVER ATTR
[5] STA RING DOWNLOAD
[9] EAR-MIC HEADSET
[0] ENBLOCK MODE
[9] STA RING TYPE

Under selection [2] COS (Class of Service), select 1~3 as below
[1] COS DOWN
[2] COS RESTORE
[3] WALKING COS
[4] ICR SCENARIO
336
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
[5] LIP KEYSET STAT
[6] CALL PROFILE

Next top-level Menu selection
[3] MSG RET/MOBILE-EXT
[4] WAKE UP TIME

Under selection [3] MESSAGE RETRIEVE, select 1~8 as below
[1] MESSAGE RETRIEVE METHOD
[2] MESSAGE RETRIEVE EXAMPLE
[3] AUTH REGISTER
[4] DID DISA CALL WAIT
[5] CHOICE EXEC/SEC MSG
[6] SEND BRIEF SMS MESSAGE
[7] REG MOBILE-EXT
[8] ACTIVE MOBILE-EXT
[9] REGISTER MOBILE-CLI
[0] VM MOBILE NOTIFY

Under selection [4] WAKE UP TIME select 1~2 as below
[1] SET WAKE UP TIME
[2] WAKE UP DISABLE

Next top-level Menu selection
[5] MESSAGE
[6] HEADSET

Under selection [5] MESSAGE, select 1~2 as below
[1] SET PRE : CUST MSG
[2] PGM CUSTOM MSG
[3] ACTIVE CONF-ROOM
[4] DEACTIVE CONF-ROOM
[5] MONITOR CONF-GROUP
[1] SET PRE:CUST MSG
337
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual

Under selection [6] HEADSET select 1~2 as below
[1] HEADSET OR SPK MODE
[2] HEADSET RING MODE

Next top-level Menu selection
[7] SUPPLEMENTARY
[*] SYSTEM

Under selection [7] SUPPLEMENTARY, select 0~9 as below
[1] LCD DISPLAY LANGUAGE
[2] MPB VERSION
[3] BGM
[4] REGISTER STA NAME
[5] DISP PHONE IP ADDR
[6] CHANGE PHONE IP ADDR
[7] DISPLAY MAC ADDR
[8] NETWORK CONFIG
[9] DISP PHONE VERSION
[*] DISP ADD-ON PACKAGE

Under selection [*] SYSTEM, access Admin
[#] ENTER ADMIN
[6] SET FORCED FWD DEST
[7] FORCED FWD TO DEST
[8] REGISTER BLUETOOTH
[9] BLUETOOTH USAGE
[0] HOTDESK LOGIN
[*] HOTDESK LOGOUT
[#] ENTER ADMIN
338
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a Station User Program Code to a Flex button
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button, the Station User Program Menu is displayed.
2. Press the desired Flex button.
3. Dial the desired Station User Program Code and additional inputs that may be
required.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To activate a Station User Program Code feature or function
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button, the Station User Program Menu is displayed.
2. If desired, use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DOWN] to display the desired menu item, or dial
the desired Station User Program Code with additional inputs as required.
Programming
Conditions
Related Features

Station Flexible Buttons

Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock

Walking COS (Class of Service)

Station Message Wait/Call Back

CLI Message Wait

Wake-Up Alarm

Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages

Headset Compatibility

Attendant Station Program Codes
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone w/Display
339
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.27
Issue 1.0
Two-Way Record
Description
With your iPECS IP or LDP Phone you can record any active conversation to your Voice Mail
mailbox or to the hard disk drive of an iPECS Phontage or UCS Client. All calls including
incoming, outgoing, internal, external, conference, conference rooms and conference group calls
can be recorded. A {RECORD} button must be assigned to access this feature.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
To assign a flexible button as a {RECORD} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + 80 + recording destination (optional) +
[HOLD/SAVE]
To activate Two-Way Record while on a call
1. Press the {RECORD} button, record warning tone heard, and recording starts.
To stop Two-Way Record while on a call
1. Press the {RECORD} again.
Or,
2. Hang-up, return to idle.
To manage the recordings, use the procedures for the voice Mail or as outlined in the Phontage
or UCS Client User Guide.
Conditions
1. The {RECORD} button LED will flash at 240 ipm while recording.
2. This feature is available when using the integrated VM, the Feature Server or using an
external AA/VM, which employs the SMDI communications mode. When an external
AA/VM system employs the in-band (DTMF) mode, Two-Way Record is not available.
3. With the Feature Server or integrated VM, internal calls can be recorded as well as
external calls.
4. Use of this feature when the Two-Way Recording Warn Tone is disabled may be
interpreted as a violation of federal, state, or local laws, and an invasion of privacy.
Check applicable laws in your area before recording calls using this feature.
5. If a destination for the recording is not defined for the {RECORD} button, the Call
Record Destination defined in PGM 112 is employed.
Programming
STATION
Two-way Record Privilege: ON (PGM 112-Button 11)
Call Record Destination (PGM 112-Button 21)
340
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Auto Call Record (PGM 112-Button 20)
SYSTEM
Two-way Record Warning Tone (PGM 161-Button 19)
Related Features

External Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Conference

Conference Group

Multi-Party Voice Conference

Conference Room

Auto Call Recording
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone

Integrated VM, Feature Server or External SMDI based AA/VM system

Phontage or UCS Client Softphones
341
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
5.28
Issue 1.0
Voice Over
Description
Using an iPECS IP or LDP Phone while you are off-hook on a call (internal or outside), you may
receive a voice announcement through the handset receiver with the existing call. The Off-Hook
Voice Over (OHVO) is muted so as not to interfere with the existing conversation. You may
respond to the Voice Over calling party using Camp-On response or may use Silent Text
Messaging to respond.
Operation
iPECS IP & LDP Phones
Placing a Voice Over (OHVO) while receiving busy
1. Dial “#” or press a pre-programmed {OHVO} button.
2. After splash tone, begin announcement.
Responding to a Voice Over announcement
1. Use Camp-On response procedure or Silent Text Messaging or One-Time DND.
SLT
Placing a Voice Over (OHVO) while receiving busy
1. Dial “#”.
2. After splash tone, begin announcement.
Responding to a Voice Over announcement
1. Use Camp-On response procedure.
Conditions
1. When you respond to a Voice Over via Camp-On, all conditions and options available
to Camp-On apply.
2. Voice Over may be used to notify you of a transferred call (Intercom or outside) by
announcing the call then releasing to complete the transfer.
3. When a call is transferred with Voice Over, you will receive muted ringing after the
transfer is complete.
4. The Pre-defined or Custom Text Display Message feature may be used in response to
a Voice Over announcement and the conditions associated with these features apply.
5. Both the originating and receiving station must be programmed to allow OHVO calls.
6. When Silent Text Messaging is used to respond to a Voice over call, the existing call
will not be disconnected.
7. If you are in conference, using the Speakerphone or Group Listen, Voice Over is not
available. Camp-On will be activated and a Camp-On tone sent to your phone.
342
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Programming
STATION
Voice Over (PGM 113-Button 6)
Related Features

Call Waiting/Camp-On

Group Listening

Silent Text Message

Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Phone to receive Voice Over
343
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
6. ATTENDANTS
6.1 Attendant Call & Call Queuing
Description
Any station can call the Attendant by dialing the Attendant Call code “0”. When an Attendant call
experiences a busy, the call is queued to the Attendant group. The call will be delivered to the first
available Attendant.
Operation
To call the Attendant
1. Dial “0”, the Attendant Call Code.
Condition
1. Call routing order follows the order of entry in the Attendant Assignments program.
2. The Attendant is informed of a queued Attendant call by the [HOLD/SAVE] button LED
flashing. The calling intercom party will receive ring-back tone or MOH, as configured
in the system.
3. Calls to the Attendant’s station intercom number are sent to the station dialed as with
any intercom call.
4. When an Attendant calls another busy Attendant by dialing the station number, busy
tone is received and camp-on is available.
Programming
SYSTEM
Attendant Assignment (PGM 164)
MOH Type (PGM 171-Button 2)
Attendant Call Queuing Ring back Tone (PGM 160-Button 1)
Related Features

Attendant Positions

Intercom Call (ICM Call)
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
344
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
6.2 Attendant Positions
Description
The iPECS eMG80 system has the capacity for 4 Attendants (1 System Attendant / 3 Main
Attendants). Attendants have enhanced call and control capabilities and are designated to
receive dial ’0’ calls from other users.
There are 2 different types of Attendant as follows,

System Attendant - The first station in the Attendant Group. In addition to Main
Attendant features, the System Attendant is commonly used for System Attendant
Programming, Admin Programming and Day/Night/Timed Mode control.

Main Attendant – Attendant group stations other than the first station of the Attendant
Group.
Operation
Condition
1. As a default, the first Attendant (System Attendant) is assigned as Station 100 (logical
number), and others are not assigned. In the eMG80, the first digital phone port is
designated as the System Attendant and is Station number 100.
2. Attendant calls (dialing “0”) and recalls are routed to first available attendant.
Programming
SYSTEM
System Attendant Assignment (PGM 164-Button 1)
Main Attendants Assignment (PGM 164-Button 2~4)
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
345
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
6.3 Attendant Recall
Description
Unanswered or abandoned outside calls that remain unanswered for the Hold or Transfer Hold
timer, as appropriate, will recall the station placing the call on hold. If the call remains unanswered
for the assigned Recall time, the first available Attendant will also receive recall. The Attendant
and station will receive the recall signal for the Attendant Recall Timer period after which the
system will disconnect and return the outside Line to idle.
Operation
System
Attendant recall operation is automatic.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM
Attendant Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 1)
ICM Hold Recall Timer (PGM 180-Button 5)
Related Features

Hold

Call Transfer
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
346
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
6.4 Attendant Station User Program Codes
Description
Using the Attendant Station User Program Codes, the Attendant can print SMDR and Traffic
reports on-demand, assign Authorization Codes, control certain user features, record System
announcements, enable/disable Auto Service Mode Control, etc. Items are available using the
Program Code directly or scrolling the multi-level display menu. The following indicates the menu
displays, including the digit for selecting the item, the item description and further required entries.
The various levels of the display menu are indicated by indentation. For additional information,
reference Appendix C of the iPECS Admin & Programming Manual.
Note also, some Program Codes are only available to the System Attendant or stations allowed
access to the Attendant Program code “0”.
[1] PRINT
[1] SMDR
[1] PRINT SMDR STA BASE
station range input
[2] DELETE STATION BASE
station range input
[3] DISPLY CALL CHARGE
[4] ABORT PRINTING
[5] PRINT LOST CALL
[6] DELETE LOST CALL
[2] TRAFFIC - System attendant only
[1] PRINT ALL SUMMARY
enter Analysis time & type
[2] PRINT ALL PERIDICLLY
enter Analysis time, type & Print time
[3] ABORT PERIDIC PRINTING
[4] PRINT ATD TRAFFIC
enter Analysis time & type
[5] PRINT CALL SUMMARY
[6] PRINT CALL HOURLY
[7] PRINT H/W USAGE
347
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
enter Analysis time & type
[8] PRINT CO SUMMARY
enter Analysis time & type
[9] PRINT CO HOURLY
enter CO group number
[2] COS
[1] SET ICM ONLY MODE
enter station range
[2] RESTORE COS
enter station range
[3] AUTHORIZATION
System Attendant only
[1] REGISTER AUTHORIZATION
enter station
[2] ERASE AUTHORIZATION
enter station
[4] DATE AND TIME
[1] LCD DATE TIME SET
System Attendant only
[2] LCD DATE MODE CHAGE
System Attendant only
[3] LCD TIME MODE CHAGE
System Attendant only
[4] ATD SET WAKE UP TIME
enter station range
[5] ATD WAKE UP DISABLE
enter station range
[6] Set Time from ISDN Message
enter 1= on, 0= off
[7] ATD HOTDESK LOGIN
[8] ATD HOTDESK LOGOUT
[5] MESSAGE
[1] SET PRE:CUSTOM MESSAGE
348
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
enter station range & Message (00~20)
[2] DND/FWD/MESSAGE CANCEL
enter station range
[3] CUSTOM DISP MESSAGE REG
enter Message (11~20)
[4] Monitor Conference Room
[5] Delete Conference Room
[6] REC System ANNCEMENT
enter VSF slot number (001-999)
[7] SUPPLEMENTARY
[1] REG STATION NAME
enter station number
[2] ISOLATE CO FAULT
[3] AUTO D/N/T PGM
select enable/disable
[4] EXT PORT#1 BGM EN/DI
select 0-2
[5] EXT PORT#2 BGM EN/DI
select 0-2
[6] LCD Display Language
select language
[7] PTT Login / Logout, station range
enter station range
[8] Display CPU REDUNDANCY STATE
[9] FONT SET
enter station range
[0] CONTRAST SET
enter station range
[8] EMERGENCY HISTORY
[9] USB UPGRADE
[#] WHTU SUBSCRIBE
349
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Operation
Attendant
To activate an Attendant Station User Program Code feature or function
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button, the Station Program Menu is displayed.
2. Dial “0” to access the Attendant Station Program codes.
3. Enter desired code or use the [VOL UP]/[VOL DWN] button to display the desired
menu item and enter the desired code.
4. Dial additional inputs, if required.
Condition
Programming
SYSTEM
System Attendant (PGM 164-Button 1)
Main Attendants Assignment (PGM 164-Button 2~4)
Related Features

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Traffic Analysis

Temporary Station COS (Class of Service)/Lock

Authorization Codes (Password)

System Clock Set

Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages

Integrated Auto Attendant/Voice Mail

Dial-by-Name

Auto Service Mode Control

Back Ground Music

Station User Programming & Codes
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
350
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
6.5 Call Forward, Attendant
Description
As with other stations, Attendants can forward calls to other stations in the system. Calls may be
forwarded unconditionally, on busy or no answer.
Operation
Attendant
To activate Call Forward
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button to receive intercom dial tone.
2. Press the [FWD] button.
3. Dial ‘0’ ~ ‘5’, the Call Forward type.
4. Dial the station number to receive forward calls.
To deactivate Call Forward
1. While idle, press the [FWD] button.
Or,
1. While Off-hook, press the [FWD] button.
2. Dial ‘#’.
Condition
1. The Conditions of the Call Forward feature apply.
2. If the System Attendant activates Unconditional Call Forward, the receiving station will
receive Attendant calls and recall ring. In addition, if the receiving station is an iPECS
IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, the receiving station will be able to activate features
normally reserved for a Main Attendant.
3. The system requires at least one Attendant be available at all times. The last available
Attendant cannot activate Call Forward to an Attendant that has activated the Alternate
Attendant feature.
Programming
STATION
SYSTEM
Call Forward (PGM 111-Button 2)
Station Call Forward No Answer Timer (PGM 123-Button 1)
System Attendant (PGM 164-Button 1)
Main Attendants Assignment (PGM 164-Button 2~4/5)
Related Features


Call Forward
Alternate Attendant
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
351
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
6.6 Call Forward, Off-Net
Description
The System Attendant can forward incoming outside calls to a remote “Off-Net” location. Calls
forward via a Speed Dial bin. When a call is received, the system will automatically place a call
using the Speed Dial number, dialing the number and connecting the incoming call in an
Unsupervised conference.
Operation
System Attendant
To activate Off-Net Call Forward
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [FWD] button.
3. Dial ‘5’, the Off-Net Forward feature code.
4. Dial Line access code for the Line to be forward.
5. Dial the Speed Dial bin to use to place the outgoing (Off-Net) call, the LED of any
Off Net forwarded {LINE} button at the Attendant stations will flutter at a rate of 240
ipm while active.
To deactivate Off-Net Call Forward
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [FWD] button.
3. Dial “5”, Off-Net Forward code.
4. Dial Line access Code.
5. Dial ‘#’.
Conditions
1. The System Attendant can forward any Line, Line Group or all outside calls using the
appropriate Line access code. In addition, a Flex button assigned to a Line or group
may be employed in place of the Line access code to forward calls.
2. The conditions of the Unsupervised conference feature apply.
3. The conditions of the Call Forward Off-Net feature apply.
4. When enabled, calls that forward Off-net will receive the Off net forward prompt.
5. When enabled, calls that forward Off-net will receive the DTMF repeat tone.
6. To utilize Off-net forward of incoming calls on analog CO lines to another analog CO
line, a valid Open Loop Detect Timer should be assigned by programming for the
analog CO lines. This is to prevent CO line lock up in case the analog CO lines do not
provide proper disconnect signals for the system to detect.
352
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Programming
STATION
Call Forward (PGM 111-Button 2)
Off-Net Forward (PGM 111-Button 14)
SYSTEM
Off-Net Prompt Usage (PGM 160-Button 11)
DTMF Repeat Tone Usage (PGM 160-Button 15)
System Attendant Assignment (PGM 164-Button 1)
Unsupervised Conference Timer (PGM 182-Button 5)
Open Loop Detect Timer (PGM 142-Button 13)
Related Features

Call Forward

Unsupervised Conference
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
353
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
6.7 Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
Description
The system clock automatically controls the Ring Mode. Ring assignments are applied based on
the time of day and day of week. Four modes of ring (Ring Assignments) are provided Day, Night,
Timed and Scenario.
The Attendant controls the system Ring Service mode changing from Auto Service Mode to Day,
Night, Timed or Scenario service mode. Based on the service mode selected, different ring
assignments, COS (Class of Service) and answering privileges are invoked for the system users.
Operation
System Attendant
To change Day/Timed/Night Ring Mode manually;
1. Press the [DND] button.
2. Dial “1”~”5” to select the desired mode (1: Day mode, 2: Night mode, 3: Timed
mode, 4: Auto Service mode, 5: Scenario mode).
3. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button.
To set Day/Timed/Night Ring/Scenario Mode automatically (Auto Service Mode Control)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial the Attendant Station Program code “73” to set Auto Mode control.
Conditions
1. Only Attendants can change Day/Timed/Night/Scenario Ring Mode for the system
manually and program the Auto Ring Mode Selection Table (Weekly Time table).
2. Stations receive incoming ring for outside Lines based on the database assignments
and the system mode (Day/Night/Timed/Scenario) when the call arrives.
3. When the Auto Ring Selection Table is programmed, the ring, COS (Class of Service)
and Line access mode are changed automatically based on the times assigned in the
table.
4. The System Attendant always has manual control of the system mode by
enabling/disabling the Auto Service Mode Control.
5. To employ the Scenario mode, scenarios must be assigned in the System Call Routing
program.
Programming
CO/IP
CO Line Ring Assignment (PGM 144)
SYSTEM
External Control Contact (PGM 168)
TABLES
Weekly Time Table (PGM 233)
354
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
System Call Routing (PGM 251) Web only
Related Features

System Clock Set

Outside Line Ring Assignment

LBC (Loud Bell Control)

Dialing Restrictions

Auto Service Mode Control

System Call Routing
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
355
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
6.8 DSS/BLF Consoles
Description
The system allows an unlimited number of standard DSS/BLF Consoles to be installed in the
system. Up to three (3) standard DSS Consoles may be associated with a station connected to
an eMG80. Each button on the console can be assigned as an outside Line, DSS/BLF or feature
button.
For ease of programming, each console is assigned to a button “map” in the system database.
The Administrator or user may then change individual Flex buttons as desired. Operation of the
DSS/BLF Console Flex buttons is the same as Flex buttons on the iPECS IP and LDP Phones.
Operation
Conditions
1. Each DSS Console is assigned to operate in connection with a specific station.
2. There is no limit to the number of DSS Consoles in a system beyond the basic system
capacities. The DSS Console employs a station number in the system.
3. Assignments for the DSS button maps are detailed in the iPECS eMG80 Admin &
Programming manual. Note that the individual button assignments can be changed as
with the iPECS IP and LDP Phone Flex buttons.
Table 6.8-1 DSS/BLF button maps — iPECS eMG80
MAP 1
Flex 1
Atd Override
Flex 2
All Call Page
Flex 3
Call Park 01
Flex 4-
Station Group 1
Flex 5
Camp-On
Flex 6
Int All Call Page
Flex 7
Call Park 02
Flex 8
Station Group 2
Flex 9
Release
Flex 10
Ext All Call Page
Flex 11
Call park 03
Flex 12
Station Group 3
Flex 13~48
Station 100~135
356
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
MAP 2
Flex 1 ~ 48
Station 136~183
MAP 3
Flex 1 ~ 48
Station 184~231
Programming
STATION
Station Type (PGM 110-Button 1)
DSS Map (PGM 110-Button 2)
Flexible Button Assignment (PGM 115)
Related Features

Attendant Positions

Station Flexible Buttons
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
357
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
6.9 Disable Outgoing Line Access
Description
The System Attendant can place outside Lines out-of service, disabling outgoing calls on the Line.
This is normally done should an undetected fault in the carrier or system circuit interrupt service
over the Line. Incoming calls continue to be processed normally.
Operation
System Attendant
To disable/enable Outgoing Line access (toggle)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “072”, the Attendant Station Program code.
3. Press the {Line} button of the line(s) to be disabled, confirmation tone is heard and
the status for the selected Line(s) is changed.
Conditions
1. The System Attendant may disable a busy Line. The feature will take effect after the
desired Line goes to idle.
2. Once the Line is disabled, all Attendant appearance for the disabled Line will flutter at
240 ipm, other stations will indicate the Line as busy and the LED is On.
3. The outside Line status is stored in battery-protected memory in case of a power
failure.
4. Multiple Lines may be enabled/disabled without redialing the Attendant Station
Program code. Confirmation tone is heard after each Line is enabled/disabled.
5. When the system detects a fault on a Line, the Line is disabled for outgoing access
automatically.
6. Incoming calls on a disabled Line will continue to operate normally.
Programming
SYSTEM
Attendant Assignment (PGM 164-Button 1)
Related Features

Attendant Positions
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
358
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.10
Issue 1.0
DND Override
Description
A station in the DND generally cannot receive an incoming call. The Attendant and the Secretary
station of an Executive/Secretary pair however may override the DND status to signal the station
of an awaiting call. A Flex button assigned for Intrusion is required.
Operation
Attendant
To assign a flexible button as a {ATD INTRUSION} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “86” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate DND Override while receiving DND tone
1. Press the {ATD INTRUSION} button, the call signals at DND station.
Conditions
1. An Attendant may use Override to transfer an outside call to a station in DND.
Programming
SYSTEM
Attendant Assignment (PGM 164)
Related Features

Intrusion

DND (Do Not Disturb)

Executive/Secretary Forward
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
359
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.11
Issue 1.0
Emergency Call Attendant Alert
Description
When a station places a call to an Emergency number, the Attendant receives an emergency call
alert. The alert includes an alert tone and display of the emergency call information, which
continues until the Attendant resets the alert. The information includes the calling station number,
time and date. The system stores the most recent emergency calls (up to 16). The Attendant can
review the history at any time.
A Flex button on the Attendant phone can be used to reset the alert and terminate the alert tone.
Operation
System
Operation of the alert is automatic.
Attendant
To assign a Flex button as an {ALARM STOP} button to terminate the alert:
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + “565” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To terminate an alert signal while idle:
1. Dial the Alarm reset Code, 565, confirmation tone is received and the Alert
terminates.
Or,
Press the {ALARM STOP} button.
To view the Emergency Call History:
1. Lift the handset or press the [SPEAKER] button.
2. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
3. Dial “08”, the Emergency Log code. The display shows the first emergency call
logged in the history.
EMERGENCY STA NO XXXX
MM/DD HH:MM (xx)
4. Press the [VOL UP] and [VOL DOWN] buttons to scroll through the call history.
5. After viewing a call history record, the record is marked as “READ” as below.
EMERGENCY STA NO XXXX
MM/DD HH:MM READ (xx)
6. If a record remains unread, the Attendant will receive alert tone upon returning to
idle as notification that a record has not been reviewed..
360
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Conditions
Programming
STATION
Emergency CO (PGM 112, BUTTON 18)
TABLES
Emergency Service Call Table (PGM 226)
SYSTEM
EMR CALL ATD NOTIFY (PGM 161, BUTTON 24-5)
Related Features

Alarm Signal/Door Bell

Emergency Call E-911 (caller location) Support

Emergency Call
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
361
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.12
Issue 1.0
ez-Attendant
Description
The ez-Attendant is a Windows based PC application that provides a visualization of the
Attendant functionality to simplify Attendant control of features and functions including displays of
call, user and system status. ez-Attendant operates in conjunction with the Attendant’s iPECS IP
or LDP Phone to simplify operation and expand features and functions available to the Attendant.
For further information on ez-Attendant, refer to the ez-Attendant Installation and User Guide.
Operation
System Attendant
Operation of the ez-Attendant is provided in the ez-Attendant Installation and User Guide.
Conditions
1. iPECS ez-Attendant requires installation of a system Lock-key.
Programming
SYSTEM
Attendant Assignment (PGM 164)
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
362
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.13
Issue 1.0
Feature Cancel
Description
The System Attendant can cancel features such as DND, Call Forwarding and Pre-defined or
Custom Messages that are active at other stations.
Operation
To deactivate DND/Call Forward/Pre-selected Message for other stations
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “052”, Attendant Station Program code.
3. Dial the desired station range or, for one station, enter the station number and “*”.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, confirmation tone is heard and Attendant station
returns to idle status.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM
Attendant Assignment (PGM 164-Button 1)
Related Features

Call Forward

DND (Do Not Disturb)

Attendant Positions

Pre-defined & Custom Text Display Messages
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
363
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.14
Issue 1.0
IP-Attendant
Description
The IP-Attendant is a Windows based PC application that provides a visualization of the
Attendant functionality to simplify Attendant control of features and functions including displays of
call, user and system status. IP Attendant incorporates the PC Mic and Speaker for audio so that
a separate desktop phone is not required.
For further information on IP-Attendant, refer to the IP-Attendant Installation and User Guide.
Operation
System Attendant
Operation of the IP-Attendant is provided in the IP-Attendant Installation and User Guide.
Conditions
1. IP-Attendant requires installation of a system Lock-key.
Programming
SYSTEM
Attendant Assignment (PGM 164)
Station User Login (PGM 443) Web only
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
364
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.15
Issue 1.0
Intrusion
Description
An Attendant can intrude upon an active station conversation. When the Attendant intrudes an
Intrusion Tone is provided, if assigned, and a conference is established between the Attendant,
station, and the connected party.
Intrusion can only be activated using an {ATD INTRUSION} button.
Operation
Attendant
To assign an {ATD INTRUSION} button
[TRANS/PGM] + {FLEX} + [TRANS/PGM] + “86” + [HOLD/SAVE]
To activate attendant intrusion while receiving busy on an Intercom call
1. Press {ATD INTRUSION} button, Intrusion Warning Tone is provided to the busy
station.
Conditions
1. If an Attendant or Secretary of an Executive/Secretary pair presses the {ATD
INTRUSION} button while receiving DND tone, the system will activate DND Override.
2. The conditions of the Conference feature apply.
Programming
STATION
Override Privilege (PGM 113-Button 4)
SYSTEM
Automatic Privacy (PGM 161-Button 3)
Privacy Warning Tone (PGM 161-Button 4)
Related Features
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
365
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.16
Issue 1.0
LCD Display Format Control
Description
The System Attendant can select the format of the time and date provided in the LCD of all
iPECS IP and LDP Phones in the system.
The System Attendant can select (toggle between) two formats for both time and date. The
formats are:
Date: Month/day/year or Year/month/date
Time: 12 hour or 24 hour (military)
Operation
System Attendant
To change the LCD Date Format (toggle)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “042”, the Date Display Format program code.
To change the LCD Time Format (toggle)
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “043”, the Time Display Format program code.
Conditions
Programming
SYSTEM
Attendant Assignment (PGM 164-Button 1)
LCD Date Display Mode (PGM 169-Button 1)
LCD Time Display Mode (PGM 169-Button 2)
Related Features

Attendant Positions
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
366
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
6.17
Issue 1.0
System Clock Set
Description
The System Attendant can set the system Time/Date.
Operation
System Attendant
To set the system clock
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “041”, the Attendant Station Program code.
3. Dial six (6) digits for the Date (MM/DD/YY) or [HOLD/SAVE] to skip the Date.
4. Dial four (4) digits for the Time (HH/MM) or [HOLD/SAVE] to skip the Time setup.
5. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, confirmation tone is heard and Attendant station
returns to idle status.
To synchronize the system clock to the ISDN
1. Press the [TRANS/PGM] button.
2. Dial “046”, the Attendant Station Program code.
3. Dial “1” to synchronize the Date and Time to the ISDN.
4. Press the [HOLD/SAVE] button, confirmation tone is heard and Attendant station
returns to idle status.
Conditions
1. The time is entered as a 24-hour format.
2. If an NTP (Network Time Protocol server is assigned, the system will check the time
every ten (10) minutes. If the system time is more than 10 seconds off, the system time
is synchronized with the NTP server. This will override the Attendant setting.
Programming
SYSTEM
Network Time/Date (PGM 161-Button 12)
System Attendant (PGM 164-Button 1)
System Time (PGM 178-Button 1)
System Date (PGM 178-Button 2)
DST Enable (PGM 178 – Button 3)
DST Start & End Time (Web only)
Network Time/Date (PGM 195 – Button 1)
367
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
NTP Sever address (Web only)
Std system time, local Time Zone (Web only)
Related Features

LCR (Least Cost Routing)

SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Auto Service Mode Control

Automatic System Time Synchronization

Automatic System Daylight Savings Time

Day/Night/Timed/Scenario Ring Mode
Hardware

iPECS IP or LDP Multi-button Phone, a 24-button phone is recommended
368
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
7. SLT (SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE)
7.1 Broker Call
Description
Broker Call allows an SLT user to engage in two (2) calls, alternating between the two parties, so
that the conversation with each party is private.
There are two types of Broker Call,
Transfer Broker call – the second call is originated by the SLT
Camped On Broker Call – the second call camped on the SLT.
Operation
SLT
To activate a Transfer Broker Call
1. Make or receive an intercom or external call.
2. Momentarily press the hook-switch, intercom dial tone received and active call is
placed in Exclusive hold state.
3. Place second call.
4. To alternate between calls momentarily press the hook-switch.
To activate a Camp-On Broker Call
1. Make or receive an intercom or external call.
2. Receive a Call Waiting/Camp-On tone.
3. Momentarily press the hook-Switch, intercom dial tone received and the active call
is placed on Exclusive Hold.
4. Dial the Camp-On Answer feature code “600”, camped on call is connected.
To alternate between the calls
1. Momentarily press the hook-switch.
2. Dial the Camp-On Answer feature code “600”.
Conditions
1. After a hook-switch flash, if the call results in an error, busy, no answer or an abnormal
state, the SLT user may momentarily press hook-switch to retrieve the held call.
2. During a Transfer Broker Call, if the SLT user goes on-hook, the Broker Call parties
are connected completing a Call Transfer.
3. During a Transfer Broker Call, if the active caller disconnects from the SLT user, the
held party, if another station, is connected to the SLT. If the held party is an outside call,
369
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Issue 1.0
the SLT user receives error tone and may go on-hook to receive recall and retrieve the
held call.
During a Camp-On Broker Call, if the SLT user goes on-hook, the active call is
disconnected and the held call recalls to the SLT.
During a Camp-On Broker Call, if the active party disconnects from the SLT, the SLT
user receives error tone. The SLT user may momentarily press the hook-switch to
retrieve the held party or go on-hook and receive recall.
If the SLT user presses the hook-switch twice in less than 2 seconds, a 3-way
conference is established.
If after a hook-switch flash, the user takes no action for the dial tone timer, the SLT will
receive error tone.
If the SLT goes to an on-hook state with a call on hold, the SLT will receive recall ring
automatically.
The SLT Flash mode must be set to Transfer.
Programming
STATION
SLT Flash Mode (PGM 113-Button 24-8)
Related Features

Message Wait/Call Back

Call Waiting/Camp-On

Exclusive Hold

Call Transfer

Conference
Hardware
370
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
7.2 Howler Tone
Description
When an SLT station goes off-hook and does not initiate dialing within the Dial tone timer, delays
dialing between digits in excess of the inter-digit time or stays off-hook at the completion of
activating a feature or program, the station will receive howler tone as an error indication and the
call attempt will be abandoned. In order to complete the call, the user must return to the on-hook
state and restart the call.
Operation
System
The system will deliver howler tone automatically, as required
Conditions
1. Howler Tone is sent after a period, of about 30 seconds of error tone.
2. Lock-out occurs when howler tone starts.
Programming
STATION
Howling Tone To Station (PGM 111-Button 5)
Related Features

Intercom Lock-Out
Hardware
371
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
7.3 SLT Flash Mode
Description
When the SLT user momentarily presses the Hook-switch, a Flash is generated. The operation of
the Flash function can be configured to for the following operation:

0: Flash Transfer - Flash detected, outside Line is held and dial tone is received

1: Flash Drop - Flash detected and outside Line is disconnected.

2: Flash Ignore - Flash detected but Ignored.

3: Hold Release - Flash detected, the outside Line is held and the dial tone is
received. If SLT user goes on-hook, the held Line is disconnected.
Operation
Conditions
Programming
SLT Flash Mode (PGM 113-Button 24-8)
Related Features
Hardware
372
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
7.4 SLT Message Wait Indication
Description
All SLT devices will receive a “Stutter” dial tone as an audible indication of a Message Waiting. In
addition, industry standard Message Waiting telephones may be connected to the system.
Software will cause the lamp to flash when a messaging is waiting.
Operation
System
The system switches the 90 VDC lamp On and Off for assigned SLTs indicating a Message
Wait.
Conditions
1. The system switches a 90 VDC supply On and Off to flash the SLT’s neon Message
lamp.
2. Although the SLT Battery Feed is removed during the 90 VDC On cycle, the system
will recognize an SLT Off-hook event.
3. The SLT must incorporate a 90 VDC neon lamp that is connected directly across the
tip and ring of the voice network.
Programming
STATION
Station Type (PGM 110-Button 1)
Related Features

Message Wait/Call Back
Hardware

SLT w/90 VDC Neon lamp
373
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
7.5 SLT Name Entry
Description
A SLT user has the capability to program a name so that a calling user with an LCD can see the
name instead of the station number.
Operation
SLT
To register the name at the SLT
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code, confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial “74”, the SLT Name Program Code.
4. Enter name, refer to Station Speed Dial, Alphanumeric Chart.
5. Momentarily depress the hook-switch, receive confirmation tone.
To delete the name at the SLT;
1. Lift the handset.
2. Dial “561”, the SLT Programming code, confirmation tone is heard.
3. Dial “74”, the SLT Name Program Code.
4. Momentarily depress the hook-switch, receive confirmation tone.
Conditions
Programming
Related Features

Dial-by-Name

Station Speed Dial
Hardware
374
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
7.6 Transfer CLI to SLT
Description
A SLT phone may be receive the Caller Id of the transferred outside call in place of the station
number transferring the call. The transferred call Caller Id is sent after the transferring station
hangs up to complete the transfer.
Operation
The Caller Id is automatically sent to the SLT when configured.
Conditions
1. For proper operation, use of the Original CLI should be assigned to the Transfer CLI.
Programming
STATION
Transfer CLI to SLT (PGM 114-Button 18)
Related Features
Hardware

SLT w/display
375
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
8. SIP EXTENSION
8.1 SIP Phone Support
Description
The iPECS eMG80 incorporates basic SIP Extension service connecting SIP phones through a
VoIP channel using IETF’s standard RFC-3261 SIP protocols. SIP phones, including the
Ericsson-LG SIP phones, register for service with or without authentication. After registration, the
SIP phone can place and receive calls, place calls on hold, transfer calls and will have access to
the features of the system through the Flexible Numbering plan using the procedures applicable
to a SLT. Some of the features supported are listed below.
In addition to the Numbering Plan features, for the Ericsson-LG SIP phones, the Call Forward and
DND features can be synchronized using proprietary methods so that when you activate the
feature at the SIP phone, the system is properly informed and can activate the feature properly
within the system. When Feature sync is not enabled or a 3rd party SIP phone is employed, the
phone will activate the internal Forward or DND feature and the system cannot properly inform
status to others or control routing.
Account Code Entry
Attendant Call
Broker Call, the SIP phone must support Call Wait
Call Forward, requires Feature Sync to employ eMG80 Call Fwd feature.
Call Park using Unscreened (Blind) Transfer
Call Pick-Up, Group & Directed
Call Waiting/Camp-on, the SIP phone must support Call Wait
Conference Group
Conference Room
Do-Not-Disturb (DND), the SIP phones may have internal DND
Door Open
DSS/BLF, supported by Ericsson-LG SIP phones
Emergency Page
Emergency Calling
Integrated Voice Mail
Last Number Redial
Paging
Internal/External Page
Meet Me Page
All Call Page
376
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
Station ICR
Station & System Speed Dial
Universal Night Answer
Walking COS (Class of Service)
Wake-Up Alarm
Operation
SIP Phone
SIP phone operation generally follows the SLT procedures. Refer to the SIP phone user guide
for operation of features of the phone.
System
Operation of SIP phone provisioning is automatic when configured.
Ericsson-LG SIP phone
To activate One-Time Call Forward while receiving ring with Feature Sync active
1. Press the Call Forward button
2. Dial destination number, ringing stops and the call Forwards.
To activate One-Time DND while receiving ring with Feature Sync active
1. Press the [DND] button, the ringing call is rejected.
Conditions
1. A lock-key is required to use a 3rd party SIP phone, contact your local Ericsson-LG
representative.
2. SIP phones must be configured in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction and
have an appearance of the station assigned in the eMG80 system.
3. When using Feature Sync, the Station must be allowed Call Forward and DND for
proper operation.
4. In addition to the feature set supported for 3rd party SIP phones, the Ericsson-LG SIP
phones support Voice Over, Intrusion, Forced Hands-free ICM.
5. SIP phones provide for an End-of-dialing entry much like a mobile phone. Generally a
Send or the ‘#’ button is employed at the end of dialing so there is no delay in sending
digits.
6. With most SIP phones, a second Station appearance can be assigned to a button. In
this case, a virtual MAC is used in the system configuration.
7. The ELG and most 3rd party SIP phones support 3-party conference through a built-in
mixer. For operation refer to the SIP phone user guide. When not supported by the SIP
phone, the phone will have access to the Conference Room and Group features for
conferencing.
8. Ericsson-LG takes no responsibility of the compatibility of any 23rd party SIP phone
with the eMG80 system. It is the user’s responsibility to assure compatible operation.
9. Configuring authentication will require the SIP phone provide authentication at
377
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
registration and during the initiation of a call.
Programming
SIP DATA
SIP Attributes (PGM 210) Web only
SIP Phone Attributes (PGM 211) Web only
SIP Phone Provisioning (PGM 212) Web only
Related Features
Hardware

eMG80 supports 32 SIP Extensions with 16 simultaneous calls
378
Issue 1.0
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Issue 1.0
8.2 SIP Phone Provisioning, Ericsson-LG Phones
Description
The Provisioning feature automatically configures the Ericsson-LG SIP phones from the eMG80
database Provisioning Tables. When the SIP phone powers up, it will download the configuration
file from the system and apply the configuration to the phone. A table may include the MAC
address of a specific phone, in which case the table is only available to the SIP phone with the
assigned MAC. When no MAC address is assigned, the table is employed by all SIP phones of
the type (model) entered as the “Conf Type”.
If the Provisioning Tables are not used, the system must be configured with the SIP Phone
attributes as with any SIP phone and the SIP phone must also be configured separately to match.
Characteristics that can be configured from the Provisioning Tables include:
 Registration Timer
 SIP Phone’s local port
 Proxy Port
 Transport type
 Codec priority
 Network Time Server and DST
 Default Volume levels
 Digit Map.
For more information on these parameters refer to the SIP phone Installer Guide available from
your local Ericsson-LG representative.
In addition, Feature Sync can be enabled so that when the SIP phone activates DND or Call
Forward, the information is sent to the eMG80 system and the system will activate the
appropriate feature. This also permits the SIP phone to activate One-time Call Forward and Onetime DND while receiving ring.
Operation
System
Operation of SIP phone provisioning is automatic when configured.
Conditions
1. Provisioning is only available for Ericsson-LG SIP desk-top phone.
2. The download employs TFTP as the file transfer protocol.
Programming
SIP DATA
SIP Phone Attributes (PGM 211) Web only
SIP Phone Provisioning (PGM 212) Web only
Related Features
Hardware

IP-8800 & IP8800E series phone
379
iPECS eMG80
Feature Description and Operation Manual
Thanks for purchasing iPECS eMG80
The contents of this document are subject to revision
without notice due to continued progress in methodology,
design and manufacturing. Ericsson-LG shall have no
liability for any error or damage of any kind resulting from
the use of this document.
380
Issue 1.0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement